Download - User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity

HV9000 AF DRIVES

• User Manual• HV Ready Application Manual

1652 HV9000 Cover 4/18/00 11:17 AM

HV9000 USER MANUAL

CONTENTS

1 Safety ........................................................ 2

2 EU-directive .............................................. 4

3 Receiving .................................................. 5

4 Technical data ........................................... 7

5 Installation ............................................... 17

6 Wiring ..................................................... 23

7 HVMulti-line .................................................. 49

8 Startup .................................................... 61

9 Fault tracing ............................................ 64

10 Basic application .................................... 66

11 System parameter group 0 ..................... 73

12 HVReady application package ............... 75

13 Options ................................................... 77

A General ..............................................0-2

B Application selection .......................0-2

C Restoring default values ofapplication parameters ....................0-2

D Language selection .........................0-2

1 Standard Control Application ..........1-1

2 Local/Remote Control Application 2-1

3 Multi-step Speed Application ..........3-1

4 PI-control Application ......................4-1

5 Multi-purpose Application ...............5-1

6 Pump and fan control Application ..6-1

HV9000 HVReady APPLICATION MANUAL

HV9000 AF DRIVES

• User Manual

1652 HV9000 Cover 4/18/00 11:19 AM

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This manual provides you with theinformation necessary to install, start-up andoperate a Cutler-Hammer HV9000 drive. Werecommend that you read this manualcarefully.

At minimum the following 10 steps of the

Quick Start Guide must be done duringinstallation and startup.

If any problem occurs, please call thetelephone number listed on the back of thismanual for assistance.

Quick Start Guide

1. Check the equipment receivedcompared to what you have ordered,see chapter 3.

2. Before doing any start-up actionscarefully read the safety instructions inchapter 1.

3. Before mechanical installation, checkthe minimum clearances around theunit and verify that ambient conditionswill meet the requirements of chapter5.2. and table 4.3-1a.

4. Check the size of the motor cable, theutility cable and the fuses. Verify thetightness of the cable connections.Review chapters 6.1.1, 6.1.2 and 6.1.2.

5. Follow the installation instructions, seechapter 6.1.4.

6 Control cable sizes and groundingsystem are explained in chapter 6.2.The signal configuration for the Basicapplication is in chapter 10.2.

Remember to connect the commonterminals CMA and CMB of the digitalinput groups (See figure 10.2.1).

7. For instructions on how to use theHVMulti-line panel see chapter 7.

8. The basic application has only 10parameters in addition to the motorrating plate data, the parameter andapplication package lock. All of thesehave default values. To ensure properoperation verify the nameplate data ofboth the motor and HV9000:

- nominal voltage of the motor- nominal frequency of the motor- nominal speed of the motor- nominal current of the motor- supply voltage

Parameters are explained in chapter10.4.

9. Follow the start-up instructions, seechapter 8.

10.Your Cutler-Hammer HV9000 is nowready for use.

If a different I/O configuration or differentoperational functions from the basicconfiguration are required, see chapter 12,HVReady application package for a moresuitable configuration. For a more detaileddescription, see the separate HVReady -application manual.

Cutler-Hammer is not responsible for the useof the HV9000 differently than noted in theseinstructions.

HV9000 Page 1 (78)Contents

CONTENTS

1 Safety 2

1.1 Warnings ......................................... 21.2 Safety instructions .......................... 21.3 Grounding and ground fault

protection ....................................... 31.4 Running the motor .......................... 3

2 EU-directive ......................................... 4

2.1 CE-label .......................................... 42.2 EMC-directive ................................. 4

2.2.1 General .................................... 42.2.2 Technical criteria ...................... 42.2.3 HV9000 EMC-levels ................. 42.2.4 Manufacturer's Declaration of

Conformity ................................ 4

3 Receiving ............................................. 5

3.1 Catalog number .............................. 53.2 Storing ............................................. 63.3 Warranty .......................................... 6

4 Technical data ..................................... 7

4.1 General ............................................ 74.2 Power ratings .................................. 84.3 Specifications ............................... 15

5 Installation .......................................... 17

5.1 Ambient conditions ........................ 175.2 Cooling .......................................... 175.3 Mounting ........................................ 19

6 Wiring .............................................. 23

6.1 Power connections ....................... 266.1.1 Utility cable ............................. 266.1.2 Motor cable ............................ 266.1.3 Control cable.......................... 266.1.4 Installation instructions........... 29 6.1.4.1 Cable selection and

installation for UL listing .... 316.1.5 Cable and motor insulation

checks ................................... 466.2 Control connections ...................... 46

6.2.1 Control cables ........................ 466.2.2 Galvanic isolation barriers ...... 466.2.3 Digital input function inversion.48

7 HVMulti-line panel ............................. 49

7.1 Introduction .................................... 497.2 Panel operation ............................. 507.3 Monitoring menu............................ 517.4 Parameter group menu ................. 53

7.5 Reference menu ........................... 547.6 Programmable push-button menu 557.7 Active faults menu......................... 567.8 Fault history menu ........................ 587.9 Contrast menu .............................. 587.10 Active warning display ................. 597.11 Controlling motor from the panel . 60

7.11.1Control source change from I/O - terminals to the panel .... 60

7.11.2Control source change from panel to I/O ............................ 60

8 Start-up............................................... 61

8.1 Safety precautions ........................ 618.2 Sequence of operation .................. 61

9 Fault tracing ....................................... 64

10 Basic application ............................... 66

10.1 General ....................................... 6610.2 Control connections ................... 6610.3 Control signal logic ..................... 6710.4 Parameters, group 1 .................. 68

10.4.1 Descriptions ......................... 6910.5 Motor protection functions in

the Basic Application ................... 7210.5.1 Motor thermal protection ...... 7210.5.2 Motor stall warning ............... 72

11 System parameter group 0 ............... 73

11.1 Parameter table .......................... 7311.2 Description .................................. 73

12 "HVReady"- application package..... 75

12.1 Application selection.................... 7512.2 Standard Application ................... 7512.3 Local/Remote Application ........... 7512.4 Multi-step Speed Application ....... 7512.5 PI-control Application................... 7612.6 Multi-purpose Control App. .......... 7612.7 Pump and Fan Control App. ........ 76

13 Options .............................................. 77

13.1 Filters .......................................... 7713.2 Dynamic braking ......................... 7713.3 I/O-expander board ..................... 7713.4 Communications ......................... 7713.5 HVGraphic control panel ............. 7713.6 HVDrive ....................................... 7713.7 Control panel door mount kit ........ 7713.8 Protected chassis cable cover for

100-150 Hp open chassis units... 78

CUTLER-HAMMER HV9000 USERS MANUAL

(78) HV9000

1 SAFETY

Safety

1

2

3

1.1 Warnings

ONLY A QUALIFIED ELECTRICIAN CAN CARRYOUT THE ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

56

4

Internal components and circuit boards (except the isolated I/Oterminals) are at utility potential when the HV9000 is connected tothe line. This voltage is extremely dangerous and may causedeath or severe injury if you come in contact with it.

When the HV9000 is connected to the utility, the motorconnections U(T1), V(T2), W(T3) and DC-link / brake resistorconnections -,+ are live even if the motor is not running.

The control I/O terminals are isolated from the line potentialbut the relay outputs and other I/O:s (if jumper X4 is in OFFposition see figure 6.2.2-1) may have dangerous external voltagesconnected even if the power is disconnected from the HV9000.

The HV9000 has a large capacitive leakage current.

An upstream disconnect/protection device is to be used as notedin the National Electric Code (NEC).

Only spare parts obtained from a Cutler-Hammer authorizeddistributor can be used.

12

34

65

7

1.2 Safety instructions

The HV9000 is meant only for fixed installation. Do not make any con-nections or measurements when the HV9000 is connected to theutility.

After disconnecting the utility, wait until the unit cooling fan stops andthe indicators on the control panel are extinguished (if no keypad ispresent, check the indicators in the cover). Wait 5 more minutesbefore doing any work on the HV9000 connections. Do not open thecover before this time has run out.

Do not make any voltage withstand or megger tests on any part ofthe HV9000.

Disconnect the motor cables from the HV9000 before meggering themotor cables.

Do not touch the IC-circuits on the circuit boards. Static voltagedischarge may destroy the components.

Before connecting to the utility make sure that the cover of theHV9000 is closed

Make sure that nothing but a three-phase motor is connected to themotor terminal, with the exception of factory recommended filters.

1

!

HV9000 Page 3 (78)

2

3

Before running the motor, make sure that the motor is mountedproperly.

Maximum motor speed (frequency) should never be set to exceedthe motor's and driven machine's capability.

Before reversing the rotation of the motor shaft, make sure that thiscan be done safely.

1

Receiving

Warning Symbols

For your own safety, please pay specialattention to the instructions marked with thesewarning symbols:

= Dangerous voltage

= General warning

1.3 Grounding and ground faultprotection

The HV9000 must always be grounded with agrounding conductor connected to thegrounding terminal.

The HV9000's ground fault protection protectsonly the HV9000 if a ground fault occurs in themotor or in the motor cable.

Due to the high leakage current fault currentprotective devices do not necessarily operatecorrectly with drives. When using this type ofdevice its function should be tested in theactual installation.

1.4 Running the motor

1

!

!

(78) HV9000EU-directive

2 EU-DIRECTIVE

2.1 CE-label

The CE-label on the product guarantees thefree movement of the product in the EU-area.According to the EU-rules this guarantees thatthe product is manufactured in accordancewith different directives relating to the product.

Cutler-Hammer HV9000s are equipped withthe CE-label in accordance with the LowVoltage Directive (LVD) and the EMC directive.

2.2 EMC-directive

2.2.1 General

The EMC directive (Electro MagneticCompatibility) states that the electricalequipment must not disturb the environmentand must be immune to other Electro MagneticDisturbances in the environment.

A Technical Construction File (TCF) existswhich demonstrates that the HV9000 drivesfulfill the requirements of the EMC directive. ATechnical Construction File has been used asa statement of conformity with the EMCdirective as it is not possible to test allcombinations of installation.

2.2.2 Technical criteria

The design intent was to develop a family ofdrives, which is user friendly and cost effective,while fulfilling the customer needs. EMCcompliance was a major consideration fromthe outset of the design.

The HV9000 series is targeted at the worldmarket. To ensure maximum flexibility, yetmeet the EMC needs of different regions, alldrives meet the highest immunity levels , whileemission levels are left to the user's choice.

The HV9000 does not include the requiredEMC filter, which is available as an option.For use within the EU the end user takespersonal responsibility for EMC compliance.

2.2.3 EMC-levels

The HV9000 series does not fulfil any EMCemission requirements without an optionalRFI-filter, either built-in or separate. With anRFI-filter, the drive fulfils the EMC emissionrequirements in the heavy industrialenvironment (standards EN50081-2 ,EN61800-3).

All products fulfil all EMC immunityrequirements (standards EN50082-1,-2 ,EN61800-3).

2.2.4 Manufacturer's Declaration of Conformity

Manufacturer's Declaration of Conformity areavailable upon request.

2

HV9000 Page 5 (78)Receiving

HV9 015 A C - 5 M 0 A 00 8 Â

3.1 Catalog Number

3 RECEIVING

This Cutler-Hammer HV9000 drive has beensubjected to demanding factory tests beforeshipment. After unpacking, check that thedevice does not show any signs of damageand that the HV9000 is as ordered (refer tothe model designation code in figure 3-1).

In the event of damage, please contact andfile a claim with the carrier involvedimmediately.

If the received equipment is not the same asordered, please contact your distributorimmediately.

Note! Do not destroy the packing. Thetemplate printed on the protective cardboardcan be used for marking the mounting pointsof the HV9000 on the wall.

Figure 3-1 Catalog number system.

3

Control/Communication Options À00 - No modification01 - 5 digital inputs, 2 analog inputs (1 Voltage,

1 Current), thermistor input, encoder input02 - 5 digital inputs, relay output, thermistor input03 - 5 digital inputs, 2 analog inputs (2 Voltage),

3 relay outputs, analog output (voltage), ther-mistor input, encoder input

04 - 5 digital inputs, 3 relay outputs, analog out-put, thermistor input,

05 - Encoder board32 - ModBus RTU network communications34 - LonWorks network communications36 - Metasys® N2 Network Communications Á37 - APOGEE™ FLN Network Communications Á

Dynamic Braking Chopper Circuit ÃA - No chopper circuitB - Chopper circuit included. (Chopper circuit is

standard in all Compact NEMA 1 sizes)

Software (other than 0 denotes special)

Model HV9000

Hp size at VT rating

Series (only A at this time)

Control PanelM - HV Multi-lineG - HV Graphic

Enclosure RatingC - Compact Nema 1 (IP20)N - Std Chassis (IP00)P - Std protected chassis (IP20)S - Std NEMA 1 (IP21)J - Std NEMA 12 (IP54)G - Oversized NEMA 1D - Oversized NEMA 12

Voltage2 - 208 V Â, 230 V5 - 480 V6 - 575 V

À Control and communication options for Compact NEMA 1 are included in a separate expansion box

Á Contact Cutler-Hammer for availability

Â 208V requires 8 as first character in suffix

Ã Available as a factory installed option only

(78) HV9000

3.2 Storing

If the HV9000 must be stored beforeinstallation and startup, check that theambient conditions in the storage area areacceptable (temperature -40°C - +60°C; (-40°F - + 140°F), relative humidity <95%, nocondensation allowed).

3.3 Warranty

This equipment is covered by the Cutler-Hammer standard drive warranty policy.

Cutler-Hammer distributors may have adifferent warranty period, which is specified intheir sales terms and conditions and warrantyterms.

If any questions arise concerning the warranty,please contact your distributor.

Receiving

3

HV9000 Page 7 (78)

and can be mounted externally and connectedvia a cable to the drive.

The Control I/O block is isolated from linepotential and is connected to ground via a 1 MΩresistor and 4.7 nF capacitor. If needed, theControl I/O block can be grounded without aresistor by changing the position of the jumperX4 (GND ON/OFF) on the control board.

The basic Control interface and parameters(Basic application) make the inverter easy tooperate. If a more versatile interface orparameter settings are needed, an optionalapplication can be selected with oneparameter from a "HVReady" applicationpackage. The application package manualdescribes these in more detail.

Input and Output EMC-filters are not requiredfor the functionality of the drive, they are onlyrequired for compliance with the EU EMC-directive.

Technical data

4 TECHNICAL DATA

4.1 General

Figure 4-1 shows a block diagram of theHV9000 drive.

The three phase AC-Choke with the DC-linkcapacitor forms an LC filter which together withthe Diode Bridge produce the DC voltage forthe IGBT Inverter Bridge block. The AC-Chokesmooths the HF-disturbances from the utilityto the drive and HF-disturbances caused bythe drive to the utility. It also improves thewaveform of the input current to the drive.

The IGBT bridge produces a symmetrical threephase pulse width modulated AC voltage to themotor. The power drawn from the supply isalmost entirely active power.

The Motor and Application Control block isbased on microprocessor software. Themicroprocessor controls the motor accordingto measured signals, parameter value settingsand commands from the Control I/O block andthe Control Panel. The Motor and ApplicationControl block gives commands to the MotorControl ASIC which calculates the IGBTswitching positions. Gate Drivers amplifythese signals for driving the IGBT inverterbridge.

The Control Panel is a link between the userand the drive. With the panel the user can setparameter values, read status data and givecontrol commands. The panel is removable

Figure 4-1 HV9000 block diagram.

4

=

=

L1

L2

L3

PE

U

V

W3~

3~MotorMains

PowerSupply

Measure-ments

Fan

RS 232

ControlPanel

ControlPanel

GalvanicIsolator Control

I/O* option

K4_1

OptionCard

MotorControlASIC

GateDrivers

IGBTInverterRectifierAC-choke

OptionalBrakeChopper

Brake resistor,if optional brakechopper is installed

CurrentSensors

Out

put E

MC

-fil

ter

Inpu

t EM

C-

filte

r

(78) HV9000

4.2 Power Ratings – Base Drives – Compact Size

4

À Ivt = continuous rated input and output current (variable torque load, max. 40°C ambient).

1AMENtcapmoC,V802 1AMENtcapmoC,V802 1AMENtcapmoC,V802 1AMENtcapmoC,V802 1AMENtcapmoC,V802

PHdetaR & tnerruCtuptuO/eziSemarF

eziSerusolcnE

snoisnemiDDxHxW

)mm(dnasehcnIni

thgieW.sblni rebmuNgolataCeuqroTelbairaV

PH tvI À

12

6.501

/3M1AMENtcapmoC

9.5x0.21x7.4)9.941x8.403x4.911( 9.9 800B0M2-CA01F9VH

800B0M2-CA02F9VH

35

2/1-7

612203

/B4M1AMENtcapmoC

1.8x4.51x3.5)7.502x2.193x6.431( 4.51

800B0M2-CA03F9VH800B0M2-CA05F9VH800B0M2-CA57F9VH

015102

347507

/B5M1AMENtcapmoC

5.8x8.22x3.7)9.512x1.975x4.581( 1.33

800B0M2-CA0109VH800B0M2-CA5109VH800B0M2-CA0209VH

1AMENtcapmoC,V032 1AMENtcapmoC,V032 1AMENtcapmoC,V032 1AMENtcapmoC,V032 1AMENtcapmoC,V032PHdetaR & tnerruCtuptuO

/eziSemarFeziSerusolcnE

snoisnemiDDxHxW

)mm(dnasehcnIni


PH tvI À

123

7.40.7

01

/3M1AMENtcapmoC

9.5x0.21x7.4)9.941x8.403x4.911( 9.9

00B0M2-CA01F9VH00B0M2-CA02F9VH00B0M2-CA03F9VH

52/1-7

01

612203

/B4M1AMENtcapmoC

1.8x4.51x3.5)7.502x2.193x6.431( 4.51

00B0M2-CA05F9VH00B0M2-CA57F9VH00B0M2-CA0109VH

510252

347507

/B5M1AMENtcapmoC

5.8x8.22x3.7)9.512x1.975x4.581( 1.33


1AMENtcapmoC,V084 1AMENtcapmoC,V084 1AMENtcapmoC,V084 1AMENtcapmoC,V084 1AMENtcapmoC,V084PHdetaR & tnerruCtuptuO


snoisnemiDDxHxW

)mm(dnasehcnIni


PH tvI À

1235

35.3

58

/3M1AMENtcapmoC

9.5x0.21x7.4)9.941x8.403x4.911( 9.9

00B0M5-CA01F9VH00B0M5-CA02F9VH00B0M5-CA03F9VH00B0M5-CA05F9VH

2/1-7015102

11511272

/B4M1AMENtcapmoC

1.8x4.51x3.5)7.502x2.193x6.431( 4.51

00B0M5-CA57F9VH00B0M5-CA0109VH00B0M5-CA5109VH00B0M5-CA0209VH

520304

430425

/B5M1AMENtcapmoC

5.8x8.22x3.7)9.512x1.975x4.581( 1.33


Technical data

HV9000 Page 9 (78)Technical data

4

4.2 Power Ratings – Base Drives – Standard

À Ivt = continuous rated input and output current (variable torque load, max. 40°C ambient).Á Protected enclosure with option.

1AMEN,V802 1AMEN,V802 1AMEN,V802 1AMEN,V802 1AMEN,V802PHdetaR & tnerruCtuptuO


snoisnemiDDxHxW

)mm(dnasehcnIni


PH tvI À

23

0161 1AMEN/4M 5.8x4.51x7.4

)9.512x2.193x4.911( 6.71 800A0M2-SA02F9VH800A0M2-SA03F9VH

52/1-7

01

220334

1AMEN/5M 4.9x3.02x2.6)8.832x6.515x5.751( 3.53

800A0M2-SA05F9VH800A0M2-SA57F9VH800A0M2-SA0109VH

51025203

750738311

1AMEN/6M 4.11x6.52x7.8)6.982x2.056x0.122( 48

800A0M2-SA5109VH800A0M2-SA0209VH800A0M2-SA5209VH800A0M2-SA0309VH

040506

931561002

1AMEN/7M 31x4.93x7.41)2.033x8.0001x4.373( 081

800A0M2-SA0409VH800A0M2-SA0509VH800A0M2-SA0609VH

57 462 1AMEN/8M 41x8.05x5.91)6.553x3.0921x3.594( 733 800A0M2-SA5709VH

21AMEN,V802 21AMEN,V802 21AMEN,V802 21AMEN,V802 21AMEN,V802PHdetaR & tnerruCtuptuO


snoisnemiDDxHxW

)mm(dnasehcnIni


PH tvI À

23

0161 21AMEN/4M 5.8x4.51x7.4

)9.512x2.193x4.911( 6.71 800A0M2-JA02F9VH800A0M2-JA03F9VH

52/1-7

01

220334

21AMEN/5M 4.9x3.02x2.6)8.832x6.515x5.751( 3.53

800A0M2-JA05F9VH800A0M2-JA57F9VH800A0M2-JA0109VH

51025203

750738311

21AMEN/6M 4.11x6.52x7.8)6.982x2.056x0.122( 48

800A0M2-JA5109VH800A0M2-JA0209VH800A0M2-JA5209VH800A0M2-JA0309VH

040506

931561002

21AMEN/7M 31x4.93x7.41)2.033x8.0001x4.373( 081

800A0M2-JA0409VH800A0M2-JA0509VH800A0M2-JA0609VH

57 462 21AMEN/8M 41x8.05x5.91)6.553x3.0921x3.594( 733 800A0M2-JA5709VH

sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V802 sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V802 sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V802 sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V802 sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V802PHdetaR & tnerruCtuptuO


snoisnemiDDxHxW

)mm(dnasehcnIni


PH tvI À

23

0161 detcetorP/4M 5.8x4.11x7.4

)9.512x6.982x4.911( 6.71 800A0M2-PA02F9VH800A0M2-PA03F9VH

52/1-7

01

220334

detcetorP/5M 4.9x9.51x2.6)8.832x9.304x5.751( 3.53

800A0M2-PA05F9VH800A0M2-PA57F9VH800A0M2-PA0109VH

51025203

750738311

detcetorP/6M 4.11x7.02x7.8)6.982x8.525x0.122( 2.77

800A0M2-PA5109VH800A0M2-PA0209VH800A0M2-PA5209VH800A0M2-PA0309VH

040506

931561002

detcetorP/7M 4.21x5.13x8.9)0.513x1.008x9.842( 531

800A0M2-NA0409VH800A0M2-NA0509VH800A0M2-NA0609VH

57 462 sissahC/8M Á9.31x0.53x5.91

)1.353x988x3.594( 733 800A0M2-NA5709VH

(78) HV9000

4

Technical Data


À Ivt = continuous rated input and output current (variable torque load, max. 40°C ambient).

1AMEN,V032 1AMEN,V032 1AMEN,V032 1AMEN,V032 1AMEN,V032tnerruCtuptuO&PHdetaR


snoisnemiDDxHxW

)mm(dnasehcnIni


PH tvI À

3 01 1AMEN/4M 5.8x4.51x7.4)9.512x2.193x4.911( 6.71 00A0M2-SA03F9VH

52/1-7

0151

61220334

1AMEN/5M 4.9x3.02x2.6)8.832x6.515x5.751( 3.53

00A0M2-SA05F9VH00A0M2-SA57F9VH00A0M2-SA0109VH00A0M2-SA5109VH

02520304

750738311

1AMEN/6M 4.11x6.52x7.8)6.982x2.056x0.122( 48

00A0M2-SA0209VH00A0M2-SA5209VH00A0M2-SA0309VH00A0M2-SA0409VH

050657

931561002

1AMEN/7M 31x4.93x7.41)2.033x8.0001x4.373( 081


001 462 1AMEN/8M 9.31x6.74x5.91)1.353x0.9021x3.594( 733 00A0M2-SA0019VH



snoisnemiDDxHxW

)mm(dnasehcnIni


PH tvI À

3 01 21AMEN/4M 5.8x4.51x7.4)9.512x2.193x4.911( 6.71 00A0M2-JA03F9VH

52/1-7

0151

61220334

21AMEN/5M 4.9x3.02x2.6)8.832x6.515x5.751( 3.53

00A0M2-JA05F9VH00A0M2-JA57F9VH00A0M2-JA0109VH00A0M2-JA5109VH

02520304

750738311

21AMEN/6M 4.11x6.52x7.8)6.982x2.056x0.122( 48

00A0M2-JA0209VH00A0M2-JA5209VH00A0M2-JA0309VH00A0M2-JA0409VH

050657

931561002

21AMEN/7M 31x4.93x7.41)2.033x8.0001x4.373( 081


001 462 21AMEN/8M 9.31x6.74x5.91)1.353x0.9021x3.594( 733 00A0M2-JA0019VH


4



sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V032 sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V032 sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V032 sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V032 sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V032tnerruCtuptuO&PHdetaR


snoisnemiDDxHxW

)mm(dnasehcnIni


PH tvI À

3 01 detcetorP/4M 5.8x4.51x7.4)9.512x2.193x4.911( 6.71 00A0M2-PA03F9VH

52/1-7

0151

61220334

detcetorP/5M 4.9x3.02x2.6)8.832x6.515x5.751( 3.53

00A0M2-PA05F9VH00A0M2-PA57F9VH00A0M2-PA0109VH00A0M2-PA5109VH

02520304

750738311

detcetorP/6M 4.11x6.52x7.8)6.982x2.056x0.122( 48

00A0M2-PA0209VH00A0M2-PA5209VH00A0M2-PA0309VH00A0M2-PA0409VH

050657

931561002

sissahC/7M Á31x4.93x7.41

)2.033x8.0001x4.373( 08100A0M2-NA0509VH00A0M2-NA0609VH00A0M2-NA5709VH

001 462 sissahC/8M Á9.31x6.74x5.91

)1.353x0.9021x3.594( 733 00A0M2-NA0019VH

(78) HV9000

4

Technical Data




/eziSemarFeziSeruoslcnE

snoisnemiDDxHxW

)mm(dnasehcnIni


PH tvI À

52/1-7

01

81151

1AMEN/4M 5.8x4.51x7.4)9.512x2.193x4.911( 6.71


510252

127223

1AMEN/5M 4.9x3.02x2.6)8.832x6.515x5.751( 3.53


0304050657

0425567769

1AMEN/6M 4.11x6.52x7.8)6.982x2.056x0.122( 8.38

00A0M5-SA0309VH00A0M5-SA0409VH00A0M5-SA0509VH00A0M5-SA0609VH00A0M5-SA5709VH

001521051

521061081

1AMEN/7M 0.31x4.93x7.41)2.033x8.0001x4.373( 122


002052

062023 1AMEN/8M 9.31x6.74x5.91

)1.353x0.9021x3.594( 903 00A0M5-SA0029VH00A0M5-SA0529VH

003004

004064 1AMEN/9M 4.51x1.65x6.72

)2.193x9.4241x0.107( 475 00A0M5-SA0039VH00A0M5-SA0049VH


/eziSemarFeziSeruoslcnE

snoisnemiDDxHxW

)mm(dnasehcnIni


PH tvI À

52/1-7

01

81151

21AMEN/4M 5.8x4.51x7.4)9.512x2.193x4.911( 6.71


510252

127223

21AMEN/5M 4.9x3.02x2.6)8.832x6.515x5.751( 3.53


0304050657

0425567769

21AMEN/6M 4.11x6.52x7.8)6.982x2.056x0.122( 8.38

00A0M5-JA0309VH00A0M5-JA0409VH00A0M5-JA0509VH00A0M5-JA0609VH00A0M5-JA5709VH

001521051

521061081

21AMEN/7M 0.31x4.93x7.41)2.033x8.0001x4.373( 122


002052

062023 21AMEN/8M 9.31x6.74x5.91

)1.353x0.9021x3.594( 903 00A0M5-JA0029VH00A0M5-JA0529VH

003004

004064 21AMEN/9M 4.51x1.65x6.72

)2.193x9.4241x0.107( 475 00A0M5-JA0039VH00A0M5-JA0049VH


4





snoisnemiDDxHxW

)mm(dnasehcnIni


PH tvI À

52/1-7

01

81151

1AMEN/4M 5.8x4.51x7.4)9.512x2.193x4.911( 6.71


510252

127223

1AMEN/5M 4.9x3.02x2.6)8.832x6.515x5.751( 3.53


0304050657

0425567769

1AMEN/6M 4.11x6.52x7.8)6.982x2.056x0.122( 8.38


001521051

521061081

1AMEN/7M 0.31x4.93x7.41)2.033x8.0001x4.373( 122


002052

062023 1AMEN/8M 9.31x6.74x5.91

)1.353x0.9021x3.594( 903 00A0M5-SA0029VH00A0M5-SA0529VH

003004

004064 1AMEN/9M 4.51x1.65x6.72

)2.193x9.4241x0.107( 475 00A0M5-SA0039VH00A0M5-SA0049VH



snoisnemiDDxHxW

)mm(dnasehcnIni


PH tvI À

52/1-7

01

81151

21AMEN/4M 5.8x4.51x7.4)9.512x2.193x4.911( 6.71


510252

127223

21AMEN/5M 4.9x3.02x2.6)8.832x6.515x5.751( 3.53


0304050657

0425567769

21AMEN/6M 4.11x6.52x7.8)6.982x2.056x0.122( 8.38

00A0M5-JA0309VH00A0M5-JA0409VH00A0M5-JA0509VH00A0M5-JA0609VH00A0M5-JA5709VH

001521051

521061081

21AMEN/7M 0.31x4.93x7.41)2.033x8.0001x4.373( 122


002052

062023 21AMEN/8M 9.31x6.74x5.91

)1.353x0.9021x3.594( 903 00A0M5-JA0029VH00A0M5-JA0529VH

003004

004064 21AMEN/9M 4.51x1.65x6.72

)2.193x9.4241x0.107( 475 00A0M5-JA0039VH00A0M5-JA0049VH

(78) HV9000

4


sissahC/1AMEN,V575 sissahC/1AMEN,V575 sissahC/1AMEN,V575 sissahC/1AMEN,V575 sissahC/1AMEN,V575tnerruCtuptuO&PHdetaR


snoisnemiDDxHxW

)mm(dnasehcnIni


PH tvI À

35

2/1-70151025203

5.45.7

014191326253

1AMEN/5M 4.01x3.71x2.6)2.462x4.934x5.751( 1.33

00A0M6-SA03F9VH00A0M6-SA05F9VH00A0M6-SA57F9VH00A0M6-SA0109VH00A0M6-SA5109VH00A0M6-SA0209VH00A0M6-SA5209VH00A0M6-SA0309VH

04050657001

24252658001

1AMEN/6M 4.11x3.42x7.8)6.982x2.716x0.122( 8.38


521051

221541 sissahC/8M Á

9.31x0.53x5.91)1.353x0.988x3.594( 003 00A0M6-NA5219VH

00A0M6-NA0519VH

002052


4.51x4.93x6.72)2.193x8.0001x0.107( 664 00A0M6-NA0029VH

00A0M6-NA0529VH

003004


4.51x4.93x9.83)2.193x8.0001x1.889( 206 00A0M6-NA0039VH

00A0M6-NA0049VH


Technical data

HV9000 Page 15 (78)

4.3 Specifications

Utility Input voltage Vin 208V, 230V, 480V, 575V

connection Input frequency 45—66 Hz

Connection to the mains once per minute or less (normally)

Motor Output voltage 0 — Vin

Connection Continuous output IVT: ambient max +40°C, 1.1 x IVT (1min/10 min)current

Starting torque 200%

Starting current 2.5 x ICT: 2 s every 20 s if output frequency <30 Hzand if the heatsink temperature <+60°C

Output frequency 0—500 Hz

Frequency resolution 0.01 Hz

Control Control method Frequency Control (V/Hz)characte-ristics

Switching frequency 1—16 kHz (depending on horsepower rating)

Frequency Analog I/P Resolution 12 bit, accuracy ±1%reference Panel refer. Resolution 0.01 Hz

Field weakening point 30—500 Hz

Acceleration time 0.1—3000 s

Deceleration time 0.1—3000 s

Braking torque DC brake: 30%*TN (without brake option)

Environ- Ambient operating -10 (no frost)—+40°C at IVT, (1.1 x ICT max 1min/10 min)mental temperaturelimits

Storage temperature -40°C—+60°C

Relative humidity <95%, no condensation allowed

Air quality- chemical vapors IEC 721-3-3, unit in operation, class 3C2- mechanical particles IEC 721-3-3, unit in operation, class 3S2

Altitude Max 1000 m at continuous IVT specificationOver 1000 m reduce IVT by 1% per each 100 mAbsolute maximum altitude 3000 m

Vibration Operation: max displacement amplitude 3 mm(IEC 721-3-3) at 2—9 Hz,

Max acceleration amplitude 0.5 G at 9—200 Hz

Shock Operation: max 8 G, 11 ms(IEC 68-2-27) Storage and shipping: max 15 G, 11 ms (in the package)

Enclosure Open and protected chassis (IP00 and IP20)Compact NEMA 1 (IP20)NEMA 1 (IP21)NEMA 12 (IP54)Oversized NEMA 1Oversized NEMA 12

Technical data

Table 4.3-1 Specifications

4

(78) HV9000

EMC Noise immunity Fulfils EN50082-1,-2 , EN61800-3

Emissions Equipped with an optional external RFI-Filterfulfils EN50081-2 , EN61800-3

Safety Fulfils EN50178, EN60204 -1,CE, UL, C-UL, FI, GOST R(check from the unit nameplate specified approvals for each unit)

Control Analog voltage 0—+10 V, Ri = 200 kΩ, single ended

connections (-10—+10V , joystick control), resolution12 bit, accur. ±1%

Analog current 0 (4) — 20 mA, Ri = 250 Ω, differential

Digital inputs (6) Positive or negative logic

Aux. voltage +24 V ±20%, max 100 mA

Pot. meter reference +10 V -0% — +3%, max 10 mA

Analog output 0 (4) — 20 mA, RL <500 Ω, resolution 10 bit, accur. ±3%

Digital output Open collector output, 50 mA/48 V

Relay outputs Max switching voltage: 300 V DC, 250 V ACMax switching load: 8A / 24 V

0.4 A / 250 V DC2 kVA / 250 V AC

Max continuous load: 2 A rms

Protective Overcurrent protection Trip limit 4 x IVT

functions Overvoltage protection Utility voltage: 208 VTrip limit: 1.55 x Vin

Utility voltage: 230 VTrip limit: 1.41 x

V

in

Utility voltage: 480 VTrip limit: 1.41 x Vin

Utility voltage: 575 VTrip limit: 1.62 x

V

in

Undervoltage protection Trip limit 0.65 x Vn

Ground-fault protection Protects the inverter from an ground-fault in the output(motor or motor cable)

Utility supervision Trip if any of the input phases is missing

Motor phase supervision Trip if any of the output phases is missing

Unit over temperature Yesprotection

Motor overload protection Yes

Stall protection Yes

Motor underload protection Yes

Short-circuit protection of Yes+24V and +10V reference voltages

Technical data

Table 4.3-1 Specifications.

4

5

InstallationHV9000 Page 17 (78)

5 INSTALLATION

5.1 Ambient conditions

The environmental limits mentioned in table4.3-1 must not be exceeded.

5.2 Cooling

The specified space around the driveensures proper cooling air circulation. Seetable 5.2-1 for dimensions. If multiple unitsare to be installed above each other, thedimensions must be b+c and air from theoutlet of the lower unit must be directedaway from the inlet of the upper unit.

With high switching frequencies and highambient temperatures the maximum con-tinuous output current has to be deratedaccording to Table 5.2-3 and Figures 5.2-3a-d.

Table 5.2 -1 Installation space dimensions. Table 5.2-2 Required cooling air.

Frame Size / Enclosure Style Dimensions ( in )

a a2 b c

M3 / Compact NEMA 1 1 0.5 4 2

M4 / Protected & NEMA 12

M4 / NEMA 1 1 1 4 2

M4B / M5B Compact NEMA 1 1 0.5 5 2.5

M5 / Protected & NEMA 12

M5 / NEMA 1 1 1 5 2.5

M6 / Protected & NEMA 12 1.5 4 6.5 3.5

M6 / NEMA 1 1.5 1.5 6.5 3.5

M7 / Chassis* & NEMA 12 3 ( 1.5 )** 3 ( 2.5 )** 12 4

M7 / NEMA 1

M8 / Chassis* & NEMA 12 10*** ( 3 )** 3 12

M8 / NEMA 1

M9 / Chassis* & NEMA 12 8*** ( 3 )** 3 12

M9 / NEMA 1

M10 / Chassis & NEMA 12 8*** ( 3 )** 3 12

M10 / NEMA 1

M11 / Chassis & NEMA 12

M11 / NEMA 1 Contact Factory

M12 / Chassis & NEMA 12

M12 / NEMA 1

a2 - Distance from inverter to inverter in multiple inverter

installations

* - Protected enclosure with optional cover.

** - Minimum allowable space - No space available for fan

change.

*** - Space for fan change on sides of inverter.

Figure 5.2-1 Installation space.

b

a

c

a

PH erusolcnE/egatloV deriuqeR)MFC(wolfriA

2-1 1AMENtcapmoC/802

24

3-2 21/1AMEN&detcetorP/802







001



51-5.7 21/1AMEN&detcetorP/032



57-52 1AMEN&detcetorP/575

02 1AMENtcapmoC/802

812


52 1AMENtcapmoC/032


04 1AMENtcapmoC/084

57-06 21/1AMEN&sissahC/084

001 1AMEN&detcetorP/575




052-002 21/1AMEN&detcetorP/084567


004-003 21/1AMEN&detcetorP/0848411


004-003 1AMEN&detcetorP/575 6371

(78) HV9000

5

Installation

Figure 5.2-2bFigure 5.2-2a

Figures 5.2-2a—c Power dissipation as a function of the switching frequency for 480V(IVT,variable torque) for standard enclosures

Figure 5.2-2c 200-400 HP

30-150 HP

2 - 75 HP 30-100 HPFigure 5.2-2d Figure 5.2-2e

Figures 5.2-2d—e: Power dissipation as a function of the switching frequency for 230 V(IVT,variable torque) for standard enclosures.

3 - 25 hp

1200HV9025

W

fsw [kHz]

HV9020

HV9015

HV9F10

HV9F75

HV9F50HV9F30

1000

800

600

400

200

01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

HV9150

HV9125

HV9100

HV9075

HV9060

HV9050

HV9040HV9030

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

W

0 fsw [kHz]1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

HV9400

HV9250

HV9300

HV9200

16 000

14 000

12 000

10 000

8 000

6 000

4 000

W

fsw [kHz]1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

HV9025

HV9020

HV9015

HV9010

HV9F75

HV9F50

HV9F30

1 200

1 000

800

600

400

200

W

fsw [kHz]

1 2 3 4 5 6

HV9100

HV9075

HV9060

HV9050HV9040

HV9030

4 000

3 000

2 000

1 000

W

fsw [kHz]

1 2 3 4 5 6

5


Figures 5.2-2 f—h: Power dissipation as a function of the switching frequency for 480V(IVT,variable torque), Compact Nema 1.

Figure 5.2-2f Figure 5.2-2g

Figure 5.2-2h

50

100

150

Po

wer

loss

/ W

0

200

250

300

3000 10000 16000

Switching frequency / Hz

HV9F10

HV9F20

HV9F30

HV9F50

Po

wer

loss

/ W

3000 10000 16000


HV9F75

HV9010

HV9015

HV9020

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

Po

wer

loss

/ W

0

3000 10000 16000


HV9025

HV9030

HV9040

1000

600

800

200

400

1200

1400

1600

(78) HV9000

5

Installation

Type Curve(HP) 3.6kHz 10kHz 16kHz

1-5 no derating no derating no derating7.5 no derating 1 210 no derating no derating no derating15 no derating no derating no derating20 no derating no derating 325 no derating no derating no derating30 no derating no derating 440 no derating 5 not allowed50 no derating 6 not allowed60 7 8 not allowed75 no derating 9 not allowed100 no derating 10 not allowed125 11 12 not allowed150 no derating 13 not allowed175 no derating 14 not allowed200 15 16 not allowed250 no derating 17 not allowed300 18 19 not allowed400 * * *

Figure 5.2-3a—d:Constant output current (IVT) derating curves as a function of ambient temperatureand switching frequency.

Figure 5.2-3 dFigure 5.2.3 c

Figure 5.2.3 b

Figure 5.2.3 a

Table 5.2-3 Constant output current deratingcurves for 480 V (IVT,variable torque).

* = Ask the details from the factory

IVT (A)

˚C

120

100

10 20 30 40 500

80

60

40

20

0

HV9075 IVT 3.6 kHz

HV9060 IVT 10 kHz

HV9050 IVT 10 kHz

HV9075IVT 10 kHz

HV9040 IVT 16 kHz

7

8

6

5

4

HV9400

HV9250

HV9300

HV9200

16 000

14 000

12 000

10 000

8 000

6 000

4 000

W

fsw [kHz]1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

HV9025

HV9020

HV9015

HV9010

HV9F75

HV9F50

HV9F30

1 200

1 000

800

600

400

200

W

fsw [kHz]

1 2 3 4 5 6

IVT (A)

˚C

HV9025IVT 16 kHz

HV9010IVT 10 kHz

HV9010IVT 16 kHz

45

40

35

30

25

20

15

10

5

00 10 20 30 40 50

3

1

2

5


5.3 Mounting

The HV9000 should be mounted in a verticalposition on the wall or on the back plane of acubicle. Follow the requirement for cooling,see table 5.2-1 and figure 5.2-1 fordimensions.

To ensure a safe installation, make sure thatthe mounting surface is relatively flat.Mounting holes can be marked on the wallusing the template on the cover of thecardboard shipping package.

Mounting is done with four screws or boltsdepending on the size of the unit, see tables5.3-1 and 5.3-2, and figure 5.3-1 fordimensions. Units, from 25 Hp to 500 Hp, havespecial lifting "eyes" which must be used, seefigures 5.3-2 and 5.3-3.

The mounting instructions for units over 500Hp are given in a separate manual. If furtherinformation is needed contact your Cutler-Hammer distributor.

Figure 5.3-1 Mounting dimensions.

Table 5.3-1 Dimensions for open panel units.

Frame Enclosure Voltage Dimensions (inches)W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 H4 D1 R1 R2

M3 Compact 208 / 230 / 480 4.7 3.7 13.5 13.1 12 5.9 0.28 0.14M4B NEMA 1 208 / 230 / 480 5.3 3.7 17 16.5 15.4 8.1 0.28 0.14M5B 208 / 230 / 480 7.3 5.5 23.4 22.8 21.7 8.5 0.35 0.18

M4 208 / 230 / 480 4.7 3.7 16.7 16.2 15.4 8.5 0.28 0.14M5 208 / 230 / 480 6.2 5 22.1 21.5 20.3 9.4 0.35 0.18M6 208 / 230 / 480 8.7 7.1 27.6 26.9 25.6 11.4 0.35 0.18M7 NEMA 1 / 12 208 / 230 / 480 14.7 13.6 41.3 40.6 39.4 13 0.35 0.18M8 208 / 230 / 480 19.5 18 53.1 36.5 50.8 13.9 0.45 0.24M9 480 27.6 26 57.9 40.2 56.1 15.4 0.45 0.24M10 480 CONTACT FACTORY

M4 208 / 230 / 480 4.7 3.7 12.7 12.3 11.4 1.6 8.5 0.28 0.14M5 208 / 230 / 480 6.2 5 17.8 17.1 15.9 1.8 9.4 0.35 0.18M5 575 6.2 5 19.1 18.5 17.3 1.8 10.4 0.35 0.18M6 230 / 380 / 480 8.7 7.1 22.6 22 20.7 3.9 11.4 0.35 0.18M6 Chassis / 600 8.7 7.1 26.3 25.6 24.3 3.9 11.4 0.35 0.18M7 Protected 208 / 230 / 480 9.8 8.7 33.6 32.9 31.5 12.4 0.35 0.18M8 575 19.5 18 37.4 36.5 35 13.9 0.45 0.24M9 480 / 575 27.6 26 41.1 40.2 39.4 15.4 0.45 0.24M10 480 / 575 38.9 37.3 41.1 40.2 39.4 15.4 0.45 0.24M11 480 / 575 CONTACT FACTORYM12 480 / 575

W1

H1 H2

D1

H3

H4

R2

R1

R2

W2

(78) HV9000

5

Installation

Figure 5.3-2 Lifting of 30—150 Hp units.

Figure 5.3-3 Lifting of 200—400 Hp units.

NOTE!Unit sizes 200 — 400 Hp - do not lift without a rod through the lifting holes inthe unit - see above.

L1 L2 L3 U V W – + + + L1 L2 L3 U V W – + + +

WRONG CORRECT

HV9000 Page 23 (78)

6

6 WIRING

General wiring diagrams are shown in figures6-1—6-3. The following chapters have moredetailed instructions about wiring and cableconnections.

Wiring

Figure 6-1: General wiring diagram, open/protected chassis units frame sizes M4—M6 .

The general wiring diagrams for M11 and M12frame sizes are provided in a separate manual.If further information is required, contact yourCutler-Hammer distributor.

U V W- +

M3~

DO1

21

22

24

25

RO2/1

RO2/3

2/2

RO1/3

1/2

18

19

U<+48VI<50mA

ac/dc

+

R

L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3

Vin +1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

GND

Iin +

Iin -

GND

DIA1

DIA2

DIA3

CMA

GND

DIB4

DIB5

DIB6

CMB

24 V

GND

24 V

GND

x)

x)

0(4)/20mARL<500Ω

k6_1

1)

RO1/1

1) Brake Chopper (Optional)

Switching: <8A/24Vdc,<0.4A/300Vdc,<2kVA/250VacContinuously:<2Arms

Brake Resistor(Optional)

24Vout

Reference(voltage)

Reference(current)

+10 Vref.

24Vout

Iout+

Iout-

x) dotted line indicates the connection with inverted signal levels

RFI-Filter (Optional)

(78) HV9000

6

Figure 6-2 General wiring diagram, open/protected chassis frame size > M7 and NEMA 1/12 units framesize > M8.

Wiring

U V W

- +

M3~

DO1

21

22

24

25

RO2/1

RO2/3

2/2

RO1/3

1/2

18

19

U<+48VI<50mA

ac/dcR

L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3

Uin +1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

GND

Iin +

Iin -

GND

DIA1

DIA2

DIA3

CMA

GND

DIB4

DIB5

DIB6

CMB

24 V

GND

24 V

GND

x)

x)

0(4)/20mARL<500Ω

k6_2

1)

RO1/1

1) Brake- Chopper (Optional)


24Vout

Reference(voltage)

Reference(current)

+10 Vref.

24Vout

Iout+

Iout-

RFI-Filter (Optional)


+


HV9000 Page 25 (78)

6

Wiring

Figure 6-3 General wiring diagram, NEMA 1/12 units frame sizes M4 to M7 and Compact NEMA 1 units.

U V

DO1

21

22

24

25

RO2/1

RO2/3

2/2

RO1/3

1/2

18

19

U<+48VI<50mA

ac/dcR

L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3

Uin +1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

GND

Iin +

Iin -

GND

DIA1

DIA2

DIA3

CMA

GND

DIB4

DIB5

DIB6

CMB

24 V

GND

24 V

GND

x)

x)

0(4)/20mARL<500Ω

RO1/1

M3~

k6_3

+

1)

-

W

1) Brake Chopper (Optional)



24Vout

Reference(voltage)

Reference(current)

+10 Vref.

24Vout

Iout+

out-

Internal RFI-


(78) HV9000

6

6.1 Power connections

Use heat-resistant cables, +60°C or higher.The cable (and the fuses) must be sized inaccordance with the rated output current ofthe unit. Installation of the cable consistentwith the UL-instructions is explained inchapter 6.1.4.1.

The minimum dimensions for the Cu-cablesand corresponding fuses are given in thetables 6.1-2 — 6.1-5. The fuses have beenselected so that they will also function asoverload protection for the cables.

Consistent with UL requirements, formaximum protection of the HV9000, ULrecognized fuses type RK should be used.

If the motor temperature protection (I2t) isused as overload protection the cables maybe selected according to that. If 3 or morecables are used in parallel, on the largerunits, every cable must have it's ownoverload protection.

These instructions cover the case whereone motor is connected with one cable tothe drive.

Wiring

Always pay attention to the local authorityregulations and installation conditions.

6.1.1 Utility cable

Utility cables for the different EU EMC levelsare defined in table 6.1-1.

6.1.2 Motor cable

Motor cables for the different EU EMC levelsare defined in table 6.1-1.

6.1.3 Control cable

Control cables are specified in chapter6.2.1.

Cable level N level I

Utility cable 1 1

Motor cable 2 2

Control cable 3 3

Table 6.1-1 Cable types for the different EMC levels.

1 = The power cable suitable for the installation, ampacity and voltage.Shielded cable is not required.

2 = The power cable contains a concentric protection wire, and is suitable for the ampacity and voltage.For maximum EMC protection, use of shielded cable is required.

3 = The control cable has a compact low-impedance shield.

HV9000 Page 27 (78)

6Table 6.1-2 Utility, motor cables and fuse recommendations according to IVT

output current 480V range.

Wiring

Table 6.1-4 Utility, motor cables and fuserecommendations according to IVToutput current, 575V range.

PHV084 tvI esuFelbac-uC

ROTOM&YTILITU)dnuorG(

1 3

01 )61(613 5

5 8

5.7 11 51 )41(41

01 51 02 )21(21

51 12 52 )01(01

02 72 53

)8(852 23 05

03 04 05

04 25 06 )6(6

05 56 08 )6(4

06 77 001 )6(2

57 69 521 )4(0

001 521 051 )2(00

521 061 002)0(000

051 081 002

002 062 003 )000(MCM053

052 023 004 ])00(MCM052[x2

003 004 005 ])000(MCM053[x2

004 064 006 ])MCM052(MCM055[x2



3

41 51 )41(415

5.7

01

51 91 02 )21(21

02 32 52 )01(01

52 62 53

)8(803 53 53

04 24 05

05 25 06)6(6

06 26 001

57 58 001)6(2

001 001 001

521 221 521 )4(0

051 541 001 )2(00

002 222 052 )00(MCM003

052 782 003 )000(MCM053

(78) HV9000

6

Table 6.1-5 Utility, motor cables and fuserecommendations according to IVToutput current 230V range.

Table 6.1-6 Maximum cable sizes of the powerterminals



1 7.4

01 )61(612 7

3 01

5 61 51 )41(41

5.7 22 52 )01(01

01 03 53)8(8

51 34 05

02 75 06 )6(6

52 07 08 )6(4

03 38 001 )6(2

04 311 521 )4(0

05 931 051 )2(00

06 561 002)0(000

57 002 002

001 462 003 )000(MCM053

emarF pH egatloV)MCM/GWA(ELBAC

niaM dnuorG

3M llA 084/032 41 41

4M llA 084/032 01 01

B4M llA 084/0326 6

5M llA 575/084/032

B5M52-51 032

2 00

04-52 084

6M

04-02 032

04-03 084

06-04 575

57-05 084lA00,uC 00

001-57 575

7M57-05 032

MCM053lAMCM005x2 000

051-001 084

8M

001 032

052-002 084

051-521 575

9M004-003 084

MCM006x2 MCM005x2052-002 575

01M 004-003 575 MCM005x4 À MCM005x2

À desuebnacselbacdetcennoclellarap3mumixam21/1AMEN

Wiring

HV9000 Page 29 (78)

6

6.1.4 Installation instructions

If a HV9000 open chassis unit is to be installed outside a control cabinet or aseparate cubicle a protective ÍP20 cover should be installed to cover the cableconnections, see figure 6.1.4-3. The protective cover may not be needed if theunit is mounted inside a control cabinet or a separate cubicle.

All open chassis HV9000 units should always be mounted inside a controlcabinet, or a separate cubicle.

Locate the motor cable away from the other cables:

- Avoid long parallel runs with other cables.- If the motor cable runs in parallel with the other cables, the minimum

distances given in table 6.1.4-1 between the motor cable and controlcables should be followed.

- These minimum distances apply also between the motor cable andsignal cable of other systems.

- The maximum length of a motor cable can be 600ft (180 m) (exceptfor ratings 2 Hp and below max. length is 160 ft (50 m) and 3 Hp max.length 330 ft (100 m)). The power cables should cross other cables at anangle of 90° degrees. An output dv/dt filter option is required for motor cablelengths exceeding 33ft (10m) for drive 2 Hp and below and 100ft (33m) fordrives 3Hp and larger.

Distance Motorbetween cables cable lengthft (m) ft (m)1 (0.3) <165 (50)

3.3 (1) <600 (180)

See chapter 6.1.5 for cable insulation checks.

Connecting cables:

- Motor and utility cables should be stripped according to figure 6.1.4-2and table 6.1.4-2.

- Open the cover of the HV9000 according to figure 6.1.4-3.- Remove sufficient plugs from the cable cover (open chassis) or from the

bottom of the NEMA 1/12 units.- Pass cables through the holes in the cable cover.- Connect the utility, motor and control cables to the correct terminals.

See figures 6.1.4-3—16. HV9000 + external RFI-filter: (See RFI-filteroption manual). Contact your Cutler-Hammer distributor for moreinformation. Cable installation consistent with UL-instructions isexplained in chapter 6.1.4.1.

- Check that control cable wires do not make contact with electricalcomponents in the device.

- Connect optional brake resistor cable (if required).- Ensure the ground cable is connected to the -terminal of the

frequency converter and motor.- For open chassis units, 200-400 Hp, connect the isolator plates of the

protective cover and terminals according to figure 6.1.4-11.

Wiring

1

2

43

Table 6.1.4-1 Minimum cable distances.

(78) HV9000

6

- If a shielded power cable is used, connect its shield to the ground terminalsof the drive, motor and supply panel.

- Mount the cable cover (open chassis units) and the unit cover.- Ensure the control cables and internal wiring are not trapped between the

cover and the body of the unit.

NOTE:

The connection of the transformer inside the unit in frame sizes M7—M19 hasto be changed if other than the default supply voltage of the drive is used.Contact your Cutler-Hammer distributor if more information is needed.

Voltage Code (VC) Default Supply Voltage

2 230V

5 480V

6 575V

Wiring

5

HV9000 Page 31 (78)

6

6.1.4.1 Cable selection and installationfor the UL listing

For Installation and cable connections the fol-lowing must be noted. Use only with copperwire temperature rating of at least 60/75°C.

Units are suitable for use on a circuit capableof delivering not more than the fault RMSsymmetrical amperes mentioned in the table6.1.4.1-1, 480V maximum.

In addition to the connecting information thetightening torque of the terminals are definedin the table 6.1.4.1-2.

Table 6.1.4.1-1 Maximum symmetrical supply current.

Table 6.1.4.1-2 Tightening torque.

Wiring

emarF egatloV lacirtemmysSMRmumixaMtiucricylppusnoserepma

3M llA 000,53

21M-4M llA 000,001

emarF pH egatloV gninethgiT)sbl-ni(euqrot

3M llA llA 7

B4M llA llA 7

B5M llA llA 02

4M llA llA 7

5M llA llA 02

6M 52-02 032 53

6M 04-03 032 44

6M 04-03 084 53

6M 57-05 084 44

6M 05-04 575 53

6M 001-05 575 44

7M llA llA 44

8M llA llA 016 À

9M llA llA 016 À

À seodrabsubehtfoffodnatsdetalosiehT.euqrotgninethgitdetsilehtdnatshtiwton

euqrotretnuocylppaothcnerwaesU.gninethgitnehw

(78) HV9000

6

Wiring

Figure 6.1.4-2 Opening the cover of the HV9000.

Figure 6.1.4-1 Stripping motor and utilitycables.

Table 6.1.4-2 Stripping lengths of the cables (in).

L2L3

L1L4

Groundconductor

Utilitycables

3

2

1 1

3

2

IP54KANS

1 Loosen screws (2 pcs)

2 Pull cover bottom outwards

3 Push cover upwards

emarF pH egatloV).ni(shtgneLgnippirtS

1s 2s 3s 4s

3M llA 084/032 74.0 2.2 2.2 74.0

4M llA 084/032 42.0 4.1 4.2 6.0

B4M llA 084/032 42.0 4.1 4.2 6.0

5M llA 575/084/032 53.0 6.1 4 6.0

B5M52-51 03203-52 084

6M

04-02 0326.0 6.1 4 6.004-03 084

06-04 575

57-05 084

1 6.1 4 6.0001-57 575

7M001-05 032

051-521 084 2 1

8M052-002 084

YROTCAFTCATNOC

051-521 575

9M004-003 084

052-002 575

004-053 575

HV9000 Page 33 (78)

6

Wiring

Figure 6.1.4-3 Cable assembly for open chassis: 5 - 25 Hp voltage code 4 and 3 - 15 Hp code 2.

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526

L1 L2 L3 - + U V W

Power card

Fixing screw

Control cable

Utility cable

Motor Cable

Fixing screw

Brake resistor cable

Fixing screw

Control card

Control I/Oterminals

Connect the shieldto the terminal

Fix the control cablewith a tie wrap

Groundterminals

(PE)

Utility cableterminals

(L1, L2, L3)

DC-link/Brakeresistorterminals (–,+)

Motor cableterminals(U,V,W)

(78) HV9000

6

Wiring

Figure 6.1.4-4 Cable assembly for Standard NEMA 1: 5 - 10 Hp voltage code 5 and 3 Hp code 2

Control card

I/O terminals

Connect the shieldto the terminal

Fix the controlcable with a tiewrap

Ground terminal

Utility cableterminalsDC-link/brakeresistor terminals

Motor cableterminals

Motor cableBrake resistor cable

Utility cableControl cable

Ground terminal

m4IP21

Rubber grommets

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526

L1 L2 L3 - + U V W

HV9000 Page 35 (78)

6

Wiring

Figure 6.1.4-5 Cable assembly for Standard NEMA 1: 15 - 25 Hp voltage code 5 and 5 - 15 Hp code 2.

Control card

I/O terminals

Ground terminal

Fix the controlcable with a tie

wrap

Connect theshield to

the terminal


DC-link/brakeresisotr terminalsMotor cableterminals

Ground terminals

Rubber grommets

L1 L2 L3 - + U V W

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526


Control cableUtility cable m5IP21

(78) HV9000

6

Wiring

Figure 6.1.4-6 Cable assembly for Standard NEMA 12: 15 - 25 Hp voltage code 5 and 5 - 15 Hp code 2

Control card

I/O terminals

Ground terminal

Connect theshield to

the terminal

Internalcooling fan

Utility cableterminalsDC-link/brakeresistor terminals


Rubber grommets


Control cableUtility cable

Ch5IP54

L1 L2 L3 - + U V W

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526

HV9000 Page 37 (78)

6

Wiring

Figure 6.1.4-7 Cable assembly for open chassis: 30 - 75 Hp voltage code 5 and 20 - 40 Hp code 2

Control cable

Utility cableterminals(L1, L2, L3)

Cable cover


Fixing screw Fixing screw


Power card

Control card


Connect theshield to theterminal


Groundterminals

(PE)

Utility cable

DC-link/Brakeresistorterminals (–,+)

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526

L1 L2 L3 – + U V W

(78) HV9000

6

Wiring

Figure 6.1.4-8 Cable assembly for Standard NEMA 1 30 - 75 Hp voltage code 5 and 20 - 40 Hp code 2

Control cable


Motor Cable


Rubber grommets

Ground terminals


Control cardI/O terminals

Connect theshield to theterminal


Ground terminal

Utility cable

DC-link/Brakeresistor terminals

L1 L2 L3 - + U V W

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526

HV9000 Page 39 (78)

6

Wiring

Figure 6.1.4-9 Cable assembly for open chassis: 100 - 150 Hp voltage code 5 and 50 - 75 Hp code 2

Control cableMotor Cable

Brake resistorcable


Control cardPower card

Utility cable


(L1, L2, L3)


Connect the screento the terminal

Fix the control cablewith a tie wrap

Groundterminals

(PE)

DC-link/Brakeresistorterminals (–, +)

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526

L1 L2 L3

– + U V W

(78) HV9000

6

Wiring

Figure 6.1.4-10 Cable assembly for open chassis 200 - 400 Hp voltage code 5, 125 - 400 Hp code 6and 100 Hp code 2; for NEMA 1 200 - 400 Hp code 5 and NEMA 1 100 Hp code 2.

Controlcable

MotorCable

Terminalisolatorplates


Control cablegrounding

Control cablefixing

Insulated(yellow-green)groundingconductor twistedof cable shield

PE terminalsfor utility andmotor cables

Utilitycable

DC-link/Brakeresistorterminals

L1 L2 L3 U V W – + + +

Ch9KYTK2

HV9000 Page 41 (78)

6

Figure 6.1.4-11 Cable cover and terminal assembly for open chassis 200 - 400 Hp voltage code 5,125 - 400 Hp code 6, and 100 Hp code 2; and NEMA 1 200 - 400 Hp code 5 and 100Hp code 2

Wiring

Fixing screws of protective covers

After cable connections before swtich on the utioity supply, enusre:

1. Insert all 10 terminal isolator plates (A) in the slots between the terminals,see figure below

2. Insert and fiz three plastic protective covers (B, C, and D) over theterminals

Bend the plate tofit it into a slot.Release to lock itin correct position

Inser plateinto the slots

Terminal isolation plates

Securing the terminal isolation plates

B C A D

Ch9SUOJAT

L1 L2 L3 U V W – + + +

(78) HV9000

6

Wiring

Figure 6.1.4-12 Cable assembly for open chassis 3 - 30 Hp voltage code 6

Control cable

Utility cable

Motor Cable


Control card


Connect theshield tothe terminal

Ground terminal Ground terminal

Utility cableterminalsDC-link/Brakeresistor terminalsMotor cableterminalsL1 L2 L3 - + U V WL1 L2 L3

12345678910111213141516171819202122232425

Ch5CX6

HV9000 Page 43 (78)

6

Wiring

Figure 6.1.4-13 Cable assembly for open chassis 40 - 100 Hp voltage code 6

Control cableUtility cable

Motor Cable


Control card

I/O terminals

Connect theshield tothe terminal

Ground terminal Ground terminal

Utility cableterminalsDC-link/Brakeresistor terminalsMotor cableterminals

Ch6CX6

– + U V WL1 L2 L3

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526

(78) HV9000

6

Wiring

Figure 6.1.4-14 Cable assembly Compact NEMA 1 1 - 3 Hp, voltage code 2,1-5 Hp voltage code 5


Motor cableterminals(U, V, W)

Utility cable Motor cable

Yellow-greenprotectivecable


Groundterminal

DC-link/brakeresistorterminals (–, +)

Ground terminalfor the control cable

HV9000 Page 45 (78)

6

Figure 6.1.4-15 Cable assembly for Compact NEMA1 5 - 10 voltage code 2 and 7.5 - 20 Hp voltage code 5

Wiring


Motor cableterminals(U, V, W)

Utility cable

Motorcable


Groundterminal

Ground terminalfor the control cable

Motor cable

DC-link/brakeresistorterminals (–, +)

Groundterminal

(78) HV9000

6

6.2 Control connections

Basic connection diagram is shown in thefigure 6.2-1.

The functionality of the terminals for the Basicapplication is explained in chapter 10.2. If oneof the HVReady applications is selected,check the application manual for thefunctionality of the terminals for that application.

6.2.1 Control cables

The control cables should be minimum of #20gauge shielded multicore cables, see table6.1-1. The maximum wire size rating of theterminals is #14.

6.2.2 Galvanic isolation barriers

The control connections are isolated from theutility potential and the I/O ground is connectedto the frame of the HV9000 via a 1 MΩ resistorand 4.7 nF capacitor. The control I/O groundcan also be connected directly to the frame,by changing the position of the jumper X4 toON-position, see figure 6.2.2-1.

Digital inputs and relay outputs are isolatedfrom the I/O ground.

6.1.5 Cable and motor insulation checks

1 Motor cable insulation checks

Disconnect the motor cable from theterminals U, V and W of the HV9000 unitand from the motor.

Measure the insulation resistance of themotor cable between each phaseconductor. Also measure the insulationresistance between each phaseconductor and the protective groundconductor.The insulation resistance must be >1MΩ.

2 Utility cable insulation checks

Disconnect the utility cable fromterminals L1, L2 and L3 of the HV9000unit and from the utility.

Measure the insulation resistance of theutility cable between each phaseconductor. Also measure the insulationresistance between each phaseconductor and the protective groundconductor. The insulation resistancemust be >1MΩ.

3 Motor insulation checks

Disconnect the motor cable from themotor and open any bridgingconnections in the motor connection box.

Measure insulation resistance of eachmotor winding. The measurementvoltage has to be at least equal to the utilityvoltage but not exceed 1000V.The insulation resistance must be >1MΩ.

Wiring

HV9000 Page 47 (78)

6

Terminal Function Specification

1 +10Vref Reference voltage output Burden max 10 mA *

2 Vin+ Analog signal input Signal range -10 V— +10 V DC

3 GND I/O ground

4 Iin+ Analog signal (+input) Signal range 0(4)—20 mA

5 Iin- Analog signal (-input)

6 24V out 24V supply voltage ±20%, load max. 100 mA

7 GND I/O ground

8 DIA1 Digital input 1 Ri = min. 5 kΩ

9 DIA2 Digital input 2

10 DIA3 Digital input 3

11 CMA Common for DIA1—DIA3 Must be connected to GND or 24V ofI/O- terminal or to external 24V or GND

12 24V out 24V supply voltage Same as terminal # 6

13 GND I/O ground Same as terminal # 7

14 DIB4 Digital input 4 Ri = min. 5 kΩ

15 DIB5 Digital input 5

16 DIB6 Digital input 6

17 CMB Common for DIB4 — DIB6 Must be connected to GND or 24V ofI/O- terminal or to external 24V or GND

18 Iout+ Analog signal (+output) Signal range 0(4)—20 mA,

19 Iout- Analog ground (-output) RL max. 500 Ω

20 DO1 Open collector output Transistor output, max. Vin = 48 VDCmax. current 50 mA

21 RO1/1 Relay output 1 Max. switch. voltage 250 VAC, 300 VDC

22 RO1/2 Max switch. current 8 A / 24 VDC,

23 RO1/3 0.4 A / 250 VDC

24 RO2/1 Relay output 2 Max. switch. power <2 kVA / 250 VAC

25 RO2/2 Max. cont. current <2 A rms

26 RO2/3

Wiring

Figure 6.2-1 Control I/O-terminal signals.

* If the potentiometer reference is used, potentiometer R = 1—10 kΩ

(78) HV9000

6

The +24V or ground for the digital inputs andcommon terminals (CMA, CMB) can be eitherexternal or internal (terminals 6 and 12 of thedrive).

Positive logic (+24 V active signal) = input is active when the switch is closed.

Negative logic (0 V active signal) = input is active when the switch is closed.

DIA1

DIA2

DIA3

CMA

DIA1

DIA2

DIA3

CMA

+24 V

Ground (-)

Ground (-)

+24 V

6.2.3 Digital input function inversion

The active signal level of the digital input logicdepends on how the common input (CMA,CMB) of the input group is connected. Theconnection can be either to +24 V or to ground.See figure 6.2.3-1.

Wiring

Figure 6.2.3-1 Positive/negative logic.

Figure 6.2.2-1 Isolation barriers.

X4

1 MΩ

DIA1

DIA3

DO1

RO1.1RO1.2RO1.3

RO2.1RO2.2RO2.3

...

DIB4

DIB6CMB

...

K6_2_2_1

U V W

L1 L2 L3

Control I/O ground

Digital inputgroup A

Analogoutput

Digital output

10 Vref.GND

+24 VGND

Main circuits

Motor

Mains

Digital inputgroup B

Iout +Iout -

Uin

Iin + Iin -

HV9000 Control Panel Page 49 (78)

7

7. CONTROL PANEL

7.1 Introduction

The control panel of the HV9000 drivehas a Multiline Display with sevenindicators for the Run status

(RUN, , , READY, STOP,

ALARM, FAULT) and two indicators forthe control source (Panel/Remote). Thepanel also has three text lines for themenu location, menu/submenudescriptions and the number of thesubmenus or the value of the monitored

item. The eight pushbuttons on thecontrol panel are used for controlling thedrive, setting parameters and monitoringvalues.The panel is detachable and isolatedfrom the utility line potential.The display examples in this chaptershow only the text and numeric lines ofthe Multiline Display. The Run statusindicators are not included in theexamples.

DRIVE STATUS INDICATORS

RUN = lights when motor is running.

= shows the selected rotation.

STOP = lights when motor is not running.

READY = lights when input voltage issupplied and the unit is readyfor use.

FAULT = lights when a fault in frequencydrive occurs.

Panel/Remote = Shows the active control source.

= Menu button (left)Move forward in the menu

Menu button (right)Move backward in the menu

=

=

Browser button (up)Move in the main menu and betweenpages inside the same submenu.Change value.

= Browser button (down)Move in the main menu and betweenpages inside the same submenu.Change value.

= Enter buttonAcknowledgement of changed value.Fault history reset.Function as programmable button.

= Reset buttonFault resetting

= Start buttonStarts the motor if the panel is theactive control source

= Stop buttonStops the motor if the panel is theactive control source

ENTER

RESET

UP

DOWN

STOP

START

Figure 7.1-1 Control panel with LED display.

(78) Control Panel HV9000

7

7.2 Control panel operation

The data on the panel are arranged inmenus and submenus. The menus are usedto display and edit measurement andcontrol signals, set parameters andreference values, and display faults.Through the menus you can also adjust thecontrast of the display and use theprogrammable buttons.

The desired submenu is accessed from the

main menu using the Menu buttons. Thesymbol M on the first text line stands for themain menu. It is followed by a number thatrefers to the submenu in question. See theHV9000 User's Manual and the ApplicationManual for the specific parametersavailable for the needed setup.The arrow ( ) in the lower right cornerindicates that a further submenu can beaccessed by pressing the Menu button(right).

M6Fault History F 1-9

H12. Overvoltage ENTER

2-3 s

M5Active Faults F 1-9

F11. Overcurrent Scroll the active fault list

M4Buttons B1-4

B1Reverse 1

B2 Panel Control

M3Reference R1

R1Freq.reference 122.45 Hz

M2Parameter G 1-12

G1Basic Param. P 1-15

M1Monitor V 1-20

V1Output frequency 122.44 Hz

G2 Special param.

G12

V2 Motor Speed

V20 Motor temp. rise

M7Contrast 15

C1Contrast 15

Fault history reset

B1Reverse 0

R1Freq.reference 122.45 Hz

P1.1Min. frequency 12.34 Hz

ENTER

P1.1Min. frequency 12.34 Hz ENTER

Figure 7.2-1 Panel operation.


7

7.3 Monitoring menu

The monitoring menu can be enteredfrom the main menu when the symbolM1 is visible on the first line of theMultiline display. How to browse throughthe monitored values is presented inFigure 7.3-1. All monitored

signals are listed in Table 7.3-1. Thevalues are updated once every 0.5seconds. This menu is meant only forsignal checking. The values cannot bealtered here. See 7.4 Parameter groupmenu.

Table 7.3-1 Monitored signals.Table 7.3-1 Monitored signals

Number Signal name Unit Description

V1 Output frequency Hz Frequency to the motor

V2 Motor speed rpm Calculated motor speed

V3 Motor current A Measured motor current

V4 Motor torque % Calculated actual torque/nominal torque of

the unit

V5 Motor power % Calculated actual power/nominal power of the

unit

V6 Motor voltage V Calculated motor voltage

V7 DC-link voltage V Measured DC-link voltage

V8 Temperature ºC Heat sink temperature

V9 Operating day counter DD.dd Operating days1 , not resettable

V10 Operating hours, “trip counter” HH.hh Operating hours2 , can be resetwith programmable button #3

V11 MW hours counter MWh Total MWh, not resettable

V12 MW hours, “trip counter” MWh Resettable with programmable buttonB4, section 7.6

V13 Voltage/analog input V Voltage of terminal Vin+ (term. #2)

V14 Current/analog input mA Current of terms Iin+ & Iin- (term. #4, 5)V15 Digital input status, gr. A See Figure 7.3-2

V16 Digital input status, gr. B See Figure 7.3-3

V17 Digital and relay output status See Figure 7.3-4

V18 Control program Version number of the control software

V19 Unit nominal power HP Unit power size of the unit

V20 Motor temperature rise % 100% = nominal motor temperature hasbeen reached.

1 DD = full days, dd = decimal part of day 2 HH = full hours, hh = decimal part of hour

M1Monitor V 1-20

V1Output frequency 122.44 Hz

V2 Motor Speed

V20 Motor temp. rise

Figure 7.3-1 Monitoring menu.


7V16Dig input B Stat101

Example:Input Terminal

DIB4 14closed

DIB5 15open

DIB6 16closed

V17Dig & Rel Output001


Digital output 20closed (sinking current)

Relay output 1 21open

Relay output 2 24open

Figure 7.3-2 Digital inputs, Group A status.

Figure 7.3-3 Digital inputs, Group B status.

Figure 7.3-4 Output signal status.

V15Dig input A Stat011


Digital input statusindication

0 = open input1 = closed input (active)

DIA1 8closed

DIA2 9closed

DIA3 10open


7

7.4 Parameter group menu

The parameter group menu can beentered from the main menu when thesymbol M2 is visible on the first line ofthe Multiline display. Parameter valuesare changed in the parameter menu asshown in Figure 7.4-1:

Push the menu button (right) once tomove into the parameter group menu(G) and twice to enter the desiredparameter menu. Locate the parameteryou want to change by using the browserbuttons. Push the menu button (right)once again to enter the edit menu. Onceyou are in the edit menu, the symbol ofthe parameter starts to blink. Set thedesired new value with the browserbuttons and confirm the change bypushing the Enter button. Consequently,the blinking stops and the new value isvisible in the value field. The value willnot change unless the Enter button ispushed.

Several parameters are locked, i.e.uneditable, when the drive is in RUNstatus. If you try to change the value ofsuch a parameter, the text *locked* willappear on the display.You can return to the main menuanytime by pressing the Menu button(left) for 2-3 seconds.

The basic application embodies onlythose parameters necessary foroperating the device. The parametergroup 0 is accessible only by openingthe Application package lock. SeeChapter 11 of the HV9000 User'sManual.

Other applications include moreparameter groups.

Once in the last parameter of aparameter group, you can move directlyto the first parameter of that group bypressing the browser button (up).

M2Parameter G 1-12

ENTER

ENTER

G1Basic Param. P1-15

G2.. Special param..G12




P1.2...P12.xChange

value

Figure 7.5-1 Reference setting on the control panel


7

7.5 Reference menu

The reference menu can be enteredfrom the main menu when the symbolM3 is visible on the first line of theMultiline panel.

If the control panel is the active controlsource, the frequency reference can bechanged by changing the value on thedisplay with the browser buttons (for theselection of the active control source,see Chapter 7.6 Programmable push-

button menu). See Figure 7.5-1.Move deeper in the menu with the menubutton (right) until the symbol R1 startsto blink. Now you are able to alter thefrequency reference value with thebrowser buttons. Pressing the Enterbutton is not necessary. Motor speedchanges as soon as the frequencyreference changes or the load inertiaallows the motor to accelerate ordecelerate.In some applications, there might beseveral references.

Figure 7.5-1 Reference setting on the control panel

M3Reference R1

R1Freq. reference122.45 Hz

R1Freq. reference122.45 Hz


7

7.6 Programmable push-button menu

The programmable push-button menucan be entered from the main menuwhen the symbol M4 is visible on thefirst line of the Multiline display. In thismenu, there are four functions for theEnter button. The functions are availablein this menu only. In other menus, thebutton is used for its original purpose.The status of the controlled function isshown through a feedback signal.

Enter the edit menu with the menu but-ton (right). Then, the symbol B1 starts to

blink. To change the button value, pushthe Enter button after which the newfeedback value appears and the buttonsign B is replaced with a black squareblinking together with the button number.After releasing the Enter button, theblack square reverts to B. The new valuestops blinking when the new value (e.g.reverse direction) has been received andput into operation. See Figure 7.6-1.

Figure 7.6-1 Programmable push-button

Table 7.6-1 Programmable push-button descriptions

M4Buttons B1-4

B1Reverse 1

1Reverse 0

B1Reverse

B1Reverse 0

0

Value c

hange pro

cedure

ENTER

B1Reverse 1

B2 Panel Control...

nottuBrebmuN

nottuBnoitpircseD noitcnuF

noitamrofnikcabdeeF0 1 etoN

1B esreveR noitatorehtsegnahC.rotomehtfonoitcerid

nehwylnoelbaliavAehtsilenaplortnoceht

.ecruoslortnocevtica

drawroF esreveR noitamrofnikcabdeeFehtsagnolsasehsalf

deirracsidnammoc.tuo

2B evitcAlortnoc

O/IneewtebnoitceleSlortnocdnaslanimret

.lenap

aivlortnoCslanimretO/I

morflortnoClenapeht

3B gnitarepOpirt,sruoh

retnuocteser

gnitarepoehtsteseRretnuocpirtsruoh

.dehsupnehw

gnitteseroN ehtsteseRgnitarepopirtsruoh

retnuoc4B hWM

retnuocteser

pirthWMehtsteseR.dehsupnehwretnuoc

gnitteseroN ehtsteseRpirthWM

retnuoc


7

7.7 Active faults menu

The active faults menu can be entered fromthe main menu when the symbol M5 isvisible on the first line of the Multiline displayas shown in Figure 7.7-1.

When a fault brings the frequency converterto a stop, the fault code (F#) and the descrip-tion of the fault are displayed. If there are sev-eral faults at the same time, the list of activefaults can be browsed with the browser but-tons.

Figure 7.7-1 Active faults menu

The display can be cleared with the Resetbutton and the read-out will return to the samedisplay it had before the fault trip.

The fault remains active until it is cleared withReset button or with a reset signal from theI/O terminal.

Note! Remove any external Start signal be-fore resetting the fault to prevent an unin-tentional restart.

Scroll the activefault list

CLEARWITH

RESETF11. Overcurrent

M5Active Faults F1-9

Table 7.7-1 Fault codes

tluaFsedoc

tluaF esuaCelbissoP gnikcehC

1F tnerrucrevO sahretrevnocycneuqerf0009VHehtni)nI*4>(tnerrucahgihootderusaem

:tuptuorotomesaercnidaolyvaehneddus-

selbacrotomehtnitiucrictrohs-rotomelbatiusnu-

gnidaolkcehCezisrotomkcehC

selbackcehC

2F egatlovrevO ehtfoknil-CDlanretniehtfoegatlovehTsahretrevnocycneuqerf0009VH

%53ybegatlovlanimonehtdedeecxetsafootsiemitnoitareleced-

ytilitutasekipsegatlovrevohgih-

emitnoitarelecedehttsujdA

3F tluafdnuorG ehttahtdetcetedtnemerusaemtnerruCtonsitnerrucesahprotomehtfomus

orezehtrorotomehtnieruliafnoitalusni-

selbac

selbacrotomehtkcehC

4F tluafretrevnI sahretrevnocycneuqerf0009VHetagehtninoitarepoytluafdetceted

egdirbTBGIrosrevirdtluafecnerefretni-eruliaftnenopmoc-

sruccotluafehtfI.niagatratserdnatluafehtteseR.rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnocniaga

5F hctiwsgnigrahC TRATSnehwnepohctiwsgnigrahCevitcadnammoc

tluafecnerefretni-eruliaftnenopmoc-

sruccotluafehtfI.niagatratserdnatluafehtteseR.rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnocniaga

9F egatlovrednU fo%56wolebenogsahegatlovsub-CDegatlovlanimoneht

ehtfoeruliafsinosaernommoctsom-ylppusytilitu

ycneuqerf0009VHehtfoeruliaflanretni-naesuacoslanacretrevnoc

pirtegatlovrednu

teser,kaerbegatlovylppusyraropmetfoesacnI.niagatratsdnatluafeht

.tupniytilitukcehCsaheruliaflanretninatcerrocsiylppusytilitufI

.derrucco.rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnoC

01F eniltupnInoisivrepus

gnissimsiesahpeniltupnI noitcennocyitlituehtkcehC

11F esahptuptuOnoisivrepus

tahtdetcetedsahtnemerusaemtnerruCesahprotomenonitneruconsiereht

selbacrotomkcehC

21F reppohcekarBnoisivrepus

dellatsnitonrotsiserekarb-nekorbrotsiserekarb-nekorbreppohcekarb-

rotsiserekarbkcehCtcatnoC.nekorbsireppohcehtKOsirotsiserfI

rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoy

31F 0009VHerutarepmetrednu

wolebknistaehfoerutarepmeTC°01-


7

Table 7.7-1 Fault codes (cont.)

tluaFsedoc


41F 0009VHerutarepmetrevo

C°57revoknistaehfoerutarepmeTC°08revo1ameNtcapmoCroF

wolfriagniloocehtkcehCytridtonsiknistaehehttahtkcehC

erutarepmettneibmakcehChgihoottonsiycneuqerfgnihctiwsehttahtkcehC

rotomdnaerutarepmettneibmahtiwderapmocdaol

51F dellatsrotoM deppirtsahnoitcetorpllatsrotomehT rotomehtkcehC

61F rotoMerutarepmetrevo

rotomevirdycneuqerf0009VHehTrotomdetcetedsahledomerutarepmet

taehrevodedaolrevosirotom-

.daolrotomesaerceDehtfisretemarapledomerutarepmetehtkcehC

detaehrevotonsawrotom

71F daolrednurotoM sahnoitcetorpdaolrednurotomehTdeppirt

.cte,stlebelbissopdnarotomehtkcehC

81F tupnigolanAtluaferawdrah

draoblortnocnoeruliaftnenopmoC rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnoC

91F daobnoitpOnoitacifitnedi

deliafsahdraobnoitpoehtfognidaeR noitallatsniehtkcehCruoytcatnoc,tcerrocsinoitallatsnifI-

rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuC

02F egatlovV01ecnerefer

draoblortnocnodetrohsecnereferV01+draobnoitporo

egatlovecnereferV01+morfgnilbacehtkcehC

12F ylppusV42 rodraoblortnocnodetrohsylppusV42+draobnoitpo

egatlovecnereferV42+morfgnilbacehtkcehC

22F32F

MORPEEtluafmuskcehc

rorregnirotserretemaraPtluafecnerefretni-eruliaftnenopmoc-

yllacitamotualliwevirdehttluafsihtgnittesernOllakcehC.sgnittestluafedretemarapehtdaol

.teserretfasgnittesretemarap-reltuCruoytcatnocniagasruccotluafehtehtfI

rotubirtsidremmaH

52F rossecorporciMgodhctaw


niagasruccotluafehtfI.tratserdnatluafehtteseRrotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnoc

62F lenaPnoitacinummoc

rorre

ehtdnalenapneewtebnoitcennocehTgnikrowtonsievirdycneuqerf0009VH

elbaclenapehtkcehC

92F rotsimrehTnoitcetorp

rednapxeO/IehtfotupnirotsimrehTrotomehtfoesaercnidetcetedsahdraob

erutarepmet

gnidaoldnagniloocrotomkcehCnoitcennocrotsimrehtehtkcehC

stupniehterusekam,srotsimrehtoneraerehtfIdetiucrictrohsera

63F ItupnigolanA ni <langis(Am4

detcelesegnar)Am02-4

LtnerructupnigolanaehT ni Am4wolebsideliafsahecruoslangis-

nekorbsielbaclortnoc-

yrtiucricpooltnerrucehtkcehC

14F tluaflanretxE ehttadetcetedneebsahtluaflanretxenAtupnilatigid

ecruostluaflanretxeehtkcehC


7

7.8 Fault history menu

The fault history menu can be entered fromthe main menu when the symbol M6 isdisplayed on the first line of the Multilinepanel.The memory of the drive can store the up tothe 9 latest faults in the order ofappearance. The most recent fault has thenumber 1, the second latest number 2 etc.If there are 9 uncleared faults in the

memory, the next fault will erase the oldestfrom the memory.Pressing the Enter button for about 2…3seconds will reset the whole fault history.Then the symbol F# will change to 0.

Figure 7.8-1. Fault history menu

7.9 Contrast menu

The contrast menu can be entered from themain menu when the symbol M7 is visibleon the first line of the Multiline display.Use the menu button (right) to enter the editmenu. You are in the edit menu when the

symbol C starts to blink. Then change thecontrast using the browser buttons. Thechanges take effect immediately.

Figure 7.9-1. Contrast setting

ENTER2-3s

H12. Overvoltage

M6Fault History F 1-9

Fault history reset

CContrast 15

M7Contrast 15


7

7.10 Active warning display

When a warning occurs, a text with asymbol A# appears on the display.Warning codes are explained in Table7.10-1.The display does not have to be cleared

in any special way.The warning on the display does notdisable the normal functions of the pushbuttons.

Table 7.10-1 Warning codes

edoC gninraW gnikcehC

51A .)noitcetorpllatsrotoM(dellatsrotoM .rotomkcehC

61A .)noitcetorplamrehtrotoM(erutarepmetrevorotoM .gnidaolrotomkcehC

71A nidetavitcaebnacgninraW(daolrednurotoM.)snoitacilppaydaeRVH

.gnidaolrotomkcehC

42A rosretnuochWM,yrotsiHtluaFehtniseulavehTneebevahthgimsretnuocruoh/yadgnitarepo

.noitpurretnisniamsuoiverpehtnidegnahc

lacitircaekaT.snoitcaynadeentonseoD.seulavesehtotedutitta

82A .deliafsahnoitacilppafoegnahcehT ehthsupdnaniaganoitacilppaahtesoohC.nottubretnE

03A sistnemgesehtfodaoleht:tluaftnerrucecnalabnU.lauqeton

.rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnoC

54A erutarepmetrevoretrevnocycneuqerf0009VH.C°07>erutarepmeT:gninraw

tneibmaehtdnawolfriagniloocehtkcehC.erutarepmet

64A Am4<+niItupnifotnerruceht;gninrawecnerefeR)snoitacilppaydaeRVHnidetavitcaebnacgninraW(

.yrtiucricpooltnerrucehtkcehC

74A nidetavitcaebnacgninraW(;gninrawlanretxEsnoitacilppaydaeRVH

.ecivedrotiucrictluaflanretxeehtkcehC


7

7.11 Controlling the motor from the panel

The HV9000 can be controlled from either theI/O terminals or the control panel. The activecontrol source can be changed with theprogrammable push button b2 (see chapter7.6). The motor can be started, stopped andthe direction of rotation can be changed fromthe active control source.

7.11.1 Control source change from I/O terminals to the panel

After changing the control source the motor isstopped. The direction of rotation remains thesame as with I/O control.

If the Start button is pushed at the same timeas the programmable pushbutton B2, the Runstate, direction of rotation and reference valueare copied from the I/O terminals to the panel.

7.11.2 Control source change from panelto I/O

After changing the control source, the I/Oterminals determine the run state, direction ofrotation and reference value.

If the motor potentiometer is used in theapplication, the panel reference value can becopied as the motor potentiometer referenceby pushing the start button at the same timeas the programmable push button B2. Themotor potentiometer function mode must be"resetting at stop state" (Local/RemoteApplication: param. 1. 5 =4, Multi-purposeApplication : param. 1. 5 = 9).

HV9000 Page 61 (78)

Internal components and circuit boards (except the isolated I/Oterminals) are at line potential when the HV9000 drive is connectedto the utility. This voltage is extremely dangerous and may causedeath or severe injury if you come in contact with it.

When the HV9000 drive is connected to the utility, the motorconnections U, V, W and DC-link / brake resistor connections -,+ arelive even if the motor is not running.

Do not make any connections when the HV9000 drive is connected tothe utility line.

After disconnecting the utility, wait until the cooling fan on the unitstops and the indicators in the panel are turned off (if no panel checkthe indicators on the cover). Wait at least 5 minutes before doingany work on the HV9000 drive connections. Do not open coverbefore this time has run out.

The control I/O terminals are isolated from the utility potential but therelay outputs and other I/O:s (if jumper X4 is in the OFF position,see fig. 6.2.2-1) may have dangerous external voltages connectedeven if the power is off from the HV9000 drive.

Before connecting the utility make sure that the cover of the HV9000drive is closed.

8 STARTUP

8.1 Safety precautions

Before startup, observe the following warnings and instructions:

1

!

2

34

5

6

8.2 Sequence of operation

1 Read and follow the safety precautions

2 After installation ensure that the:

- Drive and motor are connected to ground.

- Utility and motor cables are in accordance with the installation andconnection instructions (chapter 6.1).

- Control cables are located as far as possible from the power cables(table 6.1.3-1), shields of the control cables are connectedto the protective ground and wires do not have contact with anyelectrical components in the HV9000.

- The common input of digital input groups is connected to +24 V orground of the I/O-terminal or external supply (See 6.2.3)

8

Startup

(78) HV9000

3 Check the quantity and quality of the cooling air (chapters 5.1 and 5.2).

4 Check that moisture has not condensed inside the HV9000 drive.

5 Check that all Start/Stop switches connected to the I/O terminals are in the Stop state.

6 Connect the HV9000 to the utility and switch the power ON.

7 Ensure that the parameters of the Group 1 match the application.

Set the following parameters to match the motor nameplate:

- nominal voltage of the motor- nominal frequency of the motor- nominal speed of the motor- nominal current of the motor- supply voltage

Look up the values from the nameplate of the motor.

8 Start-up test without motor

Perform either test A or B:

A Control from the I/O terminals:

- turn Start/Stop switch to ON position

- change the frequency reference

- check from the Monitoring page of the control panel that theoutput frequency follows the frequency reference

- turn Start/Stop switch to OFF position

B Control from the Control Panel:

- change control from the I/O terminals to the control panel withthe programmable button B2, see chapter 7.6.

- push the Start button

- go to the Reference Page and change the frequency referencewith the buttons , see chapter 7.5

- go to the Monitoring Page and check that the output frequencyfollows the reference, see chapter 7.3.

- push the Stop button

9 If possible, make a start-up test with a motor which is not connected to the process.If the inverter has to be tested on a motor connected to the process, ensure it is safe tobe powered up. Inform all possible co-workers about the tests.

- switch the utility power OFF and wait until the HV9000 haspowered down according to chapter 8.1/ point 4

8

Startup

HV9000 Page 63 (78)

- connect the motor cable to the motor and the power terminals ofthe HV9000

- check that all start/stop switches connected to the I/O terminalsare in the OFF state

- switch the utility power ON

- repeat test A or B of the test #8.

10 Connect the motor to the process (if the previous tests were done without the process)

- ensure it is safe to power up- inform all possible co-workers about the tests.- repeat test A or B of the test #8.

8

Startup

(78) HV9000

9 FAULT TRACING

When a fault trip occurs, the fault indicatoris illuminated and the fault code and itsdescription are displayed. The fault canbe cleared with the Reset button or via anI/O terminal. The faults are stored to thefault history from where they can beviewed (see chapter 7.8). The fault codesare explained in table 9-1.

9

tluaFsedoc


1F tnerrucrevO sahretrevnocycneuqerf0009VH)nI*4>(tnerrucahgihootderusaem

:tuptuorotomehtniesaercnidaolyvaehneddus-

selbacrotomehtnitiucrictrohs-rotomelbatiusnu-

gnidaolkcehCezisrotomkcehC

selbackcehC

2F egatlovrevO foknil-CDlanretniehtfoegatlovehTsahretrevnocycneuqerf0009VHeht

ybegatlovlanimonehtdedeecxe%53

tsafootsiemitnoitareleced-ytilitutasekipsegatlovrevohgih-

emitnoitarelecedehttsujdA

3F tluafdnuorG tahtdetcetedtnemerusaemtnerruCtnerrucesahprotomehtfomuseht

oreztonsiehtrorotomehtnieruliafnoitalusni-

selbac

selbacrotomehtkcehC

4F tluafretrevnI sahretrevnocycneuqerf0009VHetagehtninoitarepoytluafdetceted

egdirbTBGIrosrevirdtluafecnerefretni-eruliaftnenopmoc-

tluafehtfI.niagatratserdnatluafehtteseRremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnocniagasrucco

.rotubirtsid

5F hctiwsgnigrahC TRATSnehwnepohctiwsgnigrahCevitcadnammoc


tluafehtfI.niagatratserdnatluafehtteseRremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnocniagasrucco

.rotubirtsid

9F egatlovrednU wolebenogsahegatlovsub-CDegatlovlanimonehtfo%56

foeruliafsinosaernommoctsom-ylppusytilitueht

0009VHehtfoeruliaflanretni-esuacoslanacretrevnocycneuqerf

pirtegatlovrednuna

,kaerbegatlovylppusyraropmetfoesacnI.niagatratsdnatluafehtteser

.tupniytilitukcehCeruliaflanretninatcerrocsiylppusytilitufI

.derruccosah.rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnoC

01F eniltupnInoisivrepus

gnissimsiesahpeniltupnI noitcennocyitlituehtkcehC

11F esahptuptuOnoisivrepus

detcetedsahtnemerusaemtnerruCrotomenonitneruconsierehttaht

esahp

selbacrotomkcehC

21F reppohcekarBnoisivrepus

dellatsnitonrotsiserekarb-nekorbrotsiserekarb-nekorbreppohcekarb-

rotsiserekarbkcehC.nekorbsireppohcehtKOsirotsiserfIrotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnoC

31F 0009VHerutarepmetrednu

wolebknistaehfoerutarepmeTC°01-

Fault Tracing

HV9000 Page 65 (78)

9

tluaFsedoc


41F 0009VHerutarepmetrevo

C°57revoknistaehfoerutarepmeTC°08revo1ameNtcapmoCroF

wolfriagniloocehtkcehCytridtonsiknistaehehttahtkcehC

erutarepmettneibmakcehCtonsiycneuqerfgnihctiwsehttahtkcehC

tneibmahtiwderapmochgihootdaolrotomdnaerutarepmet

51F dellatsrotoM deppirtsahnoitcetorpllatsrotomehT rotomehtkcehC

61F rotoMerutarepmetrevo

rotomevirdycneuqerf0009VHehTdetcetedsahledomerutarepmet

taehrevorotomdedaolrevosirotom-

.daolrotomesaerceDsretemarapledomerutarepmetehtkcehC

detaehrevotonsawrotomehtfi

71F daolrednurotoM sahnoitcetorpdaolrednurotomehTdeppirt

.cte,stlebelbissopdnarotomehtkcehC

81F tupnigolanAtluaferawdrah

draoblortnocnoeruliaftnenopmoC rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnoC

91F daobnoitpOnoitacifitnedi

sahdraobnoitpoehtfognidaeRdeliaf

noitallatsniehtkcehCruoytcatnoc,tcerrocsinoitallatsnifI-

rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuC

02F egatlovV01ecnerefer

lortnocnodetrohsecnereferV01+draobnoitporodraob

ecnereferV01+morfgnilbacehtkcehCegatlov

12F ylppusV42 lortnocnodetrohsylppusV42+draobnoitporodraob

ecnereferV42+morfgnilbacehtkcehCegatlov

22F32F

MORPEEtluafmuskcehc

rorregnirotserretemaraPtluafecnerefretni-eruliaftnenopmoc-

lliwevirdehttluafsihtgnittesernOtluafedretemarapehtdaolyllacitamotua

retfasgnittesretemarapllakcehC.sgnittes.teser

ruoytcatnocniagasruccotluafehtehtfIrotubirtsidremmaH-reltuC

52F rossecorporciMgodhctaw


tluafehtfI.tratserdnatluafehtteseRremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnocniagasrucco

rotubirtsid

62F lenaPnoitacinummoc

rorre

dnalenapneewtebnoitcennocehTtonsievirdycneuqerf0009VHeht

gnikrow

elbaclenapehtkcehC

92F rotsimrehTnoitcetorp

rednapxeO/IehtfotupnirotsimrehTehtfoesaercnidetcetedsahdraob

erutarepmetrotom

gnidaoldnagniloocrotomkcehCnoitcennocrotsimrehtehtkcehC

ehterusekam,srotsimrehtoneraerehtfIdetiucrictrohserastupni

63F ItupnigolanA ni <langis(Am4

-4detcelesegnar)Am02

LtnerructupnigolanaehT ni wolebsiAm4

deliafsahecruoslangis-nekorbsielbaclortnoc-

yrtiucricpooltnerrucehtkcehC

14F tluaflanretxE detcetedneebsahtluaflanretxenAtupnilatigidehtta

ecruostluaflanretxeehtkcehC

Fault Tracing

(78) HV9000

Parameters are explained in chapter 10.4. Thefunction of motor thermal and stall protectionin the Basic Application is explained in chapter10.5.

* NOTE! Remember to connect the CMAand CMB inputs.

10 BASIC APPLICATION

10.1 General

The Basic Application is the default setting asdelivered from the factory. Control I/O signalsof the Basic application are fixed (notprogrammable) and it only has parameterGroup 1.

10.2 Control Connections

10

Terminal Signal Description

1 +10Vref

Reference output Voltage for a potentiometer, etc.

2 Vin+ Analog input, voltage Frequency reference activated ifrange 0—10 V DC terminals 14 and 15 open and

parameter 1.17 = 0 (default value)

3 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls

4 Iin+ Analog input, current Frequency reference activated if

5 Iin- range 0—20 mA terminals 14 and 15 closed, or open

and parameter 1.17 = 1

6 +24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches, etc. max. 0.1 A


8 DIA1 Start forward Contact closed = start forward

9 DIA2 Start reverse Contact closed = start reverse

10 DIA3 External fault input Contact open = no faultContact closed = fault

11 CMA Common for DIA1—DIA3 Connect to GND or + 24V

12 +24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches, (same as #6)


14 DIB4 Multi-step speed select 1 DIB4 DIB5 Frequency ref.

15 DIB5 Multi-step speed select 2 open open Ref. Vin (par.1.17=0)closed open Multi-step ref. 1open closed Multi-step ref. 2closed closed Ref. Iin (term. #4,5)

16 DIB6 Fault reset Contact open = no actionContact closed = fault reset

17 CMB Common for DIB4—DIB6 Connect to GND or + 24V

18 Iout+ Analog output 0—20 mA 0 - maximum frequency (par. 1. 2)

19 Iout- Output frequency RL max 500 Ω

20 DO1 Digital output activated = the SV9000READY is ready to operate

21 RO1 Relay output 1 Relay activated = SV9000 is

22 RO1 RUN operating (motor is running)

23 RO1

24 RO2 Relay output 2 Relay activated = fault trip has

25 RO2 FAULT occured

26 RO2

Referencepotentiometer

READY

*

*

Figure 1.2-1 Control connection example.

FAULT220VACMax.

RUN

Basic Application

HV9000 Page 67 (78)

10

Basic Application

Figure 10.3-1 Control signal logic

10.3 Control Signal Logic

Figure 10.3.-1 shows the logic of the I/O control signals and push buttons.

If Start forward and Start reverse are both activated when the utility line is connected to the HV9000then Start forward will be selected for the direction.

If Start forward and Start reverse are both activated when the control source is changed fromthe panel to the I/O-terminals then Start forward will be selected for the direction.

If both directions are selected the first selected direction has higher priority than the secondselected.

DIB4

DIB5

DIA1

DIB6

DIA2

DIA3

Vin+

Iin±

Cu er-Ha er

U

DO N

0O

N ER

RR

Cu er-Ha er

U

DO N

0O

N ER

RR

PROGRAMMABLEPUSH-BUTTON 2

Internalfrequencyreference

InternalStart/Stop

Internalfault reset

Internalreverse

Start forward

Fault reset input

Start reverse

External fault input

= control line

Reverse

Start/Stopand reverse

CH012K00

Panel reference

Start/Stop buttons

RST button

Multi-step speed select 2

BASIC PARAMETERS

Group 1

1. 5 Multi-step speed reference 1


1. 17 Basic reference selection

Multi-step speed select 1

>1

(78) HV9000

10

10.4 Parameters, Group 1

Num. Parameter Range Step Default Customer Description Page

1. 1 Minimum frequency 0—fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz 69

1. 2 Maximum frequency fmin-120/500 Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz * 69

1. 3 Acceleration time 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s Time from fmin (1. 1) to fmax (1. 2) 69

1. 4 Deceleration time 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s Time from fmax (1. 2) to fmin (1. 1) 69

1. 5 Multi-step speed fmin —fmax 0.1 Hz 10 Hz 69reference 1 (1. 1) (1. 2)

1. 6 Multi-step speed fmin —fmax 0.1 Hz 60 Hz 69reference 2 (1. 1) (1. 2)

1. 7 Current limit 0.1—2.5 x In HV9 0.1 A 1.5 x In HV9 Output current limit [A] of the unit 69

1. 8 V/Hz ratio 0 = Linearselection 0—1 1 0 1 = Squared 69

1. 9 V/Hz optimization 0—1 1 0 0 = None 701 = Automatic torque boost

1. 10 Nominal voltage 180—690 V 1 V 230 V Voltage code 2 70of the motor 380 V Voltage code 4

480 V Voltage code 5600 V Voltage code 6

1. 11 Nominal frequency 30—500 Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz fn from the nameplate of 70of the motor the motor

1. 12 Nominal speed 1—20000 rpm 1 rpm 1710 rpm nn from the nameplate of 70of the motor ** the motor

1. 13 Nominal current 2.5 x In HV9 0.1 A In HV9 In from the nameplate of 71of the motor (In Mot) the motor

1. 14 Supply voltage 208—240 230 V Voltage code 2 71

380—440 380 V Voltage code 4



1. 15 Application 0—1 1 1 0 = package lock open 71package lock Application is selected by

parameter 0.1

1. 16 Parameter value lock 0—1 1 0 Disables parameter changes: 710 = changes enabled1 = changes disabled

1. 17 Basic frequency 0—2 1 0 0 = analog input Vin 71reference selection 1 = analog input Iin

2 = reference from the panel

1. 18 Analog input Iin 0—1 1 0 0 = 0—20 mA 71range 1 = 4—20 mA

* If 1. 2 >motor synchr. speed, check suitabilityof motor and drive system.

** Default value for a four pole motor and a

nominal size HV9000.

Basic Application

Table 10.4-1 Group 1 basic parameters

Note! = Parameter value can be changed only

when the HV9000 is stopped.STOP

STOP

STOP

STOP

STOP

STOP

STOP

STOP

STOP

HV9000 Page 69 (78)

10

Basic Application

Figure 10.4.1-1 Example of Multi-step speed references.

10.4.1 Descriptions

1. 1, 1. 2 Minimum/maximum frequency

Defines the frequency limits of the HV9000.

Default maximum value for parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 is 120 Hz. By setting 1. 2 =120 Hz in Stop state (RUN indicator not lit) and pressing the Enter key themaximum value of parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 is changed to 500 Hz. At the sametime the panel reference display resolution is changed from 0.01 Hz to 0.1 Hz.The max. value is changed from 500 Hz to 120 Hz when parameter 1. 2 is set to119 Hz in Stop state and the Enter key is pressed.

1. 3, 1. 4 Acceleration time, deceleration time :

These limits correspond to the time required for the output frequency to acceleratefrom the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency (par. 1. 2).

1. 5, 1. 6 Multi-step speed reference 1, Multi-step speed reference 2:

Parameter values are limited between minimum and maximum frequency.

1. 7 Current limit

This parameter determines the maximum motor current that the HV9000 willprovide short term.

1. 8 V/Hz ratio selection

Linear: The voltage of the motor changes linearly with the frequency from 0 0 Hz to the nominal frequency of the motor. The nominal voltage of the

motor is supplied at this frequency. See figure 10.4.1-2.

Linear V/Hz ratio should be used in constant torque applications.

This default setting should be used if there is no special requirement foranother setting.

t

f[Hz]

Par. 1. 5

Par. 1. 6

DIB4

DIB5UD012K06

Ref Iin

Ref Vin

Closed

Open

C l o s e d

Open

(Par. 1. 17 = 0)

(78) HV9000

10

Basic Application

Squared: The voltage of the motor changes following a squared curve from 0 Hz 1 to the nominal frequency of the motor. The Nominal voltage of the motor

is supplied at this frequency. See figure 10.4.1-2.

The motor runs undermagnetized below the nominal frequency and itproduces less torque and electromechanical noise.A squared V/Hz ratio can be used in applications where the torquedemand from the load is proportional to the square of the speed, e.g.in centrifugal fans and pumps.

Figure 10.4.1-2 Linear and squared V/Hz curves.

1. 9 V/Hz optimization

Automatic The voltage to the motor changes automatically which allows thetorque motor to produce sufficient torque to start and run at low frequencies.boost The voltage increase depends on the motor type and

horsepower.Automatic torque boost can be used in applications wherestarting torque due to starting friction is high, e.g. in conveyors.

NOTE! In high torque - low speed applications - it is likely the motor will overheat.If the motor has to run for a prolonged time under these conditions,special attention must be paid to cooling the motor. Use external coolingfor the motor if the operating temperature rise is too high.

1. 10 Nominal voltage of the motor

Find the rated voltage Vn from the nameplate of the motor.

Note! If the nominal motor voltage is lower than the supply voltage, checkthat the insulation level of the motor is adequate.

1. 11 Nominal frequency of the motor

Find the value fn from the nameplate of the motor.

1. 12 Nominal speed of the motor

Find the value nn from the nameplate of the motor.

1. 13 Nominal current of the motor

Find the value In from the nameplate of the motor. The internal motor protectionfunction uses this value as a reference value.

!

V [V]

V n

f [Hz]

Default: Nominal voltage ofthe motor

Default: Nominalfrequency of themotor

Linear

Squared

Field weakening point

HV9000 Page 71 (78)

10

1. 14 Supply voltage

Set parameter value according to the nominal voltage of the supply. Values arepredefined for voltage codes 2, 4, 5 and 6 see table 10.4-1.

1. 15 Application package lock

The application package lock can be opened by setting the the value of the parameter1.15 to 0. It will then be possible to enter the parameter group 0 from parameter 1.1by pressing arrow down button (see figure 11-1). The number of the Application canbe selected from the table 11-1 and it is selected by the value of parameter 0.1.After this, the new Application is in use and its parameters will be found in theHVReady Application manual.

1. 16 Parameter value lock

Defines access to the changes of the parameter values:

0 = parameter value changes enabled1 = parameter value changes disabled

1. 17 Basic frequency reference selection

0 Analog voltage reference from terminals 2—3, e.g. a potentiometer1 Analog current reference trom terminals 4—5, e.g. a transducer.2 Panel reference is the reference set from the Reference Page (REF), see

chapter 7.5.

1. 18 Analog input Iin range

Defines the minimum value of the Analog input Iin signal (terminals 4,5).

Basic Application

(78) HV9000

10

Basic Application

10.5.2 Motor Stall warning

In the Basic application, motor stall protection gives a warning of a short time overload ofthe motor e.g. a stalled shaft. The reaction time of this stall protection is shorter than themotor thermal protection time. The stall state is defined by Stall Current and StallFrequency.

CAUTION! The calculated model does not protect the motor if the airflow to themotor is reduced by an air intake grill that is blocked

Figure 10.5.2-1 Stall state.

10.5 Motor protection functions in the Basic Application

10.5.1 Motor thermal protection

Motor thermal protection protects the motor from overheating. In the Basic application,Motor thermal protection uses constant settings and always causes a fault trip if themotor is overheated. To switch off the protection or to change the settings, seeHVReady application manual.

Your HV9000 is capable of supplyinghigher than nominal current to the motor.If the load requires this high current thereis a risk that motor will be thermallyoverloaded. This is true especially at lowfrequencies, as the cooling effect andthermal capacity of the motor arereduced. The motor thermal protectionis based on a calculated model whichuses the output current of the drive todetermine the load on the motor.

The thermal current IT specifies the loadcurrent above which the motor isoverloaded. See figure 10.5.1-1. If themotor current is above the curve, themotor temperature is increasing.

Both parameters have constant values.See figure 10.5.2-1. If the current ishigher than the set limit and the outputis lower than the set limit the stall stateis true.If the stall state lasts longer than15 s the stall warning is given on thedisplay. To change the stall warning to afault trip or to change the protectionsettings, see the HVReady applicationmanual

Figure 10.5.1-1 Motor thermal current IT curve.

IT

f

I

UMCH7_91

Overload area

Currentlimitpar. 1.7

35 Hz

100%× INmotor

45%× INmotor

I

I

25Hz

130%× I Nmot

Stall area

!

11

HV9000 Page 73 (78)System parameter group 0

Group 1 1.18 * * * 1.2 1.1

Group 0 0.2(system 0.1parameters)

Number Parameter Range Description Page

0. 1 Application 1—7 1 = Basic Application 74selection 2 = Standard Application

3 = Local / Remote Control Application4 = Multi-step Speed Application5 = PI-control Application6 = Multi-purpose Control Application7 = Pump and fan control Application

0. 2 Parameter 0—5 0 = Loading ready / Select loading 75loading 1 = Load default settings

2 = Read up parameters to user's set3 = Load down user's set parameters4 = Read parameters up to the panel (possible only with the graphic panel)5 = Load down parameters from the panel (possible only with graphic panel)

0. 3 Language 0—5 0 = English 75selection 1 = German

2 = Swedish3 = Finnish4 = Italian5 = French6 = Spanish

Table 11-1 System parameters, Group 0.

11.2 Parameter descriptions

0.1 Application selection

With this parameter the Application type can be selected. The default setting isthe Basic Application. Applications are described in chapter 12.

11 System parameter group 0

When the application package lock is open(par. 1.15 = 0) the system parameter group0 can be accessed. Parameter group 0 canbe entered from parameter 1.1 by thepressing arrow down button. Theparameters of group 0 are shown in table11-1.

11.1 Parameter table

Figure 11-1 Group 0.

UP

DOWN

11

Page 74 (78) HV9000System parameter group 0

0.2 Parameter loading

With this parameter it is possible to do several types of parameter load operations. Afterthe operation is completed this parameter value changes automatically to 0 (loadingready).

0 Loading ready / Select loading

Loading operation has been completed and the drive is ready to operate.

1 Load default settings

By setting the value of parameter 0.2 to 1 and then pressing the Enter-button theparameter default values for the application selected with parameter 0.1 areloaded. Use this when you want to restore the default set.

2 Read up parameters to User's set

Set the value of parameter 0.2 to 2 and press the Enter-button to store the activeparameter values, set A, in back-up memory as the User’s parameter value setB. The parameter values can later be reloaded as the active set by setting pa-rameter 0.2 to 3 and pressing the Enter button. See Figure

3 Load down user's set parameters

Set the value of parameter 0.2 to 3 and press the Enter-button to reload theusers’ set B as the active set A. The User’s set is intended to function as abackup in the case you have a good set of parameters that for some reason islost or changed.See Figure 11-2

4 Read parameters up to the panel (possible only with the graphic panel).

Copies the active parameter set A to the memory in the graphical panel

5 Load down parameters from the panel (possible only with the graphic panel).

Copies the parameter set in the graphical panel as the active parameter set A

NOTE! The panel read and load operations work only on drives of the samesize.

0.3 Language selection

This parameter selects the language of the text displayed on the panel.

Figure 11-2 Relation of the various parameter sets

The defaultvalues

A : The activeparameter set

B: The back-upparameter set

Parameters in thegraphical panel

Default

A B

Panel1

2

3

4

5

HV9000 Page 75 (78)HVReady application package

12

12 HVReady application package

12.1 Application Selection

To use one of the HVReady applications, first open the Application package lock (parameter1.15). Group 0 then comes visible (see figure 11-1). Changing the value of parameter 0.1changes the active application. See table 11-1.

Applications are presented in sections 12.2 - 12.7 and in more detail in the following,separate HVReady application manual.

- Programmable V/Hz curve and switchingfrequency

- Autorestart function- Motor Thermal and Stall protection fully

programmable- Motor Underload protection- Unused analog input functions

12.4 Multi-step Speed Application

The Multi-step Speed Control Applicationcan be used where fixed speed referencesare required. 9 different speeds can beprogrammed: one basic speed, 7 multi-stepspeeds and one jogging speed. The speedsteps are selected with digital signals DIB4,DIB5 and DIB6. If the jogging speed is usedDIA3 can be programmed for jogging speedselect

The basic speed reference can be eithervoltage or current signal via analog inputterminals (2/3 or 4/5). All outputs are freelyprogrammable.

Other additonal functions:

- Programmable Start/stop and Reversesignal logic

- Analog input signal range selection- Two frequency in band limit indications- Torque in band limit indication- Reference in band limit indication- Second set of ramps and choice of linear

or S curve- DC-braking at start and stop- Three prohibit frequency lockout ranges- Programmable V/Hz curve and switching

frequency- Autorestart function- Motor Thermal and Stall protection fully

programmable- Motor Underload protection- Unused analog input functions

12.2 Standard Application

The Standard Application has the same I/Osignals and same Control logic as the Basicapplication.

Digital input DIA3 and all outputs are freelyprogrammable.


- Programmable Start/Stop and Reversesignal logic

- Reference scaling- One frequency limit supervision- Second set of ramps and choice of linear

or S curve- Programmable start and stop functions- DC-braking at stop- One prohibit frequency lockout range- Programmable V/Hz curve and switching

frequency- Autorestart function- Motor Thermal and Stall protection off /

warning / fault programming

12.3 Local/Remote Application

Utilizing the Local/Remote ControlApplication the use of two different controland frequency reference sources isprogrammable. The active control source isselected with digital input DIB6. All outputsare freely programmable.




or S curve- DC-braking at start and stop- Three prohibit frequency lockout ranges

(78) HV9000HVReady application package

12

12.5 PI-control Application

In the PI-control Application, there are two I/O-terminal control sources. Source A is aPI-controller and source B is a directfrequency reference. The control source isselected with the DIB6 input.

The PI-controller reference can be selectedfrom the analog inputs, motor potentiometer,or panel reference. The actual value can beselected from the analog inputs or from amathematical function acting on the analoginputs. The direct frequency reference canbe used for control without the PI-controller.The frequency reference can be selectedfrom the analog inputs or the panelreference.

All outputs are freely programmable.






programmable- Motor Underload protection

12.6 Multi-purpose Control Application

In the Multi-purpose Control Application, thefrequency reference can be selected fromthe analog inputs, joystick control, motorpotentiometer, or a mathematical function ofthe analog inputs. Multi-step speeds and jogspeed can also be selected if the digitalinputs are programmed for these functions

Digital inputs DIA1 and DIA2 are reservedfor Start/stop logic. Digital inputs DIA3 -DIB6 are programmable for multi-stepspeed select, jog speed select, motorpotentiometer, external fault, ramp timeselect, ramp prohibit, fault reset and DC-brake command function. All outputs arefreely programmable.




or S-curve- DC-braking at start and stop- Three prohibit frequency lockout ranges- Programmable V/Hz curve and switching


programmable- Motor Underload protection- Free analog input functions

12.7 Pump and Fan Control Application

The Pump and Fan Control Application canbe used to control one variable speed driveand 0-3 auxiliary drives. The PI-controller ofthe frequency converter controls the speedof the variable speed drive and gives controlsignals to Start and Stop auxiliary drives tocontrol the total flow.

The application has two control sources onI/O terminal. Source A is Pump and fancontrol and source B is direct frequencyreference. The control source is selectedwith DIB6 input.



- Programmable Start/stop and reversesignal logic




programmable- Motor Underload protection

HV9000 Page 77 (78)Options

13 Options

13.1 External filters

Information of HV9000 external input andoutput filters (RFI, dV/dT, and Sinusoidal-filters) can be found in their separatemanuals.

13.2 Dynamic braking

Effective motor braking and shortdeceleration times are possible by using anexternal or internal braking chopper with anexternal brake resistor.

The internal braking chopper is assembledin the factory (available in certain models). Ithas the same continuous currentspecification as the unit itself.

Select the correct brake resistor to get thedesired braking effect. More information canbe found in the separate brake manual.

13.3 I/O- expander board

The available I/O can be increased by usingthe I/O- expander boards. I/O-expanderboards can be installed in the option boardposition inside the open, protected, NEMA 1and NEMA 12 HV9000 models. For theCompact NEMA 1 model the board needs tobe installed in a separate I/O-expander box.

More information can be found in the I/O-expander board manuals.

13.4 Communication

HV9000 frequency converters can beconnected to DeviceNet, Modbus RTU,Interbus-S, Profibus-DP and Lonworkssystems by using the fieldbus option board.

The fieldbus board can be installed in theoption board position inside the open,protected, NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 HV9000models. For the compact NEMA 1 model theboard needs to be installed in a separate I/O-expander box.

More information can be found in theseparate communication manuals.

13

13.5 HVGraphic control panel

The HVGraphic control panel can be usedinplace of the standard 3 line LCD panel. Itprovides:

- parameters, monitored items etc. in textformat

- 3 monitored items at the same time indisplay

- one monitored item can be shown inincreased text size with a graph bar

- The selected parameter value is shownon a graph bar

- 3 monitored items can be shown on thegraphical trend display

- the parameters of the frequencyconverter can be uploaded to the paneland then downloaded to another inverter.

More information can be found in theHVGraphicTM Panel manual.

13.6 HVDRIVE

HVDrive is the PC based tool for controland monitoring of the HV9000. WithHVDrive:

- parameters can be loaded from theHV9000, changed, saved to a file orloaded back to the HV9000 - parameterscan be printed to paper or to a file

- references can be set- the motor can be started and stopped- signals can be examined in graphical

form- actual values can be displayed

The HV9000 can be connected to a PCwith a special RS232-cable, catalognumber HVDRIVECABLE. The same cablecan be used for downloading specializedapplications to the HV9000.

13.7 Operator panel door installation kit

An adapter kit is available to mount theoperator display panel on an enclosuredoor.

(78) HV9000

13.8 Protected chassis cable cover for100-150 HP open panel units

This optional cable cover provides aprotected chassis capability equivalent toIP20.

Notes:

HV9000 AF DRIVES

• HV Ready Application Manual

1652 HV9000 Cover 4/18/00 11:17 AM Page 1

CONTENTS

A General ..............................................0-2

B Application selection .......................0-2

C Restoring default values ofapplication parameters ....................0-2

D Language selection .........................0-2

1 Standard Control Application ..........1-1

2 Local/Remote Control Application 2-1

3 Multi-step Speed Application ..........3-1

4 PI-control Application ......................4-1

5 Multi-purpose Application ...............5-1

6 Pump and fan control Application ..6-1

HV9000 HVReady APPLICATION MANUAL

HV9000 Page 0-1

2 HV9000

Table B-1 Application selection parameters.

Besides the parameter group 1, theapplications also have parameter groups 2 —8 available (see figure B-1).

Parameters of the groups sequentially followeach other and changing from the lastparameter of one group to the first parameterof the next group or vice versa is done simplyby pushing the arrow up/arrow down buttons.

Groups 2—8

Group 1

Group 0

Figure B-1 Parameter Groups.

A General

This manual provides you with the informationneeded to apply these applications.

B Application selection

If the Basic Application is in use, first open theapplication package lock (parameter 1.15 = 0)Group 0 appears. By changing the value ofparameter 0.1 a different application can beselected. See table B-1.

Number Parameter Range Description

0. 1 Application 1 —7 1 = Basic Application2 = Standard Application3 = Local / Remote Control Application4 = Multi-step Speed Application5 = PI-control Application6 = Multi-purpose Control Application7 = Pump and Fan Control Application

To change from one application to another,simply change the value of parameter 0.1 tothat of the application desired: see table B-1.

Each application is described in its ownchapter. Section B tells how to select theapplication.

C Restoring default values ofapplication parameters

Default values of the parameters of theapplications 1 to 7 can be restored by selectingthe same application again with parameter 0.1or by setting the value of parameter 0.2 to 1.See User's manual chapter 12.

If parameter group 0 is not visible, make itvisible as follows:

1. If parameter lock is set on, open the lock,parameter 1. 16, by setting the value ofthe parameter to 0.

2. If parameter conceal is set on, open theconceal parameter 1. 15, by setting thevalue of the parameter to 0.Group 0 becomes visible.

D Language selection

The language of the text shown on theoperator's panel can be chosen with parameter0. 3. See HV9000 User's Manual, chapter 11.

General

HV9000 Page 1-1

1Standard Application

STANDARD CONTROL APPLICATION

(par. 0.1 = 2)

CONTENTS

1 Standard Application.........................1-1

1.1 General .........................................1-21.2 Control I/O ....................................1-21.3 Control signal logic .......................1-31.4 Parameters Group 1 ....................1-4

1.4.1 Parameter table ...................1-41.4.2 Description of Group1 par ...1-5

1.5 Special parameters, Groups 2-8 ..1-81.5.1 Parameter tables ................ 1-81.5.2 Description of Groups. ..... 1-12

2 HV9000

1 1 STANDARD APPLICATION

1.1 GeneralThe Standard application has the same I/Osignals and same Control logic as the Basicapplication. Digital input DIA3 and all outputsare programmable.

The Standard Application can be selected by

setting the value of parameter 0. 1 to 2.Basic connections of inputs and outputs areshown in the figure 1.2-1. The control signallogic is shown in the figure 1.3-1.Programming of I/O terminals is explainedin chapter 1.5.

Standard Application


220VACMax.

RUN

READY

FAULT

Figure 1.2-1 Default I/O configuration and connection example of the Standard Application.

1.2 Control I/O


1 +10Vref

Reference output Voltage for a potentiometer, etc.

2 Vin+ Analog input, voltage Frequency reference if activated ifrange 0—10 V DC terminals 14 and 15 open and para-

meter 1.17 = 0 (default value)


4 Iin+ Analog input, current Frequency reference activated if5 Iin- range 0—20 mA terminals 14 and 15 closed, or open

and parameter 1.17 = 1



8 DIA1 Start forward Contact closed = start forward(Programmable)

9 DIA2 Start reverse Contact closed = start reverse(Programmable)

10 DIA3 External fault input Contact open = no fault(Programmable) Contact closed = fault




14 DIB4 Multi-step speed select 1 DIB4 DIB5 Frequency ref.

15 DIB5 Multi-step speed select 2 open open Ref. Vin (par.1.17=0)closed open Multi-step ref. 1open closed Multi-step ref. 2closed closed Ref. Iin (term. #4,5)

16 DIB6 Fault reset Contact open = no actionContact closed = fault reset


18 Iout+ Output frequency Programmable (par. 3. 1)

19 Iout- Analog output Range 0—20 mA/RL max. 500 Ω20 DO1 Digital output Programmable ( par. 3. 6)

READY Open collector, I<50 mA, V<48 VDC

21 RO1 Relay output 1 Programmable ( par. 3. 7)

22 RO1 RUN

23 RO1

24 RO2 Relay output 2 Programmable ( par. 3. 8 )

25 RO2 FAULT

26 RO2

HV9000 Page 1-3

11.3 Control signal logic

Figure 1.3-1 Control signal logic of the Standard Application.


DIB4

DIB5

DIA1

DIB6

DIA2

DIA3

>1

Vin+

Iin±

Cutler-Hammer

UP

DOWN

0STOP

ENTER

RESET ISTART

PROGRAMMABLEPUSH-BUTTON 2

Internalfrequencyreference

InternalStart/Stop

Internalfault reset

Internalreverse

Start forward(programmable)

Fault reset input

Start reverse(programmable)

External fault input(programmable)

= control line= signal line

Start/Stop

Reverse

ProgrammableStart/Stopand reverselogic

BASIC PARAMETERS

Group 1




CH012K01

Panel referenceStart/Stop buttonsRST buttonProgr. button1

Multi-step speed sel. 1

Multi-step speed sel. 2

4 HV9000

1


Table 1.4-1 Group 1 basic parameters.

1.4 PARAMETERS, GROUP 1

1.4.1 Parameter table

Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page

1. 1 Minimum frequency 0—fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz 1-5

1. 2 Maximum frequency fmin-120/500 Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz * 1-5

1. 3 Acceleration time 1 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 3,0 s Time from fmin (1. 1) to fmax (1. 2) 1-5

1. 4 Deceleration time 1 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s Time from fmax (1. 2) to fmin (1. 1) 1-5

1. 5 Multi-step speed fmin —fmax 0.1 Hz 10.0 Hz 1-5reference 1

1. 6 Multi-step speed fmin —fmax 0.1 Hz 60.0 Hz 1-5reference 2

1. 7 Current limit 0.1—2.5 x InHV9 0.1 A 1.5 x InHV9 ***Output curr. limit [A] of the unit 1-5

1. 8 V/Hz ratio selection 0—2 1 0 0 = Linear 1-51 = Squared2 = Programmable V/Hz ratio

1. 9 V/Hz optimization 0 —1 1 0 0 = None 1-61 = Automatic torque boost

1. 10 Nominal voltage 180—690 V 1 V 230 V Voltage code 2 1-7of the motor 380 V Voltage code 4


1. 11 Nominal frequency 30—500 Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz fn from the nameplate of 1-7of the motor the motor

1. 12 Nominal speed 300—20000 rpm 1 rpm 1720 rpm nn from the nameplate of 1-7of the motor ** the motor

1. 13 Nominal current 2.5 x In HV9 0.1 A In HV9 In from the nameplate of 1-7of the motor the motor

1. 14 Supply voltage 208—240 230 V Voltage code 2 1-7




1. 15 Parameter conceal 0—1 1 0 Visibility of the parameters: 1-70 = all parameter groups visible1 = only group 1 is visible

1. 16 Parameter value lock 0—1 1 0 Disables parameter changes: 1-70 = changes enabled1 = changes disabled

1. 17 Basic frequency 0—2 1 0 0 = analog input Vn 1-7reference selection 1 = analog input In

2 = reference from the panel

* If 1. 2 > motor synchr. speed, check suitabilityfor motor and drive system.Selecting 120 Hz/500 Hz range see page 1-5.

** Default value for a four pole motorand a nominal size drive.

Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only

when the drive is stopped.

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

***Up to M10. Bigger classes case by case

HV9000 Page 1-5

11.4.2 Description of Group 1 parameters


Defines the frequency limits of the drive.

The default maximum value for parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 is 120 Hz. By setting thevalue of the parameter 1. 2 to 120 Hz when the drive is stopped (RUN indicator notlit) parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 are changed to 500 Hz. At the same time theresolution of the display panel is changed from 0.01 Hz to 0.1 Hz.

Changing the max. value from 500 Hz to 120 Hz in done by setting parameter 1. 2to 119 Hz while the drive is stopped.

1. 3, 1. 4 Acceleration time1, deceleration time 1:

These limits correspond to the time required for the output frequency to acceleratefrom the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency (par. 1. 2).

1. 5, 1. 6 Multi-step speed reference 1, Multi-step speed reference 2:

Figure 1.4-1 Example of Multi-step speed references.

Parameter values are automatically limited between minimum and maximumfrequency ( par 1. 1, 1. 2).

1. 7 Current limit

This parameter determines the maximum motor current that the HV9000 will provideshort term.


Linear: The voltage of the motor changes linearly with the frequency in the 0 constant flux area from 0 Hz to the field weakening point (par. 6. 3)

where a constant voltage (nominal value) is supplied to the motor. Seefigure 1.4-2.

A linear V/Hz ratio should be used in constant torque applications.


t

f[Hz]

Par. 1. 5

Par. 1. 6

DIB4

DIB5

Ref. Vin

Run

Stop

Run

Stop Ch009K06

(Par. 1.17 = 0)

Ref. Iin

6 HV9000

1This default setting should be used if there is no specialrequirement for another setting.

Squared: The voltage of the motor changes following a squared curve formwith the frequency in the area from 0 Hz to the field weakening

1 point (par. 6. 3) where the nominal voltage is also supplied tothe motor. See figure 1.4-2.

The motor runs undermagnetized below the field weakening pointand produces less torque and electromechanical noise. A squaredV/Hz ratio can be used in applications where the torque demand of the


Default: nominal frequencyof the motor

Field weakeningpoint

Default: nominalvoltage of themotor

Parameter 6.5 Parameter 6.3 f[Hz](Default 5 Hz)

U[V]V

n

Parameter6.4

Parameter 6.6Default 10%

Parameter 6.7Default 1.3 %

load is proportional to the square of the speed, e.g. in centrifugalfans and pumps.

Figure 1.4-2 Linear and squared V/Hz curves.

Programm.The V/Hz curve can be programmed with three different points.

V/Hz curve The parameters for programming are explained in chapter 1.5.2.A programmable V/Hz curve can be used if the standard settings

2 do not satisfy the needs of the application. See figure 1.4-3.

Figure 1.4-3 Programmable V/Hz curve.


Automatic The voltage to the motor changes automatically which allows thetorque motor to produce enough torque to start and run at low frequencies.

The boost voltage increase depends on the motor type and horsepower.

U [V]

Vn Default: Nominalvoltage of the motor


Linear

Squared


f [Hz]

HV9000 Page 1-7

1Automatic torque boost can be used in applications where starting torquedue to starting friction is high, e.g. in conveyors.

NOTE! In high torque - low speed applications - it is likely that the motor willoverheat. If the motor has to run for a prolonged time under these conditions,special attention must be paid to cooling the motor. Use externalcooling for the motor if the operating temperature rise is too high.


Find this value from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the voltage at the field weakening point, parameter 6. 4, to 100%x Vnmotor.

Note! If the nominal motor voltage is lower than the supply voltage, checkthat the insulation level of the motor is adequate.


Find the nominal frequency fn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the field weakening point, parameter 6. 3, to the same value.


Find this value nn from the nameplate of the motor.


Find the value In from the nameplate of the motor.The internal motor protection function uses this value as a reference value.


Set parameter value according to the nominal voltage of the supply.Values are predefined for voltage codes 2, 4, 5, and 6. See table 1.4-1.

1. 15 Parameter conceal

Defines which parameter groups are available:

0 = all groups are visible1 = only group 1 is visible


Permits access for changing the parameter values:


1. 17 Basic frequency reference selection

0 = Analog voltage reference from terminals 2—3, e.g. a potentiometer1 = Analog current reference from terminals 4—5, e.g. a transducer.2 = Panel reference is the reference set from the Reference Page (REF),

see chapter 7.5.


!

8 HV9000

1

Group 3, Output and supervision parameters


3. 1 Analog output function 0—7 1 1 0 = Not used Scale 100% 1-151 = O/P frequency (0—fmax)2 = Motor speed (0—max. speed)3 = O/P current (0—2.0xInHV9)4 = Motor torque (0—2xTnMot)5 = Motor power (0—2xPnMot)6 = Motor voltage (0—100%xVnMot)7 = DC-link volt. (0—1000 V)

3. 2 Analog output filter time 0.00—10.00 s 0.01s 1.00 s 0 = no filtering 1-15

3. 3 Analog output inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 1-151 = Inverted

3. 4 Analog output minimum 0—1 1 0 0 = 0 mA 1-151 = 4 mA

3. 5 Analog output scale 10—1000% 1% 100% 1-15

Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.


1.5 SPECIAL PARAMETERS, GROUPS 2—8

1.5.1 Parameter tables

Group 2, Input signal parameters


DIA1 DIA2

2. 1 Start/Stop logic 0—3 1 0 0 = Start forward Start reverse 1-12selection 1 = Start/Stop Reverse

2 = Start/Stop Run enable3 = Start pulse Stop pulse

2. 2 DIA3 function 0—5 1 1 0 = Not used 1-13(terminal 10) 1 = Ext. fault, closing contact

2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acc./dec. time selection5 = Reverse (if par. 2. 1 = 3)

2. 3 Reference offset 0—1 1 0 0 = 0—20 mA 1-13for current input 1 = 4—20 mA

2. 4 Reference scaling, 0—par. 2.5 1 Hz 0 Hz Selects the frequency that 1-13minimum value corresponds to the minimum

reference signal

2. 5 Reference scaling, 0—fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz Selects the frequency that 1-13maximum value corresponds to the maximum

reference signal0 = Scaling off>0 = Maximum frequency value

2. 6 Reference invert 0—1 1 0 0 = No inversion 1-141 = Reference inverted

2. 7 Reference filter time 0.00 —10.00s 0.01s 0.10s 0 = No filtering 1-14

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

HV9000 Page 1-9

1 Group 3, Output and supervision parameters


3. 6 Digital output function 0—14 1 1 0 = Not used 1-161 = Ready2 = Run3 = Fault4 = Fault inverted5 = HV9000 overheat warning6 = External fault or warning7 = Reference fault or warning8 = Warning9 = Reversed10 = Multi-step speed selected11 = At speed12 = Motor regulator activated13 = Output frequency limit superv.14 = Control from I/O-terminal

3. 7 Relay output 1 function 0—14 1 2 As parameter 3. 6 1-16


3. 9 Output freq. limit 0—2 1 0 0 = No 1-16supervision function 1 = Low limit

2 = High limit

3. 10 Output freq. limit 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 1-16supervision value (par. 1. 2)

3. 11 I/O-expander option board 0—7 1 3 As parameter 3. 1 1-15analog output function

3. 12 I/O-expander option board 10—1000% 1% 100% As parameter 3. 5 1-15analog output scale

Group 4, Drive control parameters


4. 1 Acc./Dec. ramp 1 shape 0.0—10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s 0 = Linear 1-17>0 = S-curve acc./dec. time


4. 3 Acceleration time 2 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s 1-17

4. 4 Deceleration time 2 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s 1-17

4. 5 Brake chopper 0—2 1 0 0 = Brake chopper not in use 1-171 = Brake chopper in use2 = External brake chopper

4. 6 Start function 0—1 1 0 0 = Ramp 1-171 = Flying start

4. 7 Stop function 0—1 1 0 0 = Coasting 1-181 = Ramp

4. 8 DC-braking current 0.15—1.5 x 0.1 A 0.5 x InHV9 1-18InHV9 (A)

4. 9 DC-braking time at Stop 0.00—250.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off 1-18



STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

10 HV9000

1 Group 5, Prohibit frequency parameters


5. 1 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 1-19range low limit par. 5. 2

5. 2 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = no prohibit frequency range 1-19range high limit (1. 1) (1. 2) (max limit = par. 1. 2)

Group 6, Motor control parameters


6. 1 Motor control mode 0—1 1 0 0 = Frequency control 1-201 = Speed control

6. 2 Switching frequency 1.0—16.0 kHz 0.1 10/3.6 kHz Dependant on Hp rating 1-20

6. 3 Field weakening point 30—500 Hz 1 Hz Param. 1-201. 11

6. 4 Voltage at field 15 —200% 1% 100% 1-20weakening point x Vnmot

6. 5 V/Hz curve mid 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 1-20point frequency

6. 6 V/Hz curve mid 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 0.00% Parameter maximum value = 1-20point voltage x Vnmot parameter 6.4

6. 7 Output voltage at 0.00—100.0% 0.01% 0.00% 1-20zero frequency x Vnmot

6. 8 Overvoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is off 1-201 = Controller is on

6. 9 Undervoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is off 1-201 = Controller is on


Group 7, Protections


7. 1 Response to 0—3 1 0 0 = No action 1-21reference fault 1 = Warning

2 = Fault, stop according par. 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop

7. 2 Response to 0—3 1 2 0 = No action 1-21external fault 1 = Warning

2 = Fault, stop according par. 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop

7. 3 Phase supervision of 0—2 2 2 0 = No action 1-21the motor 2 = Fault

7. 4 Ground fault protection 0—2 2 2 0 = No action 1-212 = Fault

7. 5 Motor thermal protection 0—2 1 2 0 = No action 1-221 = Warning2 = Fault

7. 6 Stall protection 0—2 1 1 0 = No action 1-221 = Warning2 = Fault


STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

HV9000 Page 1-11

1Group 8, Autorestart parameters


8. 1 Automatic restart: 0—10 1 0 0 = no action 1-23number of tries

8. 2 Automatic restart: multi- 1—6000 s 1 s 30 s 1-23attempt max. trial time

8. 3 Automatic restart: 0—1 1 0 0 = Ramp 1-24start function 1 = Flying start

Table 1.5-1 Special parameters, Groups 2—8.


12 HV9000

1 1.5.2 Description of Group 2—8 parameters

2. 1 Start/Stop logic selection

0 DIA1: closed contact = start forwardDIA2: closed contact = start reverse,See figure 1.5-1.

Figure 1.5-2 Start, Stop, reverse.

DIA1

DIA2

1 2 3

t

UD009K09

Output frequency

Stop function(par 4. 7)= coasting

FWD

REV

Figure 1.5-1 Start forward/Start reverse.

1 The first selected direction has the highest priority

2 When DIA1 contact opens, the direction of rotation starts to change

3 If Start forward (DIA1) and Start reverse (DIA2) signals are activesimultaneously, the Start forward signal (DIA1) has priority.

1 DIA1: closed contact = start open contact = stopDIA2: closed contact = reverse open contact = forwardSee figure 1.5-2.

DIA1

DIA2

t

UD012K10

Output frequency

Stop function(par 4. 7= coasting

FWD

REV


HV9000 Page 1-13

12: DIA1: closed contact = start open contact = stopDIA2: closed contact = start enabled open contact = start disabled

3: 3-wire connection (pulse control):

DIA1: closed contact = start pulseDIA2: closed contact = stop pulse(DIA3 can be programmed for reverse command)See figure 1.5-3.

t

min 50 ms

UD009K11

FWD

REV

Output frequency


If Start and Stop pulses are simultaneous the Stop pulseoverrides the Start pulse

DIA1Start

DIA2Stop

Figure 1.5-3 Start pulse/Stop pulse.

2. 2 DIA3 function

1: External fault, closing contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped whenthe contact is closed.

2: External fault, opening contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped whenthe contact is open.

3: Run enable contact open = Start of the motor disabledcontact closed = Start of the motor enabled

4: Acc. / Dec contact open = Acceleration/Deceleration time 1 selectedtime select. contact closed = Acceleration/Deceleration time 2 selected

5: Reverse contact open = Forward Can be used for reversing ifcontact closed = Reverse parameter 2. 1 has value 3

2.3 Reference offset for current input

0: No offset1: Offset 4 mA, provides supervision of zero level signal. The response to reference

fault can be programmed with the parameter 7. 1.


14 HV9000

1

%

100%

63%

Par. 2. 7

t [s]

UD009K15

Filtered signal

Unfiltered signal

2.6 Reference invert

Inverts reference signal:

max. ref. signal = min.set freq.min. ref. signal = max. set freq.See figure 1.5-6.

Figure 1.5-4 Reference scaling. Figure 1.5-5 Reference scaling,parameter 2. 5 = 0.


100

par. 2. 4

par. 2. 5

Ch012K12

Outputfrequency

Analoginput [V]

Max freq. par 1. 2

Min freq. par 1. 1

100 Ch012K13

Outputfrequency

Analoginput [V]

Max freq. par 1. 2

Min freq. par 1. 1

0

par. 2. 4

par. 2. 5

Ch012K14

Outputfrequency

Analoginput

max.

Max freq. par 1. 2

Min freq. par 1. 1

Figure 1.5-6 Reference invert.

Figure 1.5-7 Reference filtering.

2.4, 2.5 Reference scaling, minimumvalue/maximum value

Setting value limits: 0 < par. 2. 4< par. 2. 5 < par. 1. 2.If parameter 2. 5 = 0 scaling is setoff. See figures 1.5-4 and 1.5-5.

2.7 Reference filter time

Filters out disturbances from theincoming reference signal. A longfiltering time makes regulationresponse slower. See figure 1.5-7.

HV9000 Page 1-15

13. 1 Analog output function

See table "Group 3, output andsupervision parameters" on thepage 1-8.

3. 2 Analog output filter time

Filters the analog output signal.See figure 1.5-8.

%

100%

63%

Par. 3. 2

t [s]

UD009K16

Filtered signal

Unfiltered signal


1.00

20 mA

4 mA

10 mA

0.50 mA

Param. 3. 5= 200%

Param. 3. 5= 100%

Param. 3. 5= 50%

12 mA

Ch012K17

Analogoutputcurrent

Selected (para. 3. 1)signal max. value

1.00

20 mA

4 mA

10 mA

0.50 mA

Param. 3. 5= 200%

Param. 3. 5= 100%

Param. 3. 5= 50%

Par. 3. 4 = 1

Par. 3. 4 = 0

Ch012K18

12 mA

Analogoutputcurrent

Max. value of signalselected by param. 3. 1

Figure 1.5-8 Analog output filtering.

Figure 1.5-9 Analog output invert.

Figure 1.5-10 Analog output scale.

3.3 Analog output invert

Inverts analog output signal:max. output signal = minimumset valuemin. output signal = maximumset valueSee figure 1.5-9

3. 4 Analog output minimum

Defines the signal minimum tobe either 0 mA or 4 mA. See figure1.5-10.

3. 5 Analog output scale

Scaling factor for analog output.See figure 1.5-10.

Signal Max. value of the signal

Output Max. frequency (p. 1. 2)frequencyMotor speed Max. speed (nnxfmax/fn)Output 2 x InHV9currentMotor torque 2 x TnMotMotor power 2 x PnMotMotor voltage 100% x VnMotDC-link volt. 1000 V

16 HV9000

1 3. 6 Digital output function3. 7 Relay output 1 function3. 8 Relay output 2 function

Setting value Signal content

0 = Not used Out of operation

Digital output DO1 sinks current and programmablerelay (RO1, RO2) is activated when:

1 = Ready The drive is ready to operate2 = Run The drive operates3 = Fault A fault trip has occurred4 = Fault inverted A fault trip has not occurred5 = HV9000 overheat warning The heat-sink temperature exceeds +70°C6 = External fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 27 = Reference fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 1

- if analog reference is 4—20 mA and signal is <4mA8 = Warning Always if a warning exists9 = Reversed The reverse command has been selected10= Multi-step speed selected A multi-step speed has been selected11 = At speed The output frequency has reached the set reference12= Motor regulator activated Overvoltage or overcurrent regulator was activated13= Output frequency supervision The output frequency goes outside of the set super-

vision low limit/ high limit (par. 3. 9 and 3. 10)14= Control from I/O terminals Ext. control mode selected with progr. push-button #2

Table 1.5-2 Output signals via DO1 and output relays RO1 and RO2.

3. 9 Output frequency limit supervision function

0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision

If the output frequency goes under/over the set limit (3. 10) this function generatesa warning message via the digital output DO1 and via a relay output RO1 or RO2depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8.

3. 10 Output frequency limit supervision value

The frequency value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 9. See figure 1.5-11.


Figure 1.5-11 Output frequency supervision.

Par 3. 10

f[Hz]

t

21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1

21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1

21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1

UD009K19

Example:

Par. 3.9 = 2

HV9000 Page 1-17

14. 1 Acc/Dec ramp 1 shape4. 2 Acc/Dec ramp 2 shape

The acceleration and deceleration ramp shape can be programmed with theseparameters.

Setting the value = 0 gives you a linear ramp shape. The output frequencyimmediately follows the input with a ramp time set by parameters 1. 3, 1. 4 (4. 3, 4.4 for Acc/Dec. time 2).Setting 0.1—10 seconds for 4. 1(4. 2) causes an S-shaped ramp.The speed changes are smooth.Parameter 1. 3/ 1. 4 (4. 3/ 4. 4)determines the ramp time of theacceleration/deceleration in themiddle of the curve. See figure 1.5-12.

4. 3 Acceleration time 24. 4 Deceleration time 2

These values correspond to the time required for the output frequency to changefrom the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency (par. 1.2). With this parameter it is possibile to set two different acceleration/decelerationtimes for one application. The active set can be selected with the programmablesignal DIA3. See parameter 2. 2.

4. 5 Brake chopper

0 = No brake chopper1 = Brake chopper and brake resistor installed2 = External brake chopper

When the drive is decelerating the motor, the energy stored in the inertia of themotor and the load is fed into the external brake resistor. If the brake resistor isselected correctly the drive is able to decelerate the load with a torque equal tothat of acceleration. See the separate Brake resistor installation manual.

4. 6 Start function

Ramp:

0 The drive starts from 0 Hz and accelerates to the set reference frequency withinthe set acceleration time. (Load inertia or starting friction may extend theacceleration times).


[Hz]

[t]

4. 1 (4. 2)

4. 1 (4. 2)

UD009K20

1. 3, 1. 4(4. 3, 4. 4)

f

Figure 1.5-12 S-shaped acceleration/deceleration.

18 HV9000

1 Flying start:

1 The drive starts into a running motor by first finding the speed the motor isrunning at. Searching starts from the maximum frequency down until the actualfrequency reached. The output frequency then accelerates/decelerates to theset reference value at a rate determined by the acceleration/deceleration rampparameters.

Use this mode if the motor may be coasting when the start command is given.With the flying start it is possible to ride through short utility voltage interruptions.

4. 7 Stop function

Coasting:

0 The motor coasts to an uncontrolled stop with the HV9000 off, after theStop command is issued.

Ramp:

1 After the Stop command is issued, the speed of the motor is deceleratedbased on the deceleration ramp time parameter.If the regenerated energy is high, it may be necessary to use an externalbraking resistor for faster deceleration.

4. 8 DC braking current

Defines the current injected into the motor during DC braking.

4. 9 DC braking time at stop

Determines whether DC braking is ON or OFF. It also determines the braking durationtime of the DC-brake when the motor is stopping. The function of the DC-brakedepends on the stop function, parameter 4. 7. See figure 1.5-13.

0 DC-brake is not used

>0 DC-brake is in use depending on the setup of the stop function(param. 4. 7). The time is set by the value of parameter 4. 9:

Stop-function = 0 (coasting):

After the stop command, the motor will coast to a stop with the HV9000 off.

With DC-injection, the motor can be electrically stopped in the shortest possibletime, without using an optional external braking resistor.

The braking time is scaled according to the frequency when the DC- brakingstarts. If the frequency is > nominal frequency of the motor (par. 1.11), the valueof parameter 4.9 determines the braking time. When the frequency is < 10% ofthe nominal, the braking time is 10% of the set value of parameter 4.9. See figure1.5-13.


HV9000 Page 1-19

1

Figure 1.5-13 DC-braking time when stop = coasting.

Stop-function = 1 (ramp):

After a Stop command, the speed of the motor is reduced based on the decelerationramp parameter. If no regeneration occurs due to load inertia DC-braking starts at0.5 Hz.

fout fout

fn fn

t t

t = 1 x par. 4. 9 t = 0.1 x par. 4. 9

UD009K21RUNSTOP

RUNSTOP

Output frequency

Motor speed

Output frequency

Motor speed

DC-braking ON

DC-braking ON

The braking time is defined bypar. 4. 9. If the load has a highinertia, use an external brakingresistor for faster deceleration.

See figure 1.5-14.


0,1x fn

RUN

STOP

t = param. 4. 9

t0.5 Hz

fout

Motor speed

Output frequency

DC-braking

fout

5. 1 5. 2

[Hz]

[Hz]

UD009K24

frequency reference

5. 1 Prohibit frequency area5. 2 Low limit/High limit

In some systems it may benecessary to avoid certainfrequencies because ofmechanical resonance problems.

With these parameters it ispossible to set limits for one "skipfrequency" region between 0 Hzand 120 Hz/500 Hz. Accuracy ofthe setting is 0.1 Hz.

See figure 1.5-15.

[Hz]

[Hz][Hz]

Speed

Figure 1.5-14 DC-braking time when stopfunction = ramp.

Figure 1.5-15 Example of prohibit frequencyarea setting.

20 HV9000

1 6. 1 Motor control mode

0 = Frequency control: The I/O terminal and panel references are frequency ref-erences and the drive controls the output frequency (out-put freq. resolution 0.01 Hz)

1 = Speed control: The I/O terminal and panel references are speed refer-ences and the drive controls the motor speed (controlaccuracy ± 0.5%).

6. 2 Switching frequency

Motor noise can be minimized by using a high switching frequency. Increasing theswitching frequency reduces the current capacity of the HV9000.

Before changing the frequency from the factory default 10 kHz (3.6 kHz >40 Hp)check the drive derating in the curves shown in figures 5.2-2 and 5.2-3 in chapter5.2 of the User's Manual.

6. 3 Field weakening point6. 4 Voltage at the field weakening point

The field weakening point is the output frequency where the output voltage reachesthe set maximum value (parameter 6. 4). Above that frequency the output voltageremains constant at the set maximum value. Below that frequency the output voltagedepends on the setting of the V/Hz curve parameters 1. 8, 1. 9, 6. 5, 6. 6 and 6. 7.See figure 1.5-16.

When the parameters 1. 10 and 1. 11, nominal voltage and nominal frequency ofthe motor, are set, parameters 6. 3 and 6. 4 are also set automatically to the samevalues. If you need different values for the field weakening point and the maximumoutput voltage, change these parameters after setting parameters 1. 10 and 1. 11.

6. 5 V/Hz curve, middle point frequency

If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, this parameterdefines the middle frequency point of the curve. See figure 1.5-16.

6. 6 V/Hz curve, middle point voltage

If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, this parameterdefines the middle voltage point of the curve. See figure 1.5-16.

6. 7 Output voltage at zero frequency

If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, thisparameter defines the zero frequency voltage of the curve. See figure 1.5-16.

6. 8 Overvoltage controller6. 9 Undervoltage controller

These parameters allow the over/undervoltage controllers to be switched ON or OFF.This may be useful in cases where the utility supply voltage varies more than -15%—+10% and the application requires a constant speed. If the controllers are ON, theywill change the motor speed in over/undervoltage cases. Overvoltage = faster,undervoltage = slower.

Over/undervoltage trips may occur when the controllers are not used.


(V/Hz)

(sensorless vector)

HV9000 Page 1-21

1


7. 1 Response to reference faults

0 = No response1 = Warning2 = Fault, stop mode after fault detection according to parameter 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop mode after fault detection

A warning or a fault action and message is generated if the 4—20 mA referencesignal is used and the signal falls below 4 mA.The information can also be programmed via digital output DO1 and via relayoutputs RO1 and RO2.

7. 2 Response to external fault

0 = No response1 = Warning2 = Fault, stop mode after fault detection according to parameter 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop mode after fault detection

A warning or a fault action and message is generated from the external fault signalin the digital input DIA3.

The information can also be programmed into digital output DO1 and into relayoutputs RO1 and RO2.

7. 3 Phase supervision of the motor

0 = No action2 = Fault

Phase supervision of the motor ensures that the motor phases have approximatelyequal current.

7. 4 Ground fault protection


Ground fault protection ensures that the sum of motor phase currents is zero. Thestandard overcurrent protection is always present and protects the drive from groundfaults with high current levels.




U[V]V

n

Parameter6.4





22 HV9000

17.5 Motor thermal protection

Operation:0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Trip

The motor thermal protection protects the motor from overheating. In theStandard application the thermal protection has fixed settings. In otherapplications it is possible to set the thermal protection parameters. A trip or awarning will give an indication on the display. If trip is selected, the drive will stopthe motor and generate a fault.

Deactivating the protection by setting the parameter to 0 will reset the internal thermalmodel to 0% heating.

1.5-17. If the motor current is over the curve the motor temperature is increasing.

CAUTION! The calculated model does not protect the motor if the cooling ofthe motor is reduced either by blocking the airflow or due to dustor dirt.

7. 6 Stall protection

Operation:0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Trip function

The Motor Stall protection provides a warning or a fault based on a short time overloadof the motor e.g. stalled shaft. The stall protection is faster than the motor thermalprotection. The stall state is defined with Stall Current and Stall Frequency. In theStandard application they both have fixed values. See figure 1.5-18. If the current ishigher than the set limit and output frequency is lower than the set limit the stallstate is true. If the stall lasts longer than 15 s a stall warning is given on the displaypanel. In the other applications it is possible to set the parameters of the Stallprotection function. Tripping and warning will give a display indication. If tripping isset on, the drive will stop and generate a fault.


100%×INmotor

45%×INmotor

IT

f

par. 1. 7

I

UMCH7_9035 Hz

Overload area

Currentlimit

The HV9000 is capable of providinghigher than nominal current to themotor. If the load requires this highcurrent there is a risk that motor willbe thermally overloaded. This istrue especially at low frequencies.With low frequencies the coolingeffect of the motor fan is reducedand the capacity of the motor isreduced. Motor thermal protectionis based on a calculated model andit uses the output current of thedrive to determine the load on themotor.

The thermal current IT specifiesthe load current above which themotor is overloaded. See figure

[Hz]

!

Figure 1.5-17 Motor thermal current IT curve.

HV9000 Page 1-23

1


8. 1 Automatic restart: number of tries8. 2 Automatic restart: trial time

The Automatic restart function will restart the drive after the following faults:

- overcurrent- overvoltage- undervoltage- over/under temperature of the drive- reference fault

Figure 1.5-19 Automatic restart.

Parameter 8. 1 determines how many automatic restarts can be made during thetrial time set by the parameter 8. 2.

The count time starts from the first autorestart. If the number of restarts does notexceed the value of the parameter 8.1 during the trial time, the count is cleared afterthe trial time has elapsed. The next fault starts the counting again.

Figure 1.5-18 Stall state.

f

I

130%×INmotor

25 Hz UMCH7_10

Stall area

4

3

2

1

t

UD012K25

Three faults Four faults

RUNSTOP

Number of faultsduring t = ttrial

ttrial ttrial

Par. 8. 1 = 3ttrial = Par. 8. 2

[Hz]

Deactivating the stall protection bysetting the parameter to 0 willreset the stall time counter to zero.

24 HV9000

1


Notes:

8. 3 Automatic restart, start function

The parameter defines the start mode:0 = Start with ramp1 = Flying start, see parameter 4. 6.

HV9000 Page 2-1Local/Remote Control Application

2

CONTENTS

2 Local/Remote Control Application ..2-1

2.1 General ........................................2-22.2 Control I/O....................................2-22.3 Control signal logic .......................2-32.4 Parameters Group 1 ....................2-4

2.4.1 Parameter table ..................2-42.4.2 Description of Group1 par ...2-5

2.5 Special parameters, Groups 2—8 .. 2-82.5.1 Parameter tables .................. 2-82.5.2 Description of Group 2 par. . 2-15

LOCAL/REMOTE CONTROL APPLICATION(par. 0.1 = 3)

2 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application

2


1 +10Vref Reference output Voltage for a potentiometer, etc.

2 Vin+ Analog input, Source B frequency referencevoltage (programmable) range 0—10 V DC


4 Iin+ Analog input, Source A frequency reference

5 Iin- current (programmable) range 0—20 mA



8 DIA1 Source A: Start forward Contact closed = start forward(programmable)

9 DIA2 Source A: Start reverse Contact closed = start reverse(Programmable)

10 DIA3 Fault reset Contact open = no action(programmable) Contact closed = fault reset




14 DIB4 Source B: Start forward Contact closed = start forward(programmable)

15 DIB5 Source B: Start reverse Contact closed = start reverse(programmable)

16 DIB6 Source A/B selection Contact open = source A is activeContact closed = source B is active



19 Iout- Analog output Range 0—20 mA/RL max. 500 Ω20 DO1 Digital output Programmable (par. 3. 6)


21 RO1 Relay output 1 Programmable (par. 3. 7)

22 RO1 RUN

23 RO1


25 RO2 FAULT

26 RO2

Local referencepotentiometer

READY

RUN

220VACMax.

FAULT

Remote reference0(4)—20 mA

Remote control24 V

Remote control ground

of parameter 0. 1 to 3.

Basic connections of inputs and outputs areshown in the figure 2.2-1. The control signallogic is shown in the figure 2.3-1. Programmingof I/O terminals is explained in chapter 2.5,Special parameters.

2.2 Control I/O

2.1 General

By utilizing the Local/Remote ControlApplication, the use of two different controland frequency reference sources isprogrammable. The active control source isselected with digital input DIB6.

The Local/Remote Control Application can beactivated from the Group 0 by setting the value

Figure 2.2-1 Default I/O configuration and connection example of the Local/Remote Control Application.


2

Figure 2.3-1 Control signal logic of the Local/Remote Control Application.Switch positions shown are based on the factory settings.


! !"

"!! "

#"! !"

$%&#

##%'##()'#*'+%)

##%'##()'#*'+%)

"$",! #

))(-)'.()'

))%&

))(#*

))/*

%'##*'+%)0#*#+)&1&%234

5#'%)%#+)5#*+2)#+)

)%2()'

%23%&#)6"/*#*+2)%2+'7#%'#

%23%&#)6"/*#*+2)%2+'7#%'#

%%&%)+%

&

%8)

#0

#"/9

#0

#"/9

:+);

+)<


2

2.4 Basic parameters, Group 12.4.1 Parameter table




1. 3 Acceleration time 1 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s Time from fmin (1. 1) to fmax (1. 2) 2-5


1. 5 Source A: reference 0—4 1 1 0 = Anal. voltage input (term. 2) 2-5signal 1 = Anal. current input (term. 4)

2 = Set reference from the panel3 = Signal from internal motor pot.4 = Signal from internal motor pot.reset if HV9000 is stopped

1. 6 Source B: reference 0—4 1 0 0 = Anal. voltage input (term. 2) 2-5signal 1 = Anal. current input (term. 4)

2 = Set reference from the panel3 = Signal from internal motor pot.4 = Signal from internal motor pot.reset if HV9000 unit is stopped

1. 7 Current limit 0.1—2.5 x InHV9 0.1 1.5 x InHV9 ***Output curr. limit [A] of the unit 2-5


1. 9 V/Hz optimization 0—1 1 0 0 = None 2-71 = Automatic torque boost





1. 13 Nominal current 2.5 x InHV9 0.1 A InHV9 In from the nameplate of 2-7of the motor the motor





1. 15 Parameter conceal 0—1 1 0 Visibility of the parameters: 2-70 = All parameter groups visible1 = Only group 1 is visible

1. 16 Parameter value lock 0—1 1 0 Disables parameter changes: 2-70 = Changes enabled1 = Changes disabled


Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only

when the drive is stopped.

* If 1. 2 > motor synchr. speed, check suitability for motorand drive system. Selecting 120 Hz/500 Hz range, seepage 2-5.

** Default value for a four pole motor and a nominalsize HV9000.*** Up to M10. Bigger classes case by case.

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


2


1. 1, 1. 2 Minimum / maximum frequency

Defines the frequency limits of the drive.

The default maximum value for parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 is 120 Hz. By setting thevalue of parameter 1. 2 to 120 Hz when the drive is stopped (RUN indicator not lit)parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 are changed to 500 Hz. At the same time the resolution ofthe panel reference is changed from 0.01 Hz to 0.1 Hz.

Changing the max. value from 500 Hz to 120 Hz is done by setting parameter 1. 2 to119 Hz while the drive is stopped.

1. 3, 1. 4 Acceleration time1, deceleration time 1:

These limits correspond to the time required for the output frequency toaccelerate from the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximumfrequency (par. 1. 2). Acceleration/deceleration times can be reduced with a freeanalog input signal, see parameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.

1. 5 Source A reference signal

0 Analog voltage reference from terminals 2—3, e.g. a potentiometer1 Analog current reference trom terminals 4—5, e.g. a transducer.2 Panel reference is the reference set from the Reference Page (REF),see

chapter 7.5 in the User's Manual.3 The reference value is controlled by digital input signals DIA2 and DIA3.

- switch in DIA2 closed = frequency reference increases- switch in DIA3 closed = frequency reference decreasesThe speed range for the reference change can be set with the parameter2.3.

4 Same as setting 3 but the reference value is set to the minimum frequency(par. 2. 14 or par. 1. 1 if par 2. 15 = 0) each time the drive is stopped. Whenthe value of parameter 1. 5 is set to 3 or 4, parameter 2. 1 is automaticallyset to 4 and parameter 2. 2 is automatically set to 10.

1. 6 Source B reference signal

See the values of the parameter 1. 5.

1. 7 Current limit

This parameter determines the maximum motor current that the HV9000 will provideshort term. Current limit can be set lower with a free analog input signal. Seeparameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.


Linear: The voltage of the motor changes linearly with the frequency inthe constant flux area from 0 Hz to the field weakening point

0 (par. 6. 3) where a constant voltage (nominal value) is supplied to themotor. See figure 2.4-1.

A linear V/Hz ratio should be used in constant torque applications.

This default setting should be used if there is no specialrequirement for another setting.


2


1 point (par. 6. 3) where the nominal maximum voltage is supplied tothe motor. See figure 2.4-1.

The motor runs undermagnetized below the field weakening pointand produces less torque and electromechanical noise. A squaredV/Hz ratio can be used in applications where the torque demand ofthe load is proportional to the square of the speed, e.g. in centrifugalfans and pumps.



Programm.The V/Hz curve can be programmed with three different points.V/Hz curve The parameters for programming are explained in chapter 2.5.2 2 Programmable V/Hz curve can be used if the standard settings

do not satisfy the needs of the application. See figure 2.4-2.





U[V]V

n

Parameter6.4



U [V]

Vn Default: Nominalvoltage of the motor


Linear

Squared


f [Hz]


2


Automatic The voltage to the motor changes automatically which allows thetorque motor to produce torque enough to start and run at low frequencies.boost The voltage increase depends on the motor type and horsepower.

Automatic torque boost can be used in applications where startingtorque due to starting friction is high, e.g. in conveyors.

NOTE! In high torque - low speed applications - it is likely the motor will overheat.If the motor has to run for a prolonged time under these conditions, specialattention must be paid to cooling of the motor. Use external cooling forthe motor if the temperature rise is too high.


Find this value Vn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the voltage at the field weakening point, parameter 6. 4, to 100%x Vnmotor.


Find the nominal frequency fn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the field weakening point, parameter 6. 3, to the same value.






Set parameter value according to the nominal voltage of the supply.Values are pre-defined for voltage codes 2, 4, 5, and 6. See table 2.4-1.



0 = all groups are visible1 = only group 1 is visible


Defines access for changing the parameter values:


If you have to adjust more of the functions of the Local/Remote Control Application, seechapter 2.5 to set up parameters of Groups 2—8.

!


2

2.5 Special parameters, Groups 2—8

2.5.1 Parameter tables, Group 2, Input signal parameters


DIA1 DIA2

2. 1 Source A Start/Stop 0—4 1 0 0 = Start forward Start reverse 2-15logic selection 1 = Start/Stop Reverse

2 = Start/Stop Run enable3 = Start pulse Stop pulse4 = Start forward Motor pot. UP


2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acc./dec. time selection5 = Reverse (if par. 2. 1 = 3)6 = Jog speed7 = Fault reset8 = Acc/dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command10 = Motor potentiometer DOWN

2. 3 Vin signal range 0—1 1 0 0 = 0—10 V 2-171 = Custom setting range

2. 4 Vin custom setting min. 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 2-17

2. 5 Vin custom setting max. 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 100.00% 2-17

2. 6 Vin signal inversion 0 — 1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 2-181 = Inverted

2. 7 Vin signal filter time 0.00 —10.00 s 0.01s 0.10s 0 = No filtering 2-18

2. 8 Iin signal range 0—2 1 0 0 = 0—20 mA 2-191 = 4—20 mA2 = Custom setting range

2. 9 Iin custom setting minim. 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 2-19

2. 10 Iin custom setting maxim. 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 100.00% 2-19

2. 11 Iin signal inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 2-191 = Inverted

2. 12 Iin signal filter time 0.01 —10.00 s 0.01s 0.10s 0 = No filtering 2-19

2. 13 Source B Start/Stop 0—3 1 0 DIB4 DIB5logic selection 0 = Start forward Start reverse 2-20

1 = Start/Stop Reverse2 = Start/Stop Run enable3 = Start pulse Stop pulse

2. 14 Source A reference 0—par. 2. 15 1 Hz 0 Hz Sets the frequency corresponding 2-20scaling minimum value to the min. reference signal

2. 15 Source A reference 0—fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz Sets the frequency corresponding 2-20scaling maximum value (1. 2) to the max. reference signal

0 = Scaling off>0 = Scaled maximum value

2. 16 Source B reference 0—par. 2. 17 1 Hz 0 Hz Sets the frequency corresponding 2-20scaling minimum value to the min. reference signal

2. 17 Source B reference 0—fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz Sets the frequency corresponding 2-20scaling maximum value (1. 2) to the max. reference signal

0 = Scaling off>0 = Scaled maximum value


STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


2


2. 18 Free analog input, 0—2 1 0 0 = Not uset 2-20signal selection 1 = Vin (analog voltage input)

2 = Iin (analog current input)

2. 19 Free analog input, 0—4 1 0 0 = No function 2-20function 1 = Reduces current limit (par. 1. 7)

2 = Reduces DC-braking current3 = Reduces acc. and decel. times4 = Reduces torque supervis. limit

2. 20 Motor potentiometer 0.1—2000.0 0.1 10.0 2-22ramp time Hz/s Hz/s Hz/s



3. 1 Analog output function 0—7 1 1 0 = Not used Scale 100% 2-221 = O/P frequency (0—fmax)2 = Motor speed (0—max. speed)3 = O/P current (0—2.0 x InHV9)4 = Motor torque (0—2 x TnMot)5 = Motor power (0—2 x PnMot)6 = Motor voltage (0—100% x VnMot)7 = DC-link volt. (0—1000 V)

3. 2 Analog output filter time 0.00—10.00 s 0.01 s 100 s 2-22




3. 6 Digital output function 0—21 1 1 0 = Not used 2-231 = Ready2 = Run3 = Fault4 = Fault inverted5 = HV9000 overheat warning6 = External fault or warning7= Reference fault or warning8 = Warning9 = Reversed10 = Jog speed selected11 = At speed12 = Motor regulator activated13 = Output frequency limit

superv. 114 = Output frequency limit

superv. 215 = Torque limit supervision16 = Reference limit supervision17 = External brake control18 = Control from I/O terminals19 = Drive temperature limit super-

vision20 = Unrequested rotation direction21 = External brake control

inverted


STOPO

STOPO


2




3. 9 Output freq. limit 1 0—2 1 0 0 = No 2-24supervision function 1 = Low limit

2 = High limit

3. 10 Output freq. limit 1 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 2-24supervision value (par. 1. 2)


2 = High limit


3. 13 Torque limit 0—2 1 0 0 = No 2-24supervision function 1 = Low limit

2 = High limit

3. 14 Torque limit 0.0—200.0% 0.1% 100.0% 2-24supervision value x TnHV9

3. 15 Active reference limit 0—2 1 0 0 = No 2-24supervision 1 = Low limit

2 = High limit

3. 16 Active reference limit 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 2-24supervision value (par. 1. 2)

3. 17 External brake OFF delay 0.0—100.0 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 2-25

3. 18 External brake ON delay 0.0—100.0 s 0.1 s 1.5 s 2-25

3. 19 Drive 0—2 1 0 0 = No supervision 2-25temperature limit 1 = Low limitsupervision function 2 = High limit

3. 20 Drive -10—+75°C 1 +40°C 2-25temperature limit

3. 21 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—7 1 3 See parameter 3. 1 2-22analog output function

3. 22 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0.00—10.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s See parameter 3. 2 2-22analog output filter time

3. 23 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—1 1 0 See parameter 3. 3 2-22analog output inversion

3. 24 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—1 1 0 See parameter 3. 4 2-22analog output minimum

3. 25 I/O-expander board (opt.) 10—1000% 1 100% See parameter 3. 5 2-22analog output scale


STOPO

STOPO


2










4. 8 DC-braking current 0.15—1.5 0.1 0.5 x 2-27InHV9 (A) InHV9

4. 9 DC-braking time at Stop 0.00—250.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off at Stop 2-27

4. 10 Turn on frequency of DC- 0.1—10.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 1.5 Hz 2-28brake during ramp Stop

4. 11 DC-brake time at Start 0.00—25.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off at Start 2-28

4. 12 Jog speed reference fmin —fmax 0.1 Hz 10.0 Hz 2-29

Group 5, Prohibit frequency parameters


5. 1 Prohibit frequency fmin— 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 2-29range 1 low limit par. 5. 2

5. 2 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = Prohibit range 1 is off 2-29range 1 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)






STOPO


2




6. 2 Switching frequency 1.0—16.0 kHz 0.1 kHz 10/3.6 kHz Depends on Hp rating 2-29


6. 4 Voltage at field 15—200% 1% 100% 2-29weakening point x Vnmot

6. 5 V/Hz-curve mid 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 2-30point frequency

6. 6 V/Hz-curve mid 0.00—100.00 % 0.01% 0.00% Parameter maximum value = 2-30point voltage x Vnmot param. 6.4

6. 7 Output voltage at 0.00—100.00 % 0.01% 0.00% 2-30zero frequency x Vnmot

6. 8 Overvoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is not operating 2-301 = Controller is operating

6. 9 Undervoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is not operating 2-301 = Controller is operating


STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


2




2 = Fault, stop according to par. 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop






7. 6 Motor thermal protection 50.0—150.0% 1.0% 100.0% 2-32break point current x InMOTOR

7. 7 Motor thermal protection 5.0—150.0% 1.0% 45.0% 2-32zero frequency current x InMOTOR

7. 8 Motor thermal protection 0.5—300.0 0.5 17.0 Default value is set according 2-33time constant minutes min. min. to motor nominal current

7. 9 Motor thermal protection 10—500 Hz 1 Hz 35 Hz 2-33break point frequency


7. 11 Stall current limit 5.0—200.0% 1.0% 130.0% 2-34x InMOTOR

7. 12 Stall time 2.0—120.0 s 1.0 s 15.0 s 2-34

7. 13 Maximum stall frequency 1—fmax 1 Hz 25 Hz 2-34

7. 14 Underload protection 0—2 1 0 0 = No action 2-351 = Warning2 = Fault

7. 15 Underload prot., field 10.0—150.0% 1.0% 50.0% 2-35weakening area load x TnMOTOR

7. 16 Underload protection, 5.0—150.0% 1.0% 10.0% 2-35zero frequency load x TnMOTOR

7. 17 Underload time 2.0—600.0 s 1.0 s 20.0s 2-36


2

Group 8, Autorestart parameters


8. 1 Automatic restart: 0—10 1 0 0 = Not in use 2-36number of tries

8. 2 Automatic restart: multi 1—6000 s 1 s 30 s 2-36attempt maximum trial time


8. 4 Automatic restart of 0—1 1 0 0 = No 2-37undervoltage 1 = Yes

8. 5 Automatic restart of 0—1 1 0 0 = No 2-37overvoltage 1 = Yes

8. 6 Automatic restart of 0—1 1 0 0 = No 2-37overcurrent 1 = Yes

8. 7 Automatic restart of 0—1 1 0 0 = No 2-37reference fault 1 = Yes

8. 8 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 2-37over/undertemperature 1 = Yesfault



2

2.5.2 Description of Groups 2—8 parameters


0: DIA1: closed contact = start forwardDIA2: closed contact = start reverse,See figure 2.5-1.





1: DIA1: closed contact = start open contact = stopDIA2: closed contact = reverse open contact = forwardSee figure 2.5-2.


DIA1

DIA2

1 2 3

t

UD009K09

Output frequency


FWD

REV

DIA1

DIA2

t

UD012K10

Output frequency


FWD

REV


2

Figure 2.5-3 Start pulse /Stop pulse.

2. 2 DIA3 function

1: External fault, closing contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the contact is closed

2: External fault, opening contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the input is open




6: Jog freq. contact closed = Jog frequency selected for freq. refer.

7: Fault reset contact closed = Resets all faults

8: Acc./Dec. operation prohibitedcontact closed = Stops acceleration and deceleration until

the contact is opened

9: DC-braking commandcontact closed = In the stop mode, the DC-braking operates

until the contact is opened, see figure 2.5-4. Dc-brake current is set with parameter 4. 8.

10: Motor pot. meter down contact closed = Reference decreases until the contact is

opened

t

min 50 ms

UD009K11

FWD

REV

Output frequency



DIA1Start

DIA2Stop




4: DIA1: closed contact = start forwardDIA2: closed contact = reference increases (motor potentiometer

reference, par. 2. 1 is automatically set to 4 ifpar. 1. 5 is set to 3 or 4).


2

Figure 2.5-4 DIA3 as DC-brake command input: a) Stop-mode = Ramp,b) Stop-mode = Coasting.

2. 3 Vin signal range

0 = Signal range 0—10 V1 = Custom setting range from custom minimum (par. 2. 4) to custom maximum (par. 2. 5)

2.4-2.5 Vin custom setting minimum/maximum

With these parameters you can set Vin for any input signal span within 0—10 V.

Minimum setting: Set the Vin signal to its minimum level, select parameter 2. 4,press the Enter button

Maximum setting: Set the Vin signal to its maximun level, select parameter 2. 5,press the Enter button

Note! The parameter values can only be set with this procedure (not with arrow up/arrowdown buttons).

t

UD009K32

Param. 4. 10

DIA3

t

UD009K32

DIA3

RUNSTOP

Output frequency

DIA3 as DC-brake command input and stop-mode = Ramp

DIA3 as DC-brake command input and stop-mode = Coasting


2

2. 6 Vin signal inversion

Vin is source B frequencyreference, par. 1. 6 = 1 (default)

Parameter 2. 6 = 0, no inversionof analog Vin signal.

%

100%

63%

Par. 2. 7

t [s]

UD009K15

Filtered signal

Unfiltered signal

10 V0 Param. 2.4Ch012K46

Outputfrequency

Vin(term. 2)

Vin = custom

Vin = 0—10 V

Parameter2.16

Parameter2.17

Parameter 2.3 =0

Parameter 2.3=1

Param. 2.5

Figure 2.5-5 Vin no signal inversion.

Parameter 2. 6 = 1, inversion ofanalog Vin signalmax. Vin signal = minimum setspeedmin. Vin signal = maximum setspeed

Figure 2.5-6 Vin signal inversion.

2. 7 Vin signal filter time

Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Vin signal.A long filtering time makes driveresponse slower. See figure 2.5-7.

Figure 2.5-7 Vin signal filtering

Par. 2.17

Par. 2.16

Par. 2.4 Par. 2.5 10V

Par. 2.3=0Vin = 0-10 V

UD12K47

Output frequency

VinTerm. 2

Par. 2.3 = 1Vin = custom


2

2. 8 Analog input Iin signal range

0 = 0—20 mA1 = 4—20 mA2 = Custom signal span

See figure 2.5-8.

2. 9 Analog input Iin custom2. 10 setting minimum/maximum

With these parameters you canscale the input current tocorrespond to a minimum andmaximum frequency range. Seefigure 2.5-8.

Minimum setting:Set the Iin signal to its minimumlevel, select parameter 2. 9,press the Enter buttonMaximum setting:Set the Iin signal to its maximunlevel, select parameter 2. 10,press the Enter button

Note! The parameter values canonly be set with this procedure(not with arrow up/arrow downbuttons).

2. 11 Analog input Iin inversion

Iin is source A frequency reference,par. 1. 5 = 0 (default)

Parameter 2. 11 = 0, no inversionof Iin inputParameter 2. 11 = 1, inversion ofIin input. See figure 2.5-9.

max. Iin signal = minimum setspeed

min. Iin signal = maximum setspeed

2. 12 Analog input Iin filter time

Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Iin signal. A longfiltering time makes driveresponse slower.See figure 2.5-10.

20 mA0

par. 2. 14

par. 2. 15

par. 2. 9 par. 2. 10

par. 2. 8 = 1Iin = 4—20 mA

4 mA

par. 2. 8 = 0Iin = 0—20 mA

UD009K28

Outputfrequency

Uin(term. 3,4)

par. 2. 8 = 2Iin = custom

20 mA0

par. 2. 14

par. 2. 15

par. 2. 9 par. 2. 10

par. 2. 8 = 1Iin = 4—20 mA

4 mA

par. 2. 8 = 0Iin = 0—20 mA

UD009K29

Outputfrequency

Uin(term. 3,4)


%

100%

63%

Par. 2. 12

t [s]

UD009K30

Filtered signal

Unfiltered signal

Figure 2.5-8 Analog input Iinscaling.

Figure 2.5-9 Iin signal inversion.

Figure 2.5-10 Analog input Iin filter time.

Iin[term.3,4]

Iin[term.3,4]


2

2. 13 Source B Start/Stop logic selectionSee parameter 2. 1, settings 0—3.

2. 14, Source A reference scaling, minimum value/maximum value2. 15 Setting limits: 0 < par. 2. 14 < par. 2. 15 < par. 1. 2.

If par. 2. 15 = 0 scaling is set off. See figures 2.5-11 and 2.5-12.

(In the figures below voltage input Vin with signal range 0—10 V selected for source Areference)

Figure 2.5-11 Reference scaling. Figure 2.5-12 Reference scaling,par. 2. 15 = 0.

2. 16, Source B reference scaling,2. 17 minimum value/maximum value

See parameters 2.14 and 2. 15.

2. 18 Free analog input signal

Selection of input signal of a free analog input (an input not used for reference signal):

0 = Not in use1 = Voltage signal Vin2 = Current signal Iin

2. 19 Free analog input signalfunction

Use this parameter to select afunction for a free analog inputsignal:

0 = Function is not used1 = Reducing motor

current limit (par. 1. 7)

This signal will adjust themaximum motor current between0 and ,par. 1. 7 set max. limit. Seefigure 2.5-13.

100

par. 2. 4

par. 2. 5

Ch012K12

Outputfrequency

Analoginput [V]

Max freq. par 1. 2

Min freq. par 1. 1

100 Ch012K13

Outputfrequency

Analoginput [V]

Max freq. par 1. 2

Min freq. par 1. 1

100%Par. 1. 7

UD012K61

Torque limit

Analoginput

Signal range0 V0 mA4 mACustom

10 V20 mA20 mACustom

Figure 2.5-13 Scaling of max. motor current.


2

0

100%Par. 3. 14

UD012K60

Torque limit

Free analog input

Signal range

2 = Reducing DC brakecurrent.

The DC braking current can bereduced with the free analog inputsignal between current 0.15 x InHV9and the current set by parameter4. 8. See figure 2.5-14.

0

100%Par. 4. 8

0,15 x InFU

UD012K58

DC-brakingcurrent

Free analoginput

Signal range

10

1

Ch012K59

2

Factor R

Free analoginput

Signal range

0.15 x InHV9

Figure 2.5-14 Reducing DC brake current.

Figure 2.5-15 Reducing acceleration anddeceleration times.

Figure 2.5-16 Reducing torque supervision limit

3 = Reducing accelerationand decelerationtimes.

The acceleration and decelerationtimes can be reduced with the freeanalog input signal according tothe following formulas:

Reduced time = set acc./deceler.time (par. 1. 3, 1. 4; 4. 3,4. 4) divided by the factor R fromfigure 2.5-15.

4 = Reducing torquesupervision limit.

Torque supervision limit can bereduced with a free analog inputsignal between 0 and the setsupervision limit (par. 3. 14). Seefigure 2.5-16.


2

2. 20 Motor potentiometer ramptime

Defines how fast the electronicmotor potentiometer valuechanges.

3. 1 Analog output Content

See table for parameter 3.1 onpage 2-9.

%

100%

63%

Par. 3. 2

t [s]

UD009K16

Filtered signal

Unfiltered signal

1.00

20 mA

4 mA

10 mA

0.50 mA

Param. 3. 5= 200%

Param. 3. 5= 100%

Param. 3. 5= 50%

12 mA

Ch012K17

Analogoutputcurrent







Inverts analog output signal:max. output signal = minimumset valuemin. output signal = maximumset value


Defines the signal minimum tobe either 0 mA or 4 mA.See figure 2.5-19.




Output fre- Max. frequency (p. 1. 2)quencyMotor speed Max. speed (nnxfmax/fn)Output 2 x InHV9currentMotor torque 2 x TnMotMotor power 2 x PnMotMotor voltage 100% x VnMot

DC-link volt. 1000 V

1.00

20 mA

4 mA

10 mA

0.50 mA

Param. 3. 5= 200%

Param. 3. 5= 100%

Param. 3. 5= 50%

Par. 3. 4 = 1

Par. 3. 4 = 0

Ch012K18

12 mA

Analogoutputcurrent




2

3. 6 Digital output function3. 7 Relay output 1 function3. 8 Relay output 2 function




1 = Ready The drive is ready to operate2 = Run The drive operates (motor is running)3 = Fault A fault trip has occurred4 = Fault inverted A fault trip has not occurred5 = HV9000 overheat warning The heat-sink temperature exceeds +70°C6 = External fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 27 = Reference fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 1

- if analog reference is 4—20 mA and signal is <4mA8 = Warning Always if a warning exists9 = Reversed The reverse command has been selected10= Jog speed Jog speed has been selected with digital input11 = At speed The output frequency has reached the set reference12= Motor regulator activated Overvoltage or overcurrent regulator was activated13= Output frequency supervision 1 The output frequency goes outside of the set supervision

Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 9 and 3. 10)14 = Output frequency supervision 2 The output frequency goes outside of the set supervision

Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 11 and 3. 12)15 = Torque limit supervision The motor torque goes outside of the set supervision

Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 13 and 3. 14)16 = Active reference Active reference goes outside of the set supervision

limit supervision Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 15 and 3. 16)17= External brake control External brake ON/OFF control with programmable

delay (par 3. 17 and 3. 18)18= Control from I/O terminals External control mode selected with prog. pushbutton #219= Drive Temperature on drive is outside the set

temperature limit supervision supervision limits (par. 3. 19 and 3. 20)20= Unrequested rotation direction Rotation direction of the motor shaft is different from the

requested one21= External brake control inverted External brake ON/OFF control (par. 3.17 and 3.18),

output active when brake control is OFF



2

3. 9 Output frequency limit 1, supervision function3. 11 Output frequency limit 2, supervision function


If the output frequency goes under/over the set limit (3. 10, 3. 12) this functiongenerates a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1or RO2 depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8.

3. 10 Output frequency limit 1, supervision value3. 12 Output frequency limit 2, supervision value

The frequency value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 9 (3. 11). See figure2.5-20.

3. 13 Torque limit , supervisionfunction


If the calculated torque value goesunder/over the set limit (3.14) thisfunction generates a warningmessage via the digital outputDO1 or via a relay output RO1 orRO2 depending on the settings ofthe parameters 3. 6—3. 8.

Par 3. 10

f[Hz]

t

21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1

21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1

21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1

UD012K19

Par 3. 9 = 2

Example:

3. 14 Torque limit , supervision value

The calculated torque value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 13. Torquesupervision value can be reduced below the setpoint with a free analog input signal,see parameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.

3. 15 Reference limit , supervision function


If the reference value goes under/over the set limit (3. 16) this function generates awarning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1 or RO2depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8. The supervised referenceis the current active reference. It can be source A or B reference depending on DIB6input or panel reference if panel is the active control source.

3. 16 Reference limit , supervision value

The frequency value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 15.



2

3. 17 External brake-off delay3. 18 External brake-on delay

The function of the external brake can be delayed from the start and stop controlsignals with these parameters. See figure 2.5-21.

t

a)

t

b)

UD012K45

DIA1: RUN FWD

STOP

External

BRAKE: OFF

ONDigital orrelay output

DIA2: RUN REV

STOP

DIA1: START

PULSE

External

BRAKE: OFF


DIA2: STOP

PULSE

tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18

tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18

Figure 2.5-21 Ext. brake control: a) Start/Stop logic selection par 2. 1 = 0, 1 or 2b) Start/Stop logic selection par 2. 1 = 3.

The brake control signal can be programmed via the digital output DO1 or viaone of the relay outputs RO1 and RO2, see parameters 3. 6—3. 8.

3. 19 Drive temperature limit supervision


If temperature of the unit goes under/over the set limit (par. 3. 20) this functiongenerates a warning message via the digital output DO1 and via a relay output RO1or RO2 depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8.

3. 20 Drive temperature supervision limit value

The set temperature value to be supervised with the parameter 3. 19.


2



Setting the value = 0 gives you a linear ramp shape. The output frequency immediatelyfollows the input with a ramp time set by parameters 1. 3, 1. 4 (4. 3, 4. 4 for Acc/Dectime 2).

[Hz]

[t]

4. 1 (4. 2)

4. 1 (4. 2)

UD009K20

1. 3, 1. 4(4. 3, 4. 4)


These values correspond to the time required for the output frequency to acceleratefrom the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency (par. 1.2). With this parameter it is possible to set two different acceleration/decelerationtimes for one application. The active set can be selected with the programmablesignal DIA3. See parameter 2. 2. Acceleration/deceleration times can be reducedwith a free analog input signal. See parameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.

4. 5 Brake chopper


When the drive is decelerating the motor, the energy stored in the inertia of the motorand the load is fed into the external brake resistor. If the brake resistor is selectedcorrectly the drive is able to decelerate the load with a torque equal to that ofacceleration. See the separate Brake resistor installation manual.

4. 6 Start function

Ramp:

0 The drive starts from 0 Hz and accelerates to the set reference frequency withinthe set acceleration time. (Load inertia or starting friction may cause prolongedacceleration times).

Setting 0.1—10 seconds for 4. 1(4. 2) causes an S-shaped ramp.The speed changes are smooth.Parameter 1. 3/ 1. 4 (4. 3/ 4. 4)determines the ramp time of theacceleration/deceleration in themiddle of the curve. See figure2.5-22.

f



2

Flying start:



4. 7 Stop function

Coasting:0 The motor coasts to an uncontrolled stop with the HV9000 off, after the Stop

command.

Ramp:1 After the Stop command, the speed of the motor is decelerated based on

the deceleration ramp time parameter.

If the regenerated energy is high, it may be necessary to use an externalbraking resistor for faster deceleration.


Defines the current injected into the motor during DC braking.The DC braking current can be reduced from the setpoint with a external freeanalog input signal, see parameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.




>0 DC-brake is in use and its function depends of the stop function,(parameter 4. 7), The time is set by the value of parameter 4. 9:




The braking time is scaled according to the frequency when the DC- brakingstarts. If the frequency is > nominal frequency of the motor (par. 1.11), the valueof parameter 4.9 determines the braking time. When the frequency is < 10%of the nominal, the braking time is 10% of the set value of parameter 4.9. Seefigure 2.5-13.


After a Stop command, the speed of the motor is reduced based on thedeceleration ramp parameter. If no regeneration occurs due to load inertia DC-braking starts at a speed defined by parameter 4. 10.


2

fn fn

t t

t = 1 x par. 4. 9 t = 0,1 x par. 4. 9

UD012K21

0,1 x fn

RUN

STOP

RUN

STOP

Output frequency

Motor speed

Output frequency

Motor speed

DC-braking ON

DC-braking ON

fout fout

The braking time is definedby par. 4. 9. If the load has ahigh inertia, use an externalbraking resistor for fasterdeceleration.See figure 2.5-24.

4. 10 Execute frequency of DC-brake during ramp Stop

See figure 2.5-24.

4. 11 DC-brake time at start


>0 The DC-brake is activatedby the start commandgiven. This parameterdefines the time before thebrake is released. After thebrake is released the outputfrequency increasesaccording to the set startfunction parameter 4. 6and the accelerationparameters (1. 3, 4. 1 or 4.2, 4. 3). See figure 2.5-25.

t = Par. 4. 9

t

Par. 4. 10

UD012K23

Motor speed

Output frequency

DC-braking

RUNSTOP

fout

t

UD012K22

Par 4. 11

RUNSTOP

Output frequency

Figure 2.5-23 DC-braking time when par. 4. 7 = 0.

[Hz] [Hz]

[Hz]

fout

[Hz]

Figure 2.5-24 DC-braking time when par. 4. 7= 1.

Figure 2.5-25 DC-braking timeat start.


2

4. 12 Jog speed reference

This parameter value defines the jog speed if the DIA3 digital input is programmedfor Jog and is selected. See parameter 2. 2.

5. 1- 5.6 Prohibit frequency areaLow limit/High limit

In some systems it may benecessary to avoid certainfrequencies because ofmechanical resonanceproblems.

With these parameters it ispossible to set limits for three "skipfrequency" regions between 0 Hzand 500 Hz. The accuracy of thesetting is 0.1 Hz. See figure 2.5-26 frequency

reference

5. 1 5. 25. 3 5. 45. 5 5. 6

UD012K33

Reference [Hz]

Outputfrequency [Hz]

6. 1 Motor control mode

0 = Frequency control: The I/O terminal and panel references are frequencyreferences and the drive controls the output frequency(output freq. resolution 0.01 Hz)

1 = Speed control: The I/O terminal and panel references are speedreferences and the drive controls the motor speed (controlaccuracy ± 0.5%).



Before changing the frequency from the factory default 10 kHz (3.6 kHz >40 Hp) checkthe drive derating in the curves shown in figures 5.2-2 and 5.2-3 in chapter 5.2 of theUser's Manual.


The field weakening point is the output frequency where the output voltage reachesthe set maximum value (parameter 6. 4). Above that frequency the output voltageremains constant at the set maximum value. Below that frequency the output voltagedepends on the setting of the V/Hz curve parameters 1. 8, 1. 9, 6. 5, 6. 6 and 6. 7.See figure 1.5-16.

When the parameters 1. 10 and 1. 11, nominal voltage and nominal frequency of themotor, are set, parameters 6. 3 and 6. 4 are also set automatically to the same values.If you need different values for the field weakening point and the maximum outputvoltage, change these parameters after setting parameters 1. 10 and 1. 11.


(V/Hz)

(sensorless vector)


2


If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, this parameterdefines the middle frequency point of the curve. See figure 2.5-27.


If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, this parameterdefines the middle point voltage (% of motor nominal voltage) of the curve. See figure2.5-27.


If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, this parameterdefines the zero frequency voltage (% of motor nominal voltage) of the curve. Seefigure 2.5-27.



Over/undervoltage trips may occur when controllers are not used.

7. 1 Response to the reference fault

0 = No response1 = Warning2 = Fault, stop mode after fault according to parameter 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop mode after fault detection

A warning or a fault action and message is generated if the 4—20 mA referencesignal is used and the signal falls below 4 mA. The information can also beprogrammed via digital output DO1 and via relay outputs RO1 and RO2.





U[V]Vn

Parameter6.4





2


0 = No response1 = Warning2 = Fault, stop mode after fault according to parameter 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop mode after fault detection

A warning or a fault action and message is generated from the external fault signalon digital input DIA3. The information can also be programmed into digital outputDO1 and into relayoutputs RO1 and RO2.





0 = No action2 = Fault message

Ground fault protection ensures that the sum of the motor phase currents is zero.The standard overcurrent protection is always present and protects the frequencyconverter from ground faults with high current levels.

Parameters 7. 5—7. 9 Motor thermal protection

General

Motor thermal protection protects the motor from overheating. The HV9000 drive iscapable of supplying higher than nominal current to the motor. If the load requiresthis high current there is a risk that motor will be thermally overloaded. This is trueespecially at low frequencies. With low frequencies the cooling effect of the motorfan is reduced and the capacity of the motor is reduced. If the motor is equippedwith a separately powered external fan, the load derating at low speed is small.

Motor thermal protection is based on a calculated model and it uses the output cur-rent of the drive to determine the load on the motor. When the motor is poweredfrom the drive, the calculated model uses the heatsink temperature to determinethe initial thermal state of the motor. The calculated model assumes that the ambi-ent temperature of the motor is 40°C.

Motor thermal protection can be adjusted by setting several parameters. The thermalcurrent IT specifies the load current above which the motor is overloaded. This cur-rent level is a function of the output frequency. The curve for IT is set with param-eters 7. 6, 7. 7 and 7. 9. See figure 2.5-28. The default values of these parametersare set from the motor nameplate data.

With the output current at IT the thermal state will reach the nominal value (100%).The thermal state changes by the square of the current. With output current at 75%of IT the thermal state will reach 56% and with output current at 120% of IT the thermalstage would reach 144%. The function will trip the drive (refer par. 7. 5) if the thermalstate reaches a value of 105%. The response time of the thermal model is deter-mined by the time constant parameter 7. 8. The larger the motor, the longer it takesto reach the final temperature.


2

7. 5 Motor thermal protection

Operation:0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Trip function

Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is selected the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.

Deactivating the protection by setting this parameter to 0, will reset the thermal stageof the motor to 0%.

7. 6 Motor thermal protection, break point current

This current can be set between 50.0—150.0% x InMotor.This parameter sets the value for thermal current at frequencies above the breakpoint on the thermal current curve. Refer to the figure 2.5-28.

The value is set as a percentage of the motor nameplate nominal current , parameter1. 13, not the drive's nominal output current.

The motor's nominal current is the current which the motor can withstand in directonline use without being overheated.

If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted, this parameter is automatically restored to the defaultvalue.

7. 7 Motor thermal protection, zero frequency current

This current can be set between 10.0—150.0% x InMotor.This parameter sets the value for thermal current at zero frequency. Refer to thefigure 2.5-28.

The default value is set assuming that there is no external fan cooling the motor. Ifan external fan is used this parameter can be set to 90% (or higher).

Par. 7. 6

Par. 7. 7

IT

f

par. 1. 7

I

UMCH7_91Par. 7. 9

Overload area

Currentlimit

[Hz]

!

The thermal state of the motor can be monitored through the display. Refer to thetable for monitoring items. (User's Manual, table 7.3-1).

CAUTION! The calculated model does not protect the motor if the cooling ofthe motor is reduced either by blocking the airflow or due to dust ordirt.

Setting this parameter (orparameter 1. 13) does not affectthe maximum output current of thedrive. Parameter 1. 7 alonedetermines the maximum outputcurrent of the drive.

Figure 2.5-28 Motor thermal current, IT

curve.


2

The value is set as a percentage of the motor's nominal nameplate current,parameter 1. 13, not the drive's nominal output current. The motor's nominal currentis the current which the motor can stand in direct on-line use without beingoverheated.

If you change parameter 1. 13, this parameter is automatically restored to the defaultvalue.

Setting this parameter (or parameter 1. 13) does not affect to the maximum outputcurrent of the drive. Parameter 1. 7 alone determines the maximum output currentof the drive.

7. 8 Motor thermal protection, time constant

This time can be set between 0.5—300 minutes.This is the thermal time constant of the motor. The larger the motor the greaterthe time constant. The time constant is defined as the time that it takes the calcu-lated thermal stage to reach 63% of its final value.

The motor thermal time is specific to a motor design and it varies between differentmotor manufacturers.

The default value for the time constant is calculated based on the motornameplate data from parameters 1. 12 and 1. 13. If either of these parameters isreset, then this parameter is set to default value.

If the motor's t6 -time is known (given by the motor manufacturer) the timeconstant parameter could be set based on t6 -time. As a rule of thumb, the motorthermal time constant in minutes equals to 2xt6 (t6 in seconds is the time a motorcan safely operate at six times the rated current). If the drive is stopped the timeconstant is internally increased to three times the set parameter value. Cooling inthe stop stage is based on convection with an increased time constant

7. 9 Motor thermal protection, break point frequency

This frequency can be set between 10—500 Hz.This is the frequency break point of the thermal current curve. With frequenciesabove this point the thermal capacity of the motor is assumed to be constant.Refer to the figure 2.5-28.

The default value is based on the motor's nameplate data, parameter 1. 11. It is 35Hz for a 50 Hz motor and 42 Hz for a 60 Hz motor. More generally it is 70% of thefrequency at the field weakening point (parameter 6. 3). Changing either parameter1. 11 or 6. 3, will restore this parameter to its default value.

Figure 2.5-29 Calculating motor temperature.

105%

par. 7. 5

Θ = (I/IT)2 x (1-e-t/T)

I/IT

UMCH7_92

Trip area

Motor temperature

TimeMotor temperature

Time constant T*)

*) Changed with motor size and adjusted with parameter 7. 8

Trip/warningMotorcurrent


2

Parameters 7. 10— 7. 13, Stall protectionGeneral

Motor stall protection protects the motor from short time overload situations like astalled shaft. The reaction time of stall protection can be set shorter than with motorthermal protection. The stall state is defined with two parameters, 7.11, Stall Currentand 7.13., Stall Frequency. If the current is higher than the set limit and outputfrequency is lower than the set limit the stall state is true. There is no true detectionof shaft rotation. Stall protection is a type of overcurrent protection.


Operation:

0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Trip function

Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is set on, the drive will stop and generate a fault. Deactivating the stallprotection by setting the parameter to 0 will reset the stall time counter to zero.

7. 11 Stall current limit

The current can be set between0.0—200% x InMotor.

In a stall the current has to beabove this limit. See figure 2.5-30. The value is set as apercentage of the motor name-plate nominal current, parameter1. 13. If parameter 1. 13 isadjusted, this parameter isautomatically restored to itsdefault value.

Par. 7. 12

UMCH7_12

Trip area

Time

Stall time counter

StallNo stall

Trip/warningpar. 7. 10

f

I

Par. 7. 11

Par. 7. 13 UMCH7_11

Stall area

7. 12 Stall time

The time can be set between2.0—120 s.This is the maximum allowedtime for a stall. There is aninternal up/down counter tocount the stall time. See figure2.5-31. If the stall time countervalue goes above this limit, thisprotection will cause a trip (referto the parameter 7. 10).

7. 13 Maximum stall frequency

This frequency can be setbetween 1—fmax (param. 1. 2). Inthe stall state the ouput frequencyhas to be smaller than this limit.See figure 2.5-30. Figure 2.5-31 Counting the stall time.

[Hz]

Figure 2.5-30 Setting the stall characteristics.


2

Parameters 7. 14— 7. 17, Underload protectionGeneral

The purpose of motor underload protection is to ensure there is a load on the motorwhile the drive is running. If the motor load is reduced, there might be a problem inthe process, e.g. broken belt or dry pump.

Motor underload protection can be adjusted by setting the underload curve withparameters 7. 15 and 7. 16. The underload curve is a squared curve set betweenzero frequency and the field weakening point. The protection is not active below5Hz (the underload counter value is stopped). See figure 2.5-32.

The torque values for setting the underload curve are set with percentage valueswhich refer to the nominal torque of the motor. The motor's nameplate data,parameter 1.13, the motor's nominal current and the drive's nominal current ICTare used to create the scaling ratio for the internal torque value. If other than astandard motor is used with the drive, the accuracy of the torque calculation isdecreased.

7. 14 Underload protection

Operation:

0 = Not in use1 = Warning message2 = Fault message

Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is set active the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.

Deactivating the protection, by setting this parameter to 0, will reset the underloadtime counter to zero.

7. 15 Underload protection, field weakening area load

The torque limit can be setbetween 20.0—150 % x TnMotor.

This parameter is the value forthe minimum allowed torquewhen the output frequency isabove the field weakening point.Refer to the figure 2.5-32.If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted,this parameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value.

7. 16 Underload protection, zerofrequency load

The torque limit can be set between 10.0—150 % x TnMotor.

This parameter is the value for the minimum allowed torque with zero frequency.See figure 2.5-32. If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted, this parameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value.

Par. 7. 15

ChCH7_15

Par. 7. 16

f5 Hz

Underload area

Torque

Field weakeningpoint par. 6. 3

f [Hz]

Figure 2.5-32 Setting of minimum load.


2

7. 17 Underload time

This time can be set between 2.0—600.0 s.

This is the maximum allowed timefor an underload state. There is aninternal up/down counter toaccumulate the underload time.See figure 2.5-33.If the underload counter valuegoes above this limit, theunderload protection will cause atrip (refer to the parameter 7. 14).If the drive is stopped theunderload counter is reset to zero.

Par. 7. 17

UMCH7_17

Trip area

Time

Underload time counter

Underl.No underl.



The Automatic restart function restarts the drive after the faults selected withparameters 8. 4—8. 8. The Start type for Automatic restart is selected with parameter8. 3. See figure 2.5-34.

Figure 2.5-33 Counting the underload time.

4

3

2

1


RUNSTOP

ttrial

ttrial

Par. 8. 1 = 3ttrial = par. 8. 2

t




The count time starts from the first autorestart. If the number of restarts does notexceed the value of parameter 8.1 during the trial time, the count is cleared after thetrial time has elapsed. The next fault starts the counting again.


2


The parameter defines the start mode:

0 = Start with ramp1 = Flying start, see parameter 4. 6.

8. 4 Automatic restart after undervoltage

0 = No automatic restart after undervoltage fault1 = Automatic restart after undervoltage fault condition returns to normal. (DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)

8. 5 Automatic restart after overvoltage

0 = No automatic restart after overvoltage fault1 = Automatic restart after overvoltage fault condition returns to normal (DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)

8. 6 Automatic restart after overcurrent

0 = No automatic restart after overcurrent fault1 = Automatic restart after overcurrent faults

8. 7 Automatic restart after reference fault

0 = No automatic restart after reference fault1 = Automatic restart after analog current reference signal (4—20 mA) returns to the normal level (>4 mA)

8. 8 Automatic restart after over-/undertemperature fault

0 = No automatic restart after temperature fault1 = Automatic restart after heatsink temperature has returned to its normal level between -10°C—+75°C.


2

Notes:

HV9000 Page 3-1Multi-step Speed Control Application

3

CONTENTS

3 Multi-step Speed Control Appl. ........3-1



3.5 Special parameters, Groups 2—8 .. 3-83.5.1 Parameter tables .................. 3-83.5.2 Description of Groups. ........ 3-14

MULTI-STEP SPEED CONTROL APPLICATION(par. 0.1 = 4)

2 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application

3



2 Vin+ Input for reference voltage Basic reference (programmable),range 0—10 V DC


4 Iin+ Input for reference current Basic reference (programmable),

5 Iin- range 0—20 mA


7 GND Control voltage ground Ground for reference and controls

8 DIA1 Start forward Contact closed = start forward(Programmable)


10 DIA3 Fault reset Contact open = no action(Programmable) Contact closed = fault reset




14 DIB4 Multi-step speed select 1 sel 1 sel 2 sel 3 0 0 0 basic speed

15 DIB5 Multi-step speed select 2 1 0 0 speed 1 0 1 0 speed 2

16 DIB6 Multi-step speed select 3 - - - - - - 1 1 1 speed 7


18 Iout+ Analog output Programmable (par. 3. 1)

19 Iout- Output frequency Range 0—20 mA/RL max. 500 Ω20 DO1 Digital output Programmable ( par. 3. 6)



22 RO1 RUN

23 RO1


25 RO2 FAULT

26 RO2

Figure 3.2-1 Default I/O configuration and connection example of the Multi-step speed Control Application.

Basic reference(optional)

220VACMax.

RUN

READY

FAULT

3.1 GENERAL

The Multi-step Speed Control Application canbe used in applications where fixed speeds areneeded. in total 9 different speeds can beprogrammed: one basic speed, 7 multi-stepspeeds and one jog speed. The speed stepsare selected with digital signals DIB4, DIB5 andDIB6. If jog speed is used, DIA3 can be

programmed from fault reset to jog speedselect.

The basic speed reference can be either avoltage or a current signal via analog inputterminals (2/3 or 4/5). The other analog inputcan be programmed for other purposes


3.2 CONTROL I/O



3


Figure 3.3-1 Control signal logic of the Multi-step Speed Control Application.Switch positions shown are based on the factory settings.

!!"#!$%"!$

!!&'(

!!")*

!!+*

,)$'!')-!,)*-.!)-!

'./&'()!0 +*)*-.!'.-$

)+*

1 223)

45)!'.)"!$

2-*()*(0)*$-'!)

2-*()*(0)*$-'!)

2-*()*(0)*$-'!)

6'.)*(0)"!$)*$-'!)7('./)-!(8

9)*)7('./)-!(8

:-!;

-!<

)"'=0

7*-$)*(0)"!$8

2 5)))) "!$)*$5))))6'.)*(05)>)2-*()*(0)5)?)2-*()*(0))@)2-*()*(0)))2-*()*(0)))2-*()*(0)))2-*()*(0)))2-*()*(0)>


3

3.4 Basic parameters, Group 1



1. 2 Maximum frequency fmin-120/500Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz * 3-5



1. 5 Basic reference 0—1 1 0 0 = Analog voltage input (term.2) 3-5selection 1 = Analog current input (term.4)

1. 6 Jog speed fmin —fmax 0.1 Hz 5.0 Hz 3-5reference (1. 1) (1. 2)

1. 7 Current limit 0.1—2.5 xIn HV9 0.1A 1.5 x In HV9 ***Output curr. limit [A] of the unit 3-5


1. 9 V/Hz optimisation 0—1 1 0 0 = None 3-71 = Automatic torque boost





1. 13 Nominal current 2.5 x In HV9 0,1 A In HV9 In from the nameplate of 3-7of the motor the motor




525—690 575 V Voltage code 61. 15 Parameter conceal 0—1 1 0 Visibility of the parameters: 3-7

0 = all parameter groups visible1 = only group 1 is visible

1. 16 Parameter value lock 0—1 1 0 Disables parameter changes: 3-70 = changes enabled1 = changes disabled

* If 1. 2 > motor synchr. speed, check suitabilityfor motor and drive systemSelecting 120/500 Hz range see page 3-5.

** Default value for a four pole motor and anominal size HV9000.

*** Up to M10. Bigger classes case by case.

Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed

only when the frequency converter isstopped.

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


3


1. 17 Multi-step speed fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 10.0 Hz 3-7reference 1 (1. 1) (1. 2)










Defines the frequency limits of the HV9000.

The default maximum value for parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 is 120 Hz. By setting 1. 2 =120 Hz in the when the drive is stopped (RUN indicator not lit) parameters 1. 1 and1. 2 are changed to 500 Hz. At the same time the resolution of the panel reference ischanged from 0.01 Hz to 0.1 Hz.Changing the max. value from 500 Hz to 120 Hz is done by setting parameter1. 2 to 119 Hz while the drive is stopped.

1. 3, 1. 4 Acceleration time 1, deceleration time 1:

These limits correspond to the time required for the output frequency toaccelerate from the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximumfrequency (par. 1. 2). Acceleration/deceleration times can be reduced with a freeanalog input signal, see parameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.


0: Analog voltage reference from terminals 2—3, e.g. a potentiometer1: Analog current reference trom terminals 4—5, e.g. a transducer

1. 6 Jog speed refrence

The value of this parameter defines the jog speed selected with the DIA3 digital inputwhich if it is programmed for Jog speed. See parameter 2. 2.

Parameter value is automatically limited between minimum and maximum frequency(par 1. 1, 1. 2)

1. 7 Current limit

This parameter determines the maximum motor current that the HV9000 will provideshort term. Current limit can be set lower with a free analog input signal, seeparameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.


3





0 (par. 6. 3) where a constant voltage (nominal vaue) is supplied tothe motor. See figure 3.4-1.

A linear V/Hz ratio should be used in constant torque applications



1 point (par. 6. 3), where the nominal voltage is supplied tothe motor. See figure 3.4-1.

The motor runs undermagnetized below the field weakening point andproduces less torque and electromechanical noise. A squared V/Hz ratiocan be used in applications where the torque demand of the load isproportional to the square of the speed, e.g. in centrifugal fans andpumps.

Programm. The V/Hz curve can be programmed with three different points.V/Hz curve The parameters for programming are explained in chapter 3.5.2. 2 A programmable V/Hz curve can be used if the standard settings do

not satisfy the needs of the application. See figure 3.4-2.

V [V]

Vn Default: Nominal voltage ofthe motor


Linear

Squared


f [Hz]


U[V]V

n

Parameter6.4





Default: nominalvoltage of the motor


3


Automatic The voltage to the motor changes automatically whichtorque allows the motor to produce enough torque to start andboost run at low frequencies. The voltage increase depends on the motor type

and horsepower. Automatic torque boost can be used in applicationswhere starting torque due to starting friction is high, e.g. in conveyors.

NOTE! In high torque - low speed applications - it is likely the motor willoverheat.

If the motor has to run for a prolonged time under these conditions,special attention must be paid to cooling the motor. Use externalcooling for the motor if the temperature rise is too high.


Find this value Vn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the voltage at the field weakening point, parameter6. 4, to 100% x Vnmotor.


Find then nominal frequency fn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the field weakening point, parameter 6. 3, to the same value.






Set parameter value according to the nominal voltage of the supply.Values are pre-defined for voltage codes 2, 4, 5, and 6. See table 3.4-1.



0 = all parameter groups are visible1 = only group 1 is visible




!


3

1. 17 - 1. 23 Multi-step speed reference 1—7

These parameter values define the Multi-step speeds selected with the DIA4, DIB5and DIB6 digital inputs .

These values are automatically limited between minimum and maximum frequency(par. 1. 1, 1. 2).

Table 3.4-2 Selection of multi-step speed reference 1—7.

Speed Multi-step speed select 1 Multi-step speed select 2 Multi-step speed select 3reference DIB4 DIB5 DIB6

Par. 1. 6 0 0 0

Par. 1. 17 1 0 0

Par. 1. 18 0 1 0

Par. 1. 19 1 1 0

Par. 1. 20 0 0 1

Par. 1. 21 1 0 1

Par. 1. 22 0 1 1

Par. 1. 23 1 1 1


3



Input signal parameters, Group 2


DIA1 DIA2

2. 1 Start/Stop logic 0—3 1 0 0 = Start forward Start reverse 3-15selection 1 = Start/Stop Reverse



2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acc./Dec. time selection5 = Reverse (if par. 2. 1 = 3)6 = Jog speed7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./Dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command

2. 3 Vin signal range 0—1 1 0 0 = 0 —10 V 3-171 = Custom setting range

2. 4 Vin custom setting min. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 3-17

2. 5 Vin custom setting max. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 100.00% 3-17

2. 6 Vin signal inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 3-181 = Inverted

2. 7 Vin signal filter time 0.00 —10.0 s 0.01s 0.10 s 0 = No filtering 3-18


2. 9 Iin custom setting minim. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 3-19

2. 10 Iin custom setting maxim. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 100.00% 3-19


2. 12 Iin signal filter time 0.01 —10.00s 0.01s 0.10 s 0 = No filtering 3-19

2. 13 Reference scaling 0— 1 Hz 0 Hz Selects the frequency that corres- 3-20minimum value par. 2. 14 ponds to the min. reference signal

2. 14 Reference scaling 0— 1 Hz 0 Hz Selects the frequency that corres- 3-20maximum value fmax ponds to the max. reference signal

(1. 2) 0 = Scaling off>0 = Scaled maximum value

2. 15 Free analog input, 0—2 1 0 0 = Not use 3-20signal selection 1 = Vin (analog voltage input)


2. 16 Free analog input, 0—4 1 0 0 = No function 3-20function 1 = Reduces current limit (par. 1.7)

2 = Reduces DC-braking current3 = Reduces acc. and decel. times4 = Reduces torque supervision limit


STOPO

STOPO


3



3. 1 Analog output function 0—7 1 1 0 = Not used Scale 100% 3-221 = O/P frequency(0—fmax)2 = Motor speed (0—max. speed)3 = O/P current (0—2.0 x InHV9)4 = Motor torque (0—2 x TnMot)5 = Motor power (0—2 x PnMot)6 = Motor voltage (0—100%xVnMot)7 = DC-link volt. (0—1000 V)

3. 2 Analog output filter time 0.00—10.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s 3-22

3. 3 Analog output 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 3-22inversion 1 = Inverted

3. 4 Analog output 0—1 1 0 0 = 0 mA 3-22minimum 1 = 4 mA


3. 6 Digital output function 0—21 1 1 0 = Not used 3-231 = Ready2 = Run3 = Fault4 = Fault inverted5 = HV9000 overheat warning6 = External fault or warning7 = Reference fault or warning8 = Warning9 = Reversed10 = Jog speed selected11 = At speed12 = Motor regulator activated13 = Output frequency limit superv. 114 = Output frequency limit superv. 215 = Torque limit supervision16 = Reference limit supervision17 = External brake control18 = Control from I/O-terminals19 = Drive temperature limit

supervision20 = Unrequested rotation direction21 = External brake control inverted




2 = High limit



STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


3



2 = High limit



2 = High limit

3. 14 Torque limit 0.0—200.0 % 0.1% 100.0% 3-24supervision value xTnHV9

3. 15 Reference limit 0—2 1 0 0 = No 3-24supervision function 1 = Low limit

2 = High limit

3. 16 Reference limit 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 3-24supervision value (par. 1. 2)

3. 17 Extern. brake Off-delay 0.0—100.0 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 3-24

3. 18 Extern. brake On-delay 0.0—100.0 s 0.1 s 1.5 s 3-24

3. 19 Drive 0—2 1 0 0 = No 3-25temperature limit 1 = Low limitsupervision 2 = High limit

3. 20 Drive -10—+75°C 1 40°C 3-25temperature limit value


3. 22 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0.00—10.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s See parameter 3. 2 3-22analog output filter time








4. 3 Acceleration time 2 0.1—3000.0s 0.1 s 10.0 s 3-25

4. 4 Deceleration time 2 0.1—3000.0s 0.1 s 10.0 s 3-25




STOPO

STOPO


3



4. 8 DC-braking current 0.15—1.5 x 0.1 A 0.5 x InHV9 3-26InHV9 (A)

4. 9 DC-braking time at Stop 0.00-250.00s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off at Stop 3-26

4. 10 Turn on frequency of DC 0.1—10.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 1.5 Hz 3-28brake during ramp Stop

4. 11 DC-brake time at Start 0.00—25.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off at Start 3-28








5. 6 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = Prohibit range 3 is of 3-28range 3 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)




6. 2 Switching frequency 1.0—16.0 kHz 0.1 kHz 10/3.6 kHz Dependant on Hp rating 3-29

6. 3 Field weakening 30—500 Hz 1 Hz Param. 3-29point 1. 11


6. 5 V/Hz curve, midpoint 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 3-29frequency

6. 6 V/Hz-curve, midpoint 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 0.00% Parameter maximum value = 3-29voltage x Vnmot param. 6.4


6. 8 Overvoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is turned off 3-301 = Controller is operating

6. 9 Undervoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is turned off 3-301 = Controller is operating


STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


3










7. 6 Motor thermal protection 50.0—150.0 % 1.0 % 100.0% 3-32break point current x InMOTOR

7. 7 Motor thermal protection 5.0—150.0% 1.0 % 45.0% 3-32zero frequency current x InMOTOR





7. 12 Stall time 2.0—120.0 s 1.0 s 15.0 s 3-34



7. 15 Underload prot., field 10.0—150.0 % 1.0% 50.0% 3-35weakening area load x TnMOTOR




3



8. 1 Automatic restart: 0—10 1 0 0 = not in use 3-36number of tries



8. 4 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 3-37undervoltage trip 1 = Yes

8. 5 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 3-37overvoltage trip 1 = Yes

8. 6 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 3-37overcurrent trip 1 = Yes

8. 7 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 3-37reference fault trip 1 = Yes

8. 8 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 3-37over/undertemperature 1 = Yesfault trip



3







3 If Start forward (DIA1) and start reverse (DIA2) signals are activesimultaneously, the start forward signal (DIA1) has priority.



DIA1

DIA2

1 2 3

t

UD009K09

Output frequency


FWD

REV

DIA1

DIA2

t

UD012K10

Output frequency


FWD

REV


3


3: 3-wire connection


2. 2 DIA3 function

1: External fault, closing contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the contact is closed

2: External fault, opening contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the input is open




6: Jog speed contact closed = Jog speed selected for freq. refer.


8: Acc./Dec. operation prohibitedcontact closed = Stops acceleration or deceleration until

the contact is opened

9: DC-braking commandcontact closed = In Stop mode, the DC-braking operates

until the contact is opened, see figure 3.5-4. DC-brake current is set with parameter 4. 8.

See also param. 7.2!

t

min 50 ms

UD009K11

FWD

REV

Output frequency



DIA1Start

DIA2Stop



3

Figure 3.5-4 DIA3 as DC-brake command input: a) Stop mode = Ramp,b) Stop mode = Coasting.



2. 4 Vin custom setting minimum/maximum

2. 5 These parameters set Vin for any input signal span within 0—10 V.

Minimum setting: Set the Vin signal to its minimum level, select parameter 2.4,press the Enter button

Maximum setting: Set the Vin signal to its maximum level, select parameter 2.5,press the Enter button

Note! The parameter values can only be set with this procedure (not with arrow up/

t

UD009K32

Param. 4. 10

DIA3

t

UD009K32

DIA3

RUNSTOP

Output frequency




3

arrow down buttons).


Vin is source B frequencyreference, par. 1. 6 = 1 (default)

Parameter 2. 6 = 0, no inversionof analog Vin signal

Parameter 2. 6 = 1, inversionof analog Vin signalmax. Vin signal = minimum setspeedmin. Vin signal = maximum setspeed

%

100%

63%

Par. 2. 7

t [s]

UD009K15

Filtered signal

Unfiltered signal

10 V0 Param. 2.4Ch012K46

Outputfrequency

Vin(term. 2)

Vin = custom

Vin = 0—10 V

Parameter2.16

Parameter2.17

Parameter 2.3 =0

Parameter 2.3=1

Param. 2.5

Figure 3.5-5 Vin no signal inversion

Figure 3.5-6 Vin signal inversion.

Figure 3.5-7 Vin signal filtering.


Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Vin signal. Along filtering time makes driveresponse slower. See figure 3.5-7.

Par. 2.17

Par. 2.16

Par. 2.4 Par. 2.5 10V

Par. 2.3=0Vin = 0-10 V

UD12K47

Output frequency

VinTerm. 2

Par. 2.3 = 1Vin = custom


3



See figure 3.5-8.


With these parameters you canscale the input current tocorrespond to a minimum andmaximum frequency range. Seefigure 3.5-8.

Minimum setting: Set the Iin signalto its minimum level, selectparameter 2. 9, press the EnterbuttonMaximum setting:Set the Iin signal to its maximumlevel, select parameter 2. 10,press the Enter button

Note! The parameter values canonly be set with this procedure(not with arrow up/arrow downbuttons).


Iin is source A frequencyreference, par. 1. 5 = 0 (default)

Parameter 2. 11 = 0, noinversion of Iin input

Parameter 2. 11 = 1, inversionof Iin input, see figure 3.5-9.

max. Iin signal = minimum setspeedmin. Iin signal = maximum setspeed


Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Iin signal. A longfiltering time makes drive responseslower. See figure 3.5-10.

20 mA0

Par. 2. 13

Par. 2. 14

Par. 2. 9 Par. 2. 10

Par. 2. 8 = 1Iin = 4—20 mA

4 mA

Par. 2. 8 = 0Iin = 0—20 mA

UD012K28

Outputfrequency

Iin(term. 3,4)


20 mA0

Par. 2. 13

Par. 2. 14

Par. 2. 9 Par. 2. 104 mA

UD012K29

Outputfrequency

Uin(term. 3,4)


par. 2. 8 = 1Iin = 4—20 mA

par. 2. 8 = 0Iin = 0—20 mA

%

100%

63%

Par. 2. 12

t [s]

UD009K30

Filtered signal

Unfiltered signal

Figure 3.5-8 Analog input Iin scaling.



Iin


3

2. 13, 2. 14 Reference scaling, minimum value/maximum value

Scales the basic reference.

Setting limits: par. 1. 1 <par. 2. 13<par. 2. 14 <par. 1. 2.If par. 2. 14 = 0 scaling is set off. See figures 3.5-11 and 3.5-12.

Use this parameter to select afunction for a free analog inputsignal:

0 = Function is not used

1 = Reducing motor current limit (par. 1. 7)

This signal will adjust themaximum motor currentbetween 0 and the maximum setwith parameter 1. 7.See figure 3.5-13.

100

par. 2. 4

par. 2. 5

Ch012K12

Outputfrequency

Analoginput [V]

Max freq. par 1. 2

Min freq. par 1. 1

100 Ch012K13

Outputfrequency

Analoginput [V]

Max freq. par 1. 2

Min freq. par 1. 1

100%Par. 1. 7

UD012K61

Torque limit

Analoginput




Selection of input signal of free analog input (an input not used for reference signal):


2. 18 Free analog input signal function

Figure 3.5-11 Reference scaling Figure 3.5-12 Reference scaling,par. 2. 14 = 0.

Figure 3.5-13 Reducing max. motor current.


3

2= Reducing DC brake current.

DC braking current can bereduced with the free analoginput signal between current 0.15x InHV9 and current set by theparameter 4. 8. See figure 3.5-14.

Figure 3.5-15 Reducing acceleration and deceleration times.

0

100%Par. 4. 8

0,15 x InFU

UD012K58

DC-brakingcurrent

Free analoginput

Signal range

10

1

Ch012K59

2

Factor R

Free analoginput

Signal range

0

100%Par. 3. 14

Ch012K60

Torque limit

Free analoginput

Signal range

0.15 x InHV9

Figure 2.5-14 Reducing DC brake current.

3 = Reducing accelerationand decelerationtimes.

Acceleration/deceleration timescan be reduced with a free analoginput signal according to thefollowing formulas:

Reduced time = set acc./deceler. time (par. 1. 3, 1. 4; 4.3, 4. 4) divided by the factor Rfrom the figure 3.5-15.

4 = Reducing torque super-vision limit.

Torque supervision limit can bereduced with a free analog inputsignal between 0 and setsupervision limit (par. 3. 14), seefigure 3.5-16.

Figure 3.5-16 Reducing torque supervisionlimit.


3


See table for parameter 3.1 onpage 3-9.




Inverts analog output signal:max. output signal = minimumset valuemin. output signal = maximumset value


Defines the signal minimum tobe either 0 mA or 4 mA (livingzero). See figure 3.5-19.

%

100%

63%

Par. 3. 2

t [s]

UD009K16

Filtered signal

Unfiltered signal


1.00

20 mA

4 mA

10 mA

0.50 mA

Param. 3. 5= 200%

Param. 3. 5= 100%

Param. 3. 5= 50%

12 mA

Ch012K17

Analogoutputcurrent


1.00

20 mA

4 mA

10 mA

0.50 mA

Param. 3. 5= 200%

Param. 3. 5= 100%

Param. 3. 5= 50%

Par. 3. 4 = 1

Par. 3. 4 = 0

Ch012K18

12 mA

Analogoutputcurrent






Output fre- Max. frequency (p. 1. 2)quencyOutput 2 x I

nHV9

currentMotor speed Max. speed (nnxfmax/fn)Motor torque 2 x TnMot

Motor power 2 x PnMot

Motor voltage 100% x VnMot

DC-link volt. 1000 V



3


Setting value Signal content0 = Not used Out of operationDigital output DO1 sinks current and programmable relay (RO1, RO2) is activated when:1 = Ready The drive is ready to operate2 = Run The drive operates (motor is running)3 = Fault A fault trip has occurred4 = Fault inverted A fault trip has not occurred5 = HV9000 overheat warning The heat-sink temperature exceeds +70°C6 = External fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 27 = Reference fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 1 - if analog

reference is 4—20 mA and signal is <4mA8 = Warning Always if a warning exists9 = Reversed The reverse command has been selected10= Jog speed selected The Jog speed has been selected with digital input11 = At speed The output frequency has reached the set reference12= Motor regulator activated Overvoltage or overcurrent regulator was activated13= Output frequency supervision 1 The output frequency goes outside of the set supervision

Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 9 and 3. 10)14= Output frequency supervision 2 The output frequency goes outside of the set supervision

Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 11 and 3. 12)15= Torque limit supervision The motor torque goes outside of the set supervision

Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 13 and 3. 14)16= Active reference Active reference goes outside of the set supervision limit

supervision Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 15 and 3. 16)17= External brake control External brake ON/OFF control with programmable delay

(par 3. 17 and 3. 18)18= Control from I/O terminals External control mode selected with prog. push-button#219= Drive temperature supervision Temperature on drive goes outside the set supervision

limits (par. 3. 19 and 3. 20)20= Unrequested rotation direction Rotation direction of the motor shaft is different from the

requested one21= External brake control inverted External brake ON/OFF control (par 3.17 and 3.18), output

active when brake control is OFF






The frequency value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 9 (3. 11).See figure 3.5-20.


3

3. 13 Torque limit , supervision function


If the calculated torque value goesunder/over the set limit (3. 14) thisfunction generates a warningmessage via the digital outputDO1 or via a relay output RO1 orRO2 depending on the settings ofthe parameters 3. 6—3. 8.

Par 3. 10

f[Hz]

t

21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1

21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1

21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1

UD009K19

Example:


The calculated torque value to be supervised by the parameter 3.13.Torque supervision value can be reduced below the setpoint with al free analog inputsignal, see parameters 2.18 and 2.19.



If the reference value goes under/over the set limit (3. 16) this function generates awarning message via the digital output DO1 and via a relay output RO1 or RO2depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8. The supervised reference isthe current active reference. It can be the source A or B reference depending on DIB6input or the panel reference if the panel is the active control source.




Par. 3.9 = 2

The function of the external brakecan be delayed from the start andstop control signals with theseparameters. See figure 3.5-21.

The brake control signal can beprogrammed via the digital outputDO1 or via one of the relay outputsRO1 and RO2, see parameters 3.6—3. 8.

tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18

tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18

t

a)

t

b)

UD012K45

DIA1: RUN FWD

STOP

External

BRAKE: OFF


DIA2: RUN REV

STOP

DIA1: START

PULSE

External

BRAKE: OFF


DIA2: STOP

PULSE


Figure 3.5-21 External brake control:a) Start/Stop logic selection par.2. 1 = 0, 1 or 2b) Start/Stop logic selection par.2. 1 = 3.


3



If the temperature of the unit goes under/over the set limit (3. 20) this functiongenerates a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1 orRO2 depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8.

3. 20 Drive temperature limit value

The temperature value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 19.



Setting the value = 0 gives you a linear ramp shape. The output frequency immediatelyfollows the input with a ramp timeset by parameters 1. 3,1. 4 (4. 3,4. 4 for Acc/Dec time 2).

Setting 0.1—10 seconds for 4. 1(4. 2) causes an S-shaped ramp.The speed changes are smooth.Parameter 1. 3/ 1. 4 (4. 3/ 4. 4)determines the ramp time of theacceleration/deceleration in themiddle of the curve. See figure 3.5-22.

[Hz]

[t]

4. 1 (4. 2)

4. 1 (4. 2)

UD009K20

1. 3, 1. 4(4. 3, 4. 4)

4. 3 Acceleration time 2

4. 4 Deceleration time 2

These values correspond to the time required for output frequency to acceleratefrom the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency (par. 1.2). With this parameter it is possibile to set two different acceleration/decelerationtimes for one application. The active set can be selected with the programmablesignal DIA3. See parameter 2. 2. Acceleration/deceleration times can be reducedwith a free analog input signal. See parameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.

Figure 3.5-22 S-shaped acceleration/deceleration


3

4. 5 Brake chopper



4. 6 Start function

Ramp:


Flying start:



4. 7 Stop function

Coasting:

0 The motor coasts to an uncontrolled stop with the HV9000 off, after the Stopcommand.

Ramp:

1 After the Stop command, the speed of the motor is decelerated accordingto the deceleration ramp time parameter. If the regenerated energy is high itmay be necessary to use an external braking resistor for fasterdeceleration.




>0 DC-brake is in use depending on the setup of the stop function(param. 4. 7). The time is set by the value of parameter 4. 9:


3




The braking time is scaled according to the frequency when the DC- brakingstarts. If the frequency is > nominal frequency of the motor (par. 1.11), the value ofparameter 4.9 determines the braking time. When the frequency is < 10% of thenominal, the braking time is 10% of the set value of parameter 4.9.


After a Stop command, the speed of the motor is reduced based on the decelerationramp parameter. If no regeneration occurs due to load inertia DC-braking starts at aspeed defined by parameter 4. 10.

fout fout

fn fn

t t

t = 1 x par. 4. 9 t = 0.1 x par. 4. 9

UD009K21RUNSTOP

RUNSTOP

Output frequency

Motor speed

Output frequency

Motor speed

DC-braking ON

DC-braking ON 0,1x fn

The braking time is defined withparameter 4.9.

If a high inertia exists it isrecommended to use an externalbraking resistor for fasterdeceleration. See figure 3.5-24.


See figure 3.5-24.

t = param. 4. 9

t

Param. 4. 10

fout

UD009K23

Motor speed

Output frequency

DC-braking

RUNSTOP

[Hz] [Hz]

[Hz]

Figure 3.5-24 DC-braking time when stopfunction = ramp.



3



>0 DC-brake is active when thestart command is given. Thisparameter defines the timebefore the brake is released.After the brake is released,the output frequencyincreases according to theset start function parameter4. 6 and the accelerationparameters (1.3, 4.1 or 4.2,4.3). See figure 3.5-25.

.



With these parameters it ispossible to set limits for three "skipfrequency" regions between 0 Hzand 500 Hz. The accuracy of thesetting is 0.1 Hz. See figure 3.5-26.

t

UD009K22

Par 4. 11

RUNSTOP

Output frequency

5. 1 5. 25. 3 5. 45. 5 5. 6

UD012K33

Reference [Hz]


fout [Hz]

Figure 3.5-25 DC-braking time at start



3

6. 1 Motor control mode0 = Frequency control: The I/O terminal and panel references are frequency

references and the drive controls the output frequency (outputfreq. resolution 0.01 Hz)

1 = Speed control: The I/O terminal and panel references are speed referencesand the drive controls the motor speed (control accuracy ±0.5%).



Before changing the frequency from the factory default 10 kHz (3.6 kHz >40 Hp) checkthe drive derating in the curves shown in figures 5.2-2 and 5.2-3 in chapter 5.2 of theUser's Manual.


The field weakening point is the output frequency where the output voltagereaches the set maximum value. Above that frequency the output voltage remainsat the set maximum value.Below that frequency output voltage depends on the setting of the V/Hz curveparameters 1. 8, 1. 9, 6. 5, 6. 6 and 6. 7. See figure 3.5-27.

When the parameters 1. 10 and 1. 11, nominal voltage and nominal frequency ofthe motor are set, parameters 6. 3 and 6. 4 are also set automatically to thecorresponding values. If you need different values for the field weakening pointand the maximum output voltage, change these parameters after settingparameters 1. 10 and 1. 11.


If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, thisparameter defines the middle frequency point of the curve. See figure 3.5-27.


If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, thisparameter defines the middle point voltage (% of motor nominal voltage) of thecurve. See figure 3.5-27.


If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, thisparameter defines the zero frequency voltage of the curve. See figure 3.5-27.

(V/Hz)

(sensorless vector)






0 = No response1 = Warning2 = Fault, stop mode after fault according to parameter 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop mode after fault



0 = No response1 = Warning2 = Fault, stop mode after fault according to parameter 4.73 = Fault, stop mode after fault always by coasting

A warning or a fault action and message is generated from the external fault signalin the digital input DIA3. The information can also be programmed into digital outputDO1 and into relay outputs RO1 and RO2.








U[V]V

n

Parameter6.4





3

!CAUTION! The calculated model does not protect the motor if the cooling of the

motor is reduced either by blocking the airflow or due to dust or dirt.



Ground fault protection ensures that the sum of the motor phase currents is zero.The standard overcurrent protection is always working and protects the frequencyconverter from ground faults with high current levels.


General

Motor thermal protection is to protect the motor from overheating. The HV9000 driveis capable of supplying higher than nominal current to the motor. If the load requiresthis high current there is a risk that motor will be thermally overloaded. This is trueespecially at low frequencies. With low frequencies the cooling effect of the motorfan is reduced and the capacity of the motor is reduced. If the motor is equippedwith a separately powered external fan, the load derating at low speed is small.

Motor thermal protection is based on a calculated model and it uses the outputcurrent of the drive to determine the load on the motor. When the motor is poweredfrom the drive, the calculated model uses the heatsink temperature to determinethe initial thermal state of the motor. The calculated model assumes that the ambienttemperature of the motor is 40°C.

Motor thermal protection can be adjusted by setting several parameters. The thermalcurrent IT specifies the load current above which the motor is overloaded. Thiscurrent limit is a function of the output frequency. The curve for IT is set withparameters 7. 6, 7. 7 and 7. 9, refer to the figure 3.5-28. The default values of theseparameters are set from the motor nameplate data.

With the output current at IT the thermal stage will reach the nominal value (100%).The thermal stage changes with the square of the current. With output current at75% of IT the thermal stage will reach 56% and with output current at 120% of IT thethermal stage would reach 144% . The function will trip the drive (refer par. 7. 5) ifthe thermal state reaches a value of 105%. The response time of the thermal stageis determined by the time constant parameter 7. 8. The larger the motor, the longerit takes to reach the final temperature.



Operation:


Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is selected, the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.


3Par. 7. 6

Par. 7. 7

IT

f

par. 1. 7

I

UMCH7_91Par. 7. 9

Overload area

Currentlimit


The current can be set between 10.0—150.0% x InMotor.This parameter sets the value for thermal current at zero frequency. Refer tofigure 3.5-28.

The default value is set assuming that there is no external fan cooling the motor.If an external fan is used this parameter can be set to 90% (or higher).

The value is set as a percentage of the motor's nameplate nominal current, pa-rameter 1. 13, not the drive's nominal output current. The motor's nominal cur-rent is the current which the motor can stand in direct on-line use without beingoverheated.If you change parameter 1. 13, this parameter is automatically re-stored to the default value.

Setting this parameter (or parameter 1. 13) does not affect to the maximumoutput current of the drive. Parameter 1. 7 alone determines the maximum out-put current of the drive.

Deactivating the stall protection by setting the parameter to 0 will reset the stall timecounter to zero.


The current can be set between 50.0—150.0% x InMotor.This parameter sets the value for thermal current at frequencies above the breakpoint on the thermal current curve. See figure 3.5-28.

The value is set as a percentage of the motor nameplate nominal current,parameter 1. 13, not the drive's nominal output current.

The motor's nominal current is the current which the motor can withstand in directon-line use without being overheated.

If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted, this parameter is automatically restored to thedefault value.

Setting this parameter (or parameter 1.13) does not affect the maximum outputcurrent of the drive. Parameter 1. 7 alone determines the maximum output currentof the drive.

[Hz



3


This time can be set between 0.5—300 minutes. This is the thermal time constantof the motor. The larger the motor the greater the time constant. The time constantis defined as the time that it takes the calculated thermal stage to reach 63% of itsfinal value.


The default value for the time constant is calculated based on the motor nameplatedata from parameters 1.12 and 1.13. If either of these parameters is reset, then thisparameter is set to default value.

If the motor's t6 -time is known (given by the motor manufacturer) the time constantparameter could be set based on t6 -time. As a rule of thumb, the motor thermaltime constant in minutes equals to 2xt6 (t6 in seconds is the time a motor can safelyoperate at six times the rated current). If the drive is stopped the time constant isinternally increased to three times the set parameter value. Cooling in the stopstage is based on convection with an increased time constant.


The frequency can be set between 10—500 Hz. This is the frequency break point ofthe thermal current curve. With frequencies above this point, the thermal capacity ofthe motor is assumed to be constant. See figure 3.5-28.

The default value is based on the motor's nameplate data, parameter 1. 11. It is 35Hz for a 50 Hz motor and 42 Hz for a 60 Hz motor. More generally it is 70% of thefrequency at the field weakening point (parameter 6. 3). Changing either parameter1. 11 or 6. 3 will restore this parameter to its default value.


Operation:


Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is set on, the drive will stop and activate the fault stage. Setting the parameterto 0 will deactivate the protection and will reset the stall time counter to zero.

105%

par. 7. 5

Θ = (I/IT)2 x (1-e-t/T)

I/IT

UMCH7_92

Trip area

Motor temperature


Time constant T*)





3


Motor stall protection protects the motor from short time overload situations like astalled shaft. The reaction time of stall protection can be set shorter than with motorthermal protection. The stall state is defined with two parameters, 7.11. Stall Currentand 7.13. Stall Frequency. If the current is higher than the set limit and outputfrequency is lower than the set limit the stall state is true. There is actually no realindication of the shaft rotation. Stall protection is a type of overcurrent protection.


The current can be set between 0.0—200% x InMotor.

In a stall the current has to be above this limit. See figure 3.5-30. The value is set asa percentage of the motor's nameplate nominal current, parameter 1. 13. If parameter1. 13 is adjusted, this parameter is automatically restored to its default value.

7. 12 Stall time

The time can be set between2.0—120 s. This is the maximumallowed time for a stall. There isan internal up/down counter tocount the stall time. See figure3.5-31. If the stall time countervalue goes above this limit theprotection will cause a trip (referto parameter 7. 10).


The frequency can be setbetween 1—fmax (parameter 1.2).In a stall, the output frequencyhas to be smaller than thislimit.See figure 3.5-30.

Parameters 7. 14— 7. 17Underload protection, General

The purpose of motor underloadprotection is to ensure that thereis load on the motor while thedrive is running. If the motor loadis reduced, there might be aproblem in the process, e.g.broken belt or dry pump.

Motor underload protection canbe adjusted by setting theunderload curve with parameters7. 15 and 7. 16. The underloadcurve is a squared curve setbetween zero frequency and the

Par. 7. 12

UMCH7_12

Trip area

Time

Stall time counter

StallNo stall


f

I

Par. 7. 11

Par. 7. 13 UMCH7_11

Stall area

Figure 3.5-31 Counting the stall time.


[Hz]


3

field weakening point. The protection is not active below 5Hz (the underloadcounter value is stopped). See figure 3.5-32.

The torque values for setting the underload curve are set with percentage valueswhich refer to the nominal torque of the motor. The motor's nameplate data,parameter 1. 13, the motor's nominal current and drive's nominal current ICT areused to find the scaling ratio for the internal torque value. If other than a standardmotor is used with the drive, the accuracy of the torque calculation is decreased.


Operation:

0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Fault





This parameter is the value for the minimum allowed torque when the outputfrequency is above the field weakening point. See figure 3.5-32. If parameter 1. 13 isadjusted, this parameter is automatically restored to its default value.

7. 16 Underload protection, zero frequency load


This parameter is the value for the minimum allowed torque with zero frequency.Refer to the figure 3.5-32. If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted this parameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value.



This is the maximum allowed time for an underload state. There is an internal up/down counter to accumulate the underload time. Refer to the figure 3.5-33.If the underload counter value goes above this limit, the protection will cause a trip(refer to the parameter 7. 14). If the drive is stopped, the underload counter is resetto zero.


Par. 7. 17

UMCH7_17

Trip area

Time


Underl.No underl.


P a r. 7 . 1 5

C h C H 7 _ 1 5

P a r. 7 . 1 6

f5 H z

U n d e r lo a d a r e a

T o r q u e

F ie ld w e a k e n in gp o in t p a r. 6 . 3


[Hz]


3

4

3

2

1

t

UD012K25


RUNSTOP


ttrial ttrial

Par. 8. 1 = 3ttrial = Par. 8. 2


The Automatic restart function restarts the drive after the faults selected withparameters 8. 4 - 8. 8. The Start function for Automatic restart is selected withparameter 8. 3. See figure 3.5-34.


Parameter 8.1 determines how many automatic restarts can be made during thetrial time set by the parameter 8.2.

The time counting starts from the first autorestart. If the number of restarts does notexceed the value of the parameter 8. 1 during the trial time, the count is cleared afterthe trial time has elapsed. The next fault starts the counting again.




8. 4 Automatic restart after undervoltage trip

0 = No automatic restart after undervoltage fault1 = Automatic restart after undervoltage fault condition returns to the normal condition (DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)

8. 5 Automatic restart after overvoltage trip

0 = No automatic restart after overvoltage fault1 = Automatic restart after overvoltage fault condition returns to the normal condition (DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)

8. 6 Automatic restart after overcurrent trip

0 = No automatic restart after overcurrent fault1 = Automatic restart after overcurrent faults


3

Notes:

8. 7 Automatic restart after reference fault trip

0 = No automatic restart after reference fault1 = Automatic restart after analog current reference signal (4—20 mA) returns to the normal level (>4 mA)

8. 8 Automatic restart after over-/undertemperature fault trip

0 = No automatic restart after temperature fault1 = Automatic restart after heatsink temperature has returned to its normal level between -10°C—+75°C.


3

Notes:

HV9000 Page 4-1PI-control Application

4

CONTENTS

4 PI-control Application .......................4-1



4.5 Special parameters, Groups 2—8 .. 4-84.5.1 Parameter tables .................. 4-84.5.2 Description of Groups. ........ 4-15

4.6 Panel reference ............................ 4-364.7 Monitoring data. ............................ 4-36

PI-CONTROL APPLICATION(par. 0.1 = 5)

2 HV9000PI-control Application

4

4.1 General

In PI-control application there are two I/O-terminal control sources. Source A is the PI-controller and source B is the direct frequencyreference. The control source is selected withDIB6 input.

The PI-controller reference can be selectedfrom an analog input, motorized (digital)potentiometer or panel reference. The actual



2 Vin+ Analog input, PI-controller reference valuevoltage (programmable) range 0—10 V DC


4 Iin+ Analog input, PI-controller actual value




8 DIA1 Start/Stop Contact open = stopSource A (PI-controller) Contact closed = start

9 DIA2 External fault Contact open = no fault(programmable) Contact closed = fault





14 DIB4 Start/Stop Contact open = stopSource B (Direct freq. ref.) Contact closed = start

15 DIB5 Jog speed select Contact open = no action(programmable) Contact closed = Jog speed







22 RO1 RUN

23 RO1


25 RO2 FAULT

26 RO2

Figure 4.2-1 Default I/O configuration and connection example of thePI-Control Application with 2-wire transmitter.

220VACMax.

RUN

READY

FAULT

4.2 Control I/O

value can be selected from the analog inputsor from mathematical functions of the analoginputs.

The direct frequency reference can be usedfor control without the PI-controller. Thefrequency reference can be selected fromanalog inputs or panel reference.

* NOTE! Remember to connect CMA andCMB inputs.

PI-controllerreference value

-+

Actualvalue

I(0)4..20mA

2-wiretransmitter


4

Figure 4.3-1 Control signal logic of the PI- Control Application.Switch positions shown are based on the factory settings.

The logic flow of the I/O-control signals and pushbutton signals from the panel is shown in figure4.3-1.


!

"#

$!#$%

%$"$# "#%#

&'()&(

"*"+,

&-.

/-(++-/-.0-

+1

%2%334$"##!-

3++56,++&(

7+0-.,6-.(+8+09:

%3$#$%"--"+(--&;-.(;--"+(--&;-.(;--7+0-.,6-&;

"+(-*-.(+

(++

%&(<"+(-

%&(<"+(-

(=

,

(-=.(+>---------------------------------?-------

"*"+,<-.+(-

"*"+,<-.+(-

$?-&8+09:

$?;-&-.8+09:


4


4.4.1 Parameter table, Group 1






1. 5 PI-controller gain 1—1000% 1 % 100% 4-5

1. 6 PI-controller I-time 0.00—320.00 s 0.01s 10.00 s 0 = no Integral time in use 4-5

















only when the drive is stopped.

** Default value for a four pole motor and a nominal size HV9000.*** Up to M10. Bigger classes case by case.

* If 1. 2 > motor synchr. speed, check suitability for motor and drive system. Selecting 120 Hz/500 Hz range see page 4-5.

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


4



Defines frequency limits of the HV9000.

The default maximum value for parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 is 120 Hz. By setting 1. 2= 120 Hz when the drive is stopped (RUN indicator not lit) parameters 1. 1 and 1.2 are changed to 500 Hz. At the same time the resolution of the panel is changedfrom 0.01 Hz to 0.1 Hz.Changing the max. value from 500 Hz to 120 Hz is done by setting parameter 1.2= 119 Hz while the drive is stopped.


These limits correspond to the time required for the output frequency to acceler-ate from the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency(par. 1. 2).

1. 5 PI-controller gain

This parameter defines the gain of the PI-controller.

If this parameter is set to 100%, a 10% change in error value causes the controlleroutput to change by 1.0 Hz.

If the parameter value is set to 0, the PI-controller operates as an I-controller.

1. 6 PI-controller I-time

Defines the integration time of the PI-controller

1. 7 Current limit

This parameter determines the maximum motor current that the HV9000 will pro-vide short term.


Linear: The voltage of the motor changes linearly with the frequency in the con-stant flux area from 0 Hz to the field weakening point

0 (par. 6. 3) where a constant voltage (nominal value) is supplied to themotor. See figure 4.4-2.A linear V/Hz ratio should be used in constant torque applications.


Squared: The voltage of the motor changes following a squared curve form withthe frequency in the area from 0 Hz to the field weakening

1 point (par. 6. 3) where the nominal voltage is supplied to the motor. Seefigure 4.4-2.

The motor runs undermagnetized below the field weakening point and producesless torque and electromechanical noise. A squared V/Hz ratio can be used inapplications where the torque demand of the load is proportional to the square ofthe speed, e.g. in centrifugal fans and pumps.


4

!

Programm. The V/Hz curve can be programmed with three different points.V/Hz curve The parameters for programming are explained in chapter 4.5.2. 2 A programmable V/Hz curve can be used if the standard settings do

not satisfy the needs of the application. See figure 4.4-3.


U[V]Vn

Parameter6.4



V [V]



Linear

Squared


f [Hz]

Figure 4.4-2 Linear and squared V/Hz curves



Automatic The voltage to the motor changes automatically which makes thetorque motor produce enough torque to start and run at low frequencies.boost The voltage increase depends on the motor type and horsepower.

Automatic torque boost can be used in applications where starting torque due tostarting friction is high, e.g. in conveyors.

NOTE! In high torque - low speed applications - it is likely the motor will overheat.If the motor has to run for a prolonged time under these conditions, specialattention must be paid to cooling the motor. Use external cooling for themotor if the temperature rise is too high.



4


Find this value Vn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the voltage at the field weakening point, parameter 6. 4, to100% x Vnmotor.


Find the nominal frequency fn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the frequency of the field weakening point, parameter 6. 3, tothe same value.




Find the value In from the nameplate of the motor.The internal motor protectionfunction uses this value as a reference value.


Set parameter value according to the nominal voltage of the supply.Values are pre-defined for voltage codes 2, 4, 5 and 6. See table 4.4-1.



0 = all parametergroups are visible1 = only group 1 is visible




To adjust more of the functions of the PI-Control application, see chapter 4.5 tomodify the parameters of Groups 2—8.


4






2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acceler./deceler. time selection5 = Reverse6 = Jog speed7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command10 = Motor (digital) pot. UP


2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acc./dec. time selection5 = Reverse6 = Jog speed7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command10 = Motor (digital) pot. DOWN





2. 7 Vin signal filter time 0.00 —10.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s 0 = No filtering 4-17


2. 9 Iin custom setting min. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 4-17

2. 10 Iin custom setting max. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 100.00% 4-17


2. 12 Iin signal filter time 0.01 —10.00 s 0.01s 0.10 s 0 = No filtering 4-18

2. 13 DIB5 function 0—9 1 6 0 = Not used 4-18(terminal 15) 1 = Ext. fault, closing contact

2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acc./dec. time selection5 = Reverse6 = Jog speed7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command

Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


4


2. 14 Motor (digital) 0.1—2000.0 0.1 10.0 4-18potentiometer ramp time Hz/s Hz/s Hz/s

2. 15 PI-controller reference 0—4 1 0 0 = Analog voltage input (term. 2) 4-19signal (source A) 1 = Analog current input (term. 4)

2= Set reference from the panel (reference r2)3 = Signal from internal motor pot.4 = Signal from internal motor pot. reset if HV9000 is stopped

2. 16 PI-controller actual 0—3 1 0 0 = Actual value 1 4-19value selection 1 = Actual 1 + Actual 2

2 = Actual 1 - Actual 23 = Actual 1 * Actual 2

2. 17 Actual value 1 input 0—2 1 2 0 = No 4-191 = Voltage input2 = Current input


2. 19 Actual value 1 -320.00%— 0.01% 0.00% 0 % = No minimum scaling 4-19min scale +320.00%

2. 20 Actual value 1 -320.00%— 0.01% 100.0% 100 % = No maximum scaling 4-19max scale +320.00%

2. 21 Actual value 2 -320.00%— 0.01% 0.00% 0 % = No minimum scaling 4-19min scale +320.00%

2. 22 Actual value 2 -320.00%— 0.01% 100.0% 100 % = No maximum scaling 4-19max scale +320.00%

2. 23 Error value inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = No 4-191 = Yes

2. 24 PI-controller min. limit fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 4-20(1. 1) (1. 2)

2. 25 PI-controller max. limit fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 50.0 Hz 4-20(1. 1) (1. 2)

2. 26 Direct frequency 0—4 1 0 0 = Analog voltage input (term. 2) 4-20reference, source B 1 = Analog current input (term. 4)

2 = Set reference from the panel (reference r1)3 = Signal from internal motor pot.4 = Signal from internal motor pot. reset if HV9000 stopped

2. 27 Source B reference 0— 1 Hz 0 Hz Selects the frequency that 4-20scaling minimum value par. 2. 28 corresponds to the min.

reference signal

2. 28 Source B reference 0—fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz Selects the frequency that 4-20scaling maximum value (1. 2) corresponds to the max.

reference signal0 = Scaling off>0 = Scaled maximum value


STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


4



3. 1 Analog output function 0—7 1 1 0 = Not used Scale 100% 4-211 = O/P frequency (0—fmax)2 = Motor speed (0—max. speed)3 = O/P current (0—2.0 x InHV9)4 = Motor torque (0—2 x TnMot)5 = Motor power (0—2 x PnMot)6 = Motor voltage (0—100% xVnMot)7 = DC-link volt. (0—1000 V)

3. 2 Analog output filter time 0.00—10.00 s 0.01s 1.00s 4-21




3. 6 Digital output function 0—21 1 1 0 = Not used 4-221 = Ready2 = Run3 = Fault4 = Fault inverted5 = HV9000 overheat warning6 = External fault or warning7 = Reference fault or warning8 = Warning9 = Reversed10 = Jog speed selected11 = At speed12 = Motor regulator activated13 = Output freq. limit superv. 114 = Output freq. limit superv. 215 = Torque limit supervision16 = Reference limit supervision17 = External brake control18 = Control from I/O terminals19 = Drive temperature limit





2 = High limit



STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


4



2 = High limit



2 = High limit

3. 14 Torque limit 0.0—200.0% 0.1% 100.0% 4-23supervision value xTnHV9

3. 15 Active reference limit 0—2 1 0 0 = No 4-23supervision function 1 = Low limit

2 = High limit


3. 17 External brake off-delay 0.0—100.0 s 1 0.5 s 4-23

3. 18 External brake on-delay 0.0—100.0 s 1 1.5 s 4-23

3. 19 Drive 0—2 1 0 0 = No 4-23temperature limit 1 = Low limitsupervision 2 = High limit

3. 20 Drive -10—+75°C 1 +40°C 4-23 temperature limit


3. 22 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0.00—10.00 s 0.01s 1.00s See parameter 3. 2 4-21analog output filter time













STOPO


4



4. 8 DC-braking current 0.15—1.5 x 0.1 A 0.5 x 4-25InHV9 (A) InHV9


4. 10 Turn on frequency of 0.1-10.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 1.5 Hz 4-26DC-brake at ramp Stop

4. 11 DC-brake time at Start 0.00—25.00s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off at Start 4-27

4. 12 Jog speed reference fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 10.0 Hz 4-27(1. 1) (1. 2)




5. 2 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = no prohibit frequency range 4-27range 2 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)








6. 2 Switching frequency 1.0-16.0 kHz 0.1 kHz 10/3.6kHz Depends on Hp rating 4-27

6. 3 Field weakening point 30—500 Hz 1 Hz Param. 4-28 1. 11


6. 5 V/Hz-curve mid 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 4-28point frequency

6. 6 V/Hz-curve mid 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 0.00% Parameter maximum value = 4-28point voltage x Vnmot param. 6.4

6. 7 Output voltage at 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 4-28zero frequency x Vnmot

6. 8 Overvoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is not operating 4-281 = Controller is in operation

6. 9 Undervoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is not operating 4-281 = Controller is in operation


STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


4




2 = Fault, stop according topar. 4.7

3 = Fault, always coasting stop


2 = Fault, stop according topar. 4.7











7. 12 Stall time 2.0—120.0 s 1.0 s 15.0 s 4-33



7. 15 Underload prot., field 10.0—150,.0 % 1.0% 50.0% 4-34weakening area load x TnMOTOR




4













4


2. 1 DIA2 function

1: External fault, closing contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped whenthe input is active

2: External fault, opening contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped whenthe input is not active



5: Reverse contact open = Forward If two or more inputs arecontact closed = Reverse programmed to reverse, only

one of them is required toreverse

6: Jog speed contact closed = Jog speed selected for frequencyreference.

7: Fault reset contact closed = Resets all faults8: Acc./Dec. contact closed = Stops acceleration and deceleration until

operation the contact is openedprohibited

9: DC-braking contact closed = In the stop mode, the DC-braking operatescommand until the contact is opened, see figure 4.5-1.

DC-brake current is set with parameter 4.8.

10:Motor(digital) contact closed = Reference increases until the contact is pot. UP opened

Figure 4.5-1 DIA3 as DC-brake commandinput:a) Stop-mode = ramp,b) Stop-mode = coasting

t

UD012K32

Param. 4. 10

DIA3

t

UD012K32

DIA3

RUNSTOP

Output frequency

a) DIA3 as DC-brake command input and stop-mode = Ramp

b) DIA3 as DC-brake command input and stop-mode = Coasting

RUNSTOP


4

2. 2 DIA3 function

Selections are same as in 2.1 except :

10: Motor(digital) contact closed = Reference decreases until the contact is pot. DOWN opened



2. 4, 2. 5 Vin custom setting minimum/maximum

These parameters set Vin for any input signal span within 0—10 V.


Maximum setting: Set the Vin signal to its maximum level, select parameter 2. 5,press the Enter button

Note! The parameter values can only be set with this procedure (not with arrow up/arrowdown buttons)


Parameter 2. 6 = 0, no inversion of analog Vin signal.

Parameter 2. 6 = 1, inversion of analog Vin signal.


4

%

100%

63%

Par. 2. 7

t [s]

UD009K15

Filtered signal

Unfiltered signal


Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Vin signal.A long filtering time makes driveresponse slower.See figure 4.5-2.




With these parameters you canscale the input current signal (Iin)signal range between 0—20 mA.

Minimum setting: Set the Iin

signal to its minimum level,select parameter 2. 9, press theEnter buttonMaximum setting:Set the Iin

signal to its maximum level,select parameter 2. 10, pressthe Enter button

Note! The parameter values can onlybe set with this procedure (notwith arrow up/arrow downbuttons)


Parameter 2. 11 = 0, no inversionof Iin input.

Parameter 2. 11 = 1, inversion ofIin input.

20 mA0

Par. 2. 13

Par. 2. 14

Par. 2. 9 Par. 2. 10

Par. 2. 8 = 1Iin = 4—20 mA

4 mA

Par. 2. 8 = 0Iin = 0—20 mA

UD012K28

Outputfrequency

Iin(term. 3,4)


20 mA0

Par. 2. 13

Par. 2. 14

Par. 2. 9 Par. 2. 104 mA

UD012K29

Outputfrequency

Uin(term. 3,4)


par. 2. 8 = 1Iin = 4—20 mA

par. 2. 8 = 0Iin = 0—20 mA

Figure 4.5-3 Analog input Iin scaling.


Iin[term.3,4]



4

%

100%

63%

Par. 2. 12

t [s]

UD009K30

Filtered signal

Unfiltered signal


Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Iin signal. A longfiltering time makes driveresponse slower.See figure 4.5-3.

2. 13 DIA5 function

1: External fault, closing contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the input is active

2: External fault, opening contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the input is not active



5: Reverse contact open = Forward If two or more inputs arecontact closed = Reverse programmed to reverse, only

one of them is required toreverse

6: Jog speed contact closed = Jog speed selected for freqency reference


8: Acc./Dec. contact closed = Stops acceleration and deceleration untiloperation the contact is openedprohibited


DC-brake current is set with parameter 4. 8.

2. 14 Motor potentiometer ramp time

Defines how fast the electronic motor (digital) potentiometer value changes.



4

2. 15 PI-controller reference signal

0 Analog voltage reference from terminals 2—3, e.g. a potentiometer1 Analog current reference trom terminals 4—5, e.g. a transducer.2 Panel reference is the reference set from the Reference Page (REF).

Reference r2 is the PI-controller reference, see chapter 4.7.3 Reference value is changed with digital input signals DIA2 and DIA3.

- switch in DIA2 closed = frequency reference increases- switch in DIA3 closed = frequency reference decreasesSpeed of the reference change can be set with the parameter 2. 3.

4 Same as setting 3 but the reference value is set to the minimum frequency(par. 1. 1) each time the drive is stopped. When the value of parameter 1. 5is set to 3 or 4, the value of parameter 2. 1 is automatically set to 4 andvalue of the parameter 2. 2 is automatically set to 10.

2. 16 PI-controller actual value selection2. 17 Actual value 12. 18 Actual value 2

These parameters select the PI-controller actual value.

2. 19 Actual value 1 minimum scale

Sets the minimum scaling point for Actual value 1. See figure 4.5-6.

2. 20 Actual value 1 maximum scale

Sets the maximum scaling point for Actual value 1. See figure 4.5-6.





2. 23 Error value inversion

This parameter allows you to invert the error value of the PI-controller(and thusthe the operation of the PI-controller).

0

Par. 2. 19 = -30%Par. 2. 20 = 140%

100

C h01 2K 34

100 140-30

004

100

0

Par. 2. 19 = 30%Par. 2. 20 = 80%

1008030

10.0 V20.0 mA20.0 mA

76.5(15.3 mA)

17.7(3.5 mA)

Scaledinput signal [%]

Analoginput [%]


Analoginput [%]

004

10.0 V8.03.020.0 mA16.06.0

16.88.8 20.0 mA

Figure 4.5-6 Examples of actual value scaling of PI-regulator.


4

2. 24 PI-controller minimum limit2. 25 PI-controller maximum limit

These parameter set the minimum and maximum values of the PI-controller output.Parameter value limits: par 1.1 <par. 2. 24 <par. 2. 2 5.

2. 26 Direct frequency reference. Place B

0 Analog voltage reference from terminals 2—3, e.g. a potentiometer1 Analog current reference trom terminals 4—5, e.g. a transducer.2 Panel reference is the reference set from the Reference Page (REF),

Reference r1 is the Place B reference, see chapter 6.3 Reference value is changed with digital input signals DIA2 and DIA3


4 Same as setting 3, but the reference value is set to the minimum frequency(par. 1. 1) each time the drive is stopped. When the value of the parameter1.5 is set to 3 or 4, value of the parameter 2. 1 is automatically set to 4 andvalue of the parameter 2. 2 is automatically set to 10.

2. 27 Source B reference scaling, minimum value/maximum value

2. 28 Setting limits: 0 < par. 2. 27 < par. 2. 28 < par. 1. 2.If par. 2. 28 = 0 scaling is set off.See figures 4.5-7 and 4.5-8.

(In the figures below the voltage input Vin with signal range 0—10 V is selected for source Breference)

100

Par. 2. 28

Par. 2. 27

Ch012K35

100

Outputfrequency

Analoginput [V]

M ax freq. par 1. 2

Min freq. par 1. 1

Outputfrequency

Analoginput [V]

Max freq. par 1. 2

Min freq. par 1. 1

[Hz][Hz]

Figure 4.5-7 Reference scaling. Figure 4.5-8 Reference scaling, par. 2. 28 = 0


4

3. 1 Analog output Content

See table on page 4-10.




Inverts analog output signal:max output signal = minimum set valuemin output signal = maximum set value

%

100%

63%

Par. 3. 2

t [s]

UD009K16

Filtered signal

Unfiltered signal

1.00

20 mA

4 mA

10 mA

0.50 mA

Param. 3. 5= 200%

Param. 3. 5= 100%

Param. 3. 5= 50%

12 mA

Ch012K17

Analogoutputcurrent


1.00

20 mA

4 mA

10 mA

0.50 mA

Param. 3. 5= 200%

Param. 3. 5= 100%

Param. 3. 5= 50%

Par. 3. 4 = 1

Par. 3. 4 = 0

Ch012K18

12 mA

Analogoutputcurrent


Figure 4.5-9 Analog output filtering




Defines the signal minimum tobe either 0 mA or 4 mA. Seefigure 4.5-9.




Output Max. frequency (p. 1. 2)frequencyMotor speed Max. speed (nnxfmax/fn)Output 2 x InHV9currentMotor torque 2 x TnMotMotor power 2 x PnMotMotor voltage 100% x VnMotDC-link volt. 1000 V


4





1 = Ready The drive is ready to operate2 = Run The drive operates (motor is running)3 = Fault A fault trip has occurred4 = Fault inverted a fault trip has not occurred5 = HV9000 overheat warning The heat-sink temperature exceeds +70°C6 = External fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 27 = Reference fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 1

- if analog reference is 4—20 mA and signal is <4mA8 = Warning Always if a warning exists (see Table 7.10-1 in Users'

manual9 = Reversed The reverse command has been selected10= Jog speed Jog speed has been selected with digital input11 = At speed The output frequency has reached the set reference12= Motor regulator activated Overvoltage or overcurrent regulator was activated13= Output frequency supervision 1 The output frequency goes outside of the set supervision



Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 13 and 3. 14)16= Active reference Active reference goes outside of the set supervision

limit supervision Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 15 and 3. 16)17= External brake control External brake ON/OFF control with programmable delay

(par 3. 17 and 3. 18)18= Control from I/O terminals External control mode selected with progr. push-button #219= Drive Temperature on drive goes outside the set

temperature limit supervision supervision limits (par. 3. 19 and 3. 20)20= Unrequested rotation direction Rotation direction of the motor shaft is different from the

requested one21 = External brake control inverted External brake ON/OFF control (par. 3.18 and 3.18)




If the output frequency goes under/over the set limit (3. 10, 3. 12) this function generatesa warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1 or RO2depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8.


The frequency value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 9 (3. 11).

See figure 4.5-12.



4



If the calculated torque value goesunder/over the set limit (3. 14) thisfunction generates a warningmessage via the digital output DO1or via a relay output RO1 or RO2depending on the settings of theparameters 3. 6—3. 8.


The calculated torque value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 13.



If the reference value goes under/over the set limit (3. 16) this function generates awarning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1 orRO2 depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8. The supervisedreference is the current active reference. It can be source A or B reference dependingon DIB6 input or panel reference if panel is the active control place.

3. 16 Reference limit , supervision valueThe frequency value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 15.



The brake control signal can be programmed via the digital output DO1 or via one ofthe relay outputs RO1 and RO2, see parameters 3. 6—3. 8.



If the temperature of the drive goes under/over the set limit (3. 20) this functiongenerates a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1or RO2 depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8.


The temperature value to be supervised by parameter 3. 19.

Par 3. 10

f[Hz]

t

21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1

21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1

21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1

UD009K19

Example:

Par. 3.9 = 2



4




[Hz]

[t]

4. 1 (4. 2)

4. 1 (4. 2)

UD009K20

1. 3, 1. 4(4. 3, 4. 4)

Figure 4.5-13 External brake control: a) Start/Stop logic selection par. 2. 1 = 0, 1 or 2b)Start/Stop logic selection par. 2. 1 = 3.


These values correspond to the time required for the output frequency to acceleratefrom the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency(par. 1. 2). With this parameter it is possibile to set two different acceleration/deceleration times for one application. The active set can be selected with theprogrammable signal DIA3 of this application, see parameter 2. 2.

tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18

tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18

t

a)

t

b)

UD012K45

DIA1: RUN FWD

STOP

External

BRAKE: OFF


DIA2: RUN REV

STOP

DIA1: START

PULSE

External

BRAKE: OFF


DIA2: STOP

PULSE

Setting 0.1—10 seconds for 4. 1(4. 2) causes an S-shaped ramp.The speed changes are smooth.Parameter 1. 3/ 1. 4 (4. 3/ 4. 4)determines the ramp time of theacceleration/deceleration in themiddle of the curve.See figure 4.5-14.



4

4. 5 Brake chopper


When the drive is decelerating the motor, the energy stored in the inertia of themotor and the load is fed into the external brake resistor. If the brake resistor isselected correctly the drive is able to decelerate the load with a torque equal tothat of acceleration. See the separate Brake resistor installation manual.

4. 6 Start function

Ramp:

0 The drive starts from 0 Hz and accelerates to the set reference frequencywithin the set acceleration time. (Load inertia or starting friction may extendthe acceleration times).

Flying start:

1 The drive starts into a running motor by first finding the speed the motor isrunning at. Searching starts from the maximum frequency down until theactual frequency reached. The output frequency then accelerates/decelerates to the set reference value at a rate determined by theacceleration/deceleration ramp parameters.


4. 7 Stop function

Coasting:


Ramp:

1 After the Stop command, the speed of the motor is decelerated according tothe deceleration ramp time parameter. If the regenerated energy is high itmay be necessary to use an external braking resistor for fasterdeceleration.


Defines the current injected into the motor during the DC braking.


Defines if braking is ON or OFF and the braking time of the DC-brake when the motoris stopping. The function of the DC-brake depends on the stop function, parameter4. 7. See figure 4.5-15.


>0 DC-brake is in use and its function depends on the Stop function, (param. 4.7), and the time depends on the value of parameter 4. 9:


4




The braking time is scaled according to the frequency when the DC-braking starts. If the frequency is >nominal frequency of the motor (par. 1.11),setting value of parameter 4.9 determines the braking time. When the frequencyis <10% of the nominal, the braking time is 10% of the set value of parameter 4.9.

t = param. 4. 9

t

Param. 4. 10

fout

UD009K23

Motor speed

Output frequency

DC-braking

RUNSTOP


See figure 4.5-16.


After the stop command, the speed of the motor is reduced based on the decelera-tion ramp parameter, if no regeneration occurs due to load inertia, to a speed de-fined with parameter 4. 10 where the DC-braking starts.

The braking time is defined with parameter 4. 9.

If high inertia exists it is recommended to use an external braking resistor forfaster deceleration. See figure 4.5-16.

fn fn

t t

t = 1 x par. 4. 9 t = 0,1 x par. 4. 9

UD012K21

0,1 x fn

RUN

STOP

RUN

STOP

Output frequency

Motor speed

Output frequency

Motor speed

DC-braking ON

DC-braking ON

fout fout[Hz] [Hz]

[Hz]




4



>0 DC-brake is active whenthe start command isgiven. This parameter de-fines the time before thebrake is released. After thebrake is released theoutput frequency increasesaccording to the set startfunction parameter 4. 6and the accelerationparameters (1. 3, 4. 1 or 4.2, 4. 3). See figure 4.5-17.

t

UD012K22

Par 4. 11

RUNSTOP

Output frequency


Parameter value defines the Jog speed selected with the digital input.

5. 1- 5.6 Prohibit frequency area,Low limit/High limit


With these parameters it ispossible to set limits for three "skipfrequency" regions. The accuracyof the setting is 0.1 Hz.

5. 1 5. 25. 3 5. 45. 5 5. 6

UD012K33

Reference [Hz]



0 = Frequency control: The I/O terminal and panel references are frequencyreferences and the drive controls the output frequency(output freq. resolution 0.01 Hz)

1 = Speed control: The I/O terminal and panel references are speedreferences and the drive controls the motor speed(control accuracy ± 0.5%).


Motor noise can be minimized using a high switching frequency. Increasing thefrequency reduces the capacity of the HV9000.Before changing the frequency from the factory default 10 kHz (3.6 kHz >40 Hp)check the drive derating in the curves shown in figures 5.2-2 and 5.2-3 in chapter5.2 of the User's Manual.

fout [Hz]

(V/Hz)

(sensorless vector)

Figure 4.5-18 Example of prohibit frequencyarea setting



4


The field weakening point is the output frequency where the output voltage reachesthe set maximum value (par. 6. 4). Above that frequency the output voltage remainsat the set maximum value. Below that frequency output voltage depends on the settingof the V/Hz curve parameters 1. 8, 1. 9, 6. 5, 6. 6 and 6. 7. See figure 4.5-19.

When parameters 1. 10 and 1. 11, nominal voltage and nominal frequency of themotor are set, parameters 6. 3 and 6. 4 are also set automatically to thecorresponding values. If you need different values for the field weakening point andthe maximum output voltage, change these parameters after setting parameters 1.10 and 1. 11.


If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, this parameterdefines the middle point frequency of the curve. See figure 4.5-19.

6. 6 VHz curve, middle point voltage

If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, this parameterdefines the middle point voltage (% of motor nominal voltage) of the curve. See figure4.5-19.


If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8 this parameterdefines the zero frequency voltage of the curve. See figure 4.5-19..



U[V]V

n

Parameter6.4





Figure 4.5-19 Programmable V/Hz curve



Over/undervoltage trips may occur when the controllers are not used.


4












Ground fault protection ensures that the sum of the motor phase currents is zero.The ground protection is always working and protects the frequency converter fromground faults with high current levels.


General

Motor thermal protection is to protect the motor from overheating. The HV9000drive is capable of supplying higher than nominal current to the motor. If the loadrequires this high current there is a risk that the motor will be thermally over-loaded. This is true especially at low frequencies. With low frequencies thecooling effect of the motor fan is reduced and the capacity of the motor is re-duced. If the motor is equipped with an external fan, the load derating on lowspeed is small.

Motor thermal protection is based on a calculated model and it uses the outputcurrent of the drive to determine the load on the motor. When the power is turnedon to the drive, the calculated model uses the heatsink temperature to determinethe initial thermal state of the motor. The calculated model assumes that the am-bient temperature of the motor is 40°C.

Motor thermal protection can be adjusted by setting several parameters. Thethermal current IT specifies the load current above which the motor is overloaded.


4

This current limit is a function of the output frequency. The curve for IT is set withparameters 7. 6, 7. 7 and 7. 9, refer to the figure 4.5-20. The default values ofthese parameters are set from the motor nameplate data.

With the output current at IT the thermal state will reach the nominal value (100%).The thermal state changes with the square of the current. With output current at75% of IT the thermal state will reach 56% and with output current at 120% of IT

the thermal stage would reach 144%. The function will trip the drive (refer par. 7.5) if the thermal model reaches a value of 105%. The response time of thethermal model is determined by the time constant parameter 7. 8. The larger themotor, the longer it takes to reach the final temperature.



Operation:


Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is selected , the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.




The value is set as a percentage of the motor nameplate nominal current, parameter1. 13, not the drive's nominal output current.



Setting this parameter (or parameter 1. 13) does not affect the maximum outputcurrent of the drive. Parameter 1. 7 alone determines the maximum output currentof the drive.


The current can be set between 10.0—150.0% x InMotor. This parameter sets thevalue for thermal current at zero frequency. See figure 4.5-20.


!CAUTION! The calculated model does not protect the motor if the cooling

of the motor is reduced either by blocking the airflow or due todust or dirt.


4

Par. 7. 6

Par. 7. 7

IT

f

par. 1. 7

I

UMCH7_91Par. 7. 9

Overload area

Currentlimit

The value is set as a percentagevalue of the motor's nameplatenominal current, parameter 1. 13,not the drive's nominal outputcurrent. The motor's nominalcurrent is the current which themotor can stand in direct on-lineuse without being overheated.

If you change the parameter 1. 13this parameter is automaticallyrestored to the default value.

Setting this parameter (orparameter 1. 13) does not affectto the maximum output current ofthe drive. Parameter 1. 7 alonedetermines the maximum outputcurrent of the drive.

. 7. 8 Motor thermal protection, time constant

This time can be set between 0.5—300 minutes.This is the thermal time constant of the motor. The larger the motor the greaterthe time constant. The time constant is defined as the time that it takes thecalculated thermal state to reach 63% of its final value.

The motor thermal time is specific to a motor design and it varies betweendifferent motor manufacturers.

The default value for the time constant is calculated based on the motornameplate data from parameters 1. 12 and 1. 13. If either of these parameters isreset, then this parameter is set to default value.

If the motor's t6 -time is known (given by the motor manufacturer) the timeconstant parameter could be set based on t6 -time. As a rule of thumb, the motorthermal time constant in minutes equals to 2xt6 (t6 in seconds is the time a motorcan safely operate at six times the rated current). If the drive is stopped the timeconstant is internally increased to three times the set parameter value. Thecooling in the stop stage is based on convection with an increased time constant.


This frequency can be set between 10—500 Hz.This is the frequency break point of the thermal current curve. With frequenciesabove this point, the thermal capacity of the motor is assumed to be constant.See figure 4.5-20.

The default value is based on the motor's nameplate data, parameter 1. 11. It is35 Hz for a 50 Hz motor and 42 Hz for a 60 Hz motor. More generally it is 70% ofthe frequency at the field weakening point (parameter 6. 3). Changing either pa-rameter 1. 11 or 6. 3 will restore this parameter to its default value.

Figure 4.5-20 Motor thermal current IT curve

[Hz]


4

105%

par. 7. 5

Θ = (I/IT)2 x (1-e-t/T)

I/IT

UMCH7_92

Trip area

Motor temperature


Time constant T*)





Motor stall protection protects the motor from short time overload situations like astalled shaft. The reaction time of stall protection can be set shorter than withmotor thermal protection. The stall state is defined with two parameters, 7.11.Stall Current and 7.13. Stall Frequency. If the current is higher than the set limitand output frequency is lower than the set limit the stall state is true. There is notrue detection of shaft rotation. Stall protection is a type of overcurrent protection.



In the stall stage the current hasto be above this limit. See figure4.5-22. The value is set as apercentage of the motor's name-plate nominal current, parameter1.13, motor's nominal current. Ifparameter 1.13 is adjusted, thisparameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value.


Operation:


Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is set on, the drive will stop and activate the fault stage. Setting the parameterto 0 will deactivate the protection and will reset the stall time counter to zero.

f

I

Par. 7. 11

Par. 7. 13 UMCH7_11

Stall area

[Hz]



4

7. 12 Stall time

The time can be set between 2.0—120 s.This is the maximum allowed time for a stall. There is an internal up/down counterto count the stall time. See figure 4.5-23. If the stall time counter value goes abovethis limit the protection will cause a trip (refer to parameter 7. 10).

Par. 7. 12

UMCH7_12

Trip area

Time

Stall time counter

StallNo stall



The purpose of motor underload protection is to ensure that there is load on themotor while the drive is running. If the motor load is reduced, there might be aproblem in the process, e.g. broken belt or dry pump.

Motor underload protection can be adjusted by setting the underload curve withparameters 7. 15 and 7. 16. The underload curve is a squared curve set betweenzero frequency and the field weakening point. The protection is not active below 5Hz (the underload counter value is stopped). See figure 4.5-24.

The torque values for setting the underload curve are set with percentage valueswhich refer to the nominal torque of the motor. The motor's nameplate data,parameter 1. 13, the motor's nominal current and the drive's nominal current ICT

are used to find the scaling ratio for the internal torque value. If other than astandard motor is used with the drive, the accuracy of the torque calculation isdecreased.


Operation:





The frequency can be set between1—fmax (par. 1. 2).In the stall state, the outputfrequency has to be smaller thanthis limit. Refer to figure 4.5-22.



4


Torque limit can be set between20.0—150 % x TnMotor.

This parameter is the value forthe minimum allowed torquewhen the output frequency isabove the field weakening point.See figure 4.5-24.If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted,this parameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value.


Torque limit can be set between 10.0—150 % x TnMotor.

This parameter is the value for the minimum allowed torque with zero frequency.See figure 4.5-24. If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted this parameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value.


This time can be set between2.0—600.0 s.

This is the maximum allowedtime for an underload state.There is an internal up/downcounter to accumulate theunderload time. See figure 4.5-25.If the underload counter valuegoes above this limit, the protec-tion will cause a trip (refer to theparameter 7. 14). If the drive isstopped, the underload counter isreset to zero.

Par. 7. 17

UMCH7_17

Trip area

Time


Underl.No underl.



The Automatic restart function restarts the drive after the faults selected withparameters 8. 4—8. 8. The Start function for Automatic restart is selected withparameter 8. 3. See figure 4.5-26.

Par. 7. 15

ChCH7_15

Par. 7. 16

f5 Hz

Underload area

Torque


f [Hz]




4


The time counting starts from the first autorestart. If the number of restarts doesnot exceed the value of the parameter 8. 1 during the trial time, the counting iscleared after the trial time has elapsed. The next fault starts the counting again.





0 = No automatic restart after undervoltage trip1 = Automatic restart after undervoltage fault condition returns to normal

(DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)


0 = No automatic restart after overvoltage trip1 = Automatic restart after overvoltage fault condition returns to normal

(DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)


0 = No automatic restart after overcurrent trip1 = Automatic restart after overcurrent faults


0 = No automatic restart after reference fault trip1 = Automatic restart after analog current reference signal (4—20 mA)

returns to the normal level (>4 mA)


0 = No automatic restart after temperature fault trip1 = Automatic restart after the heatsink temperature has returned to its

normal level between -10°C—+75°C.

4

3

2

1

t

UD012K25


RUNSTOP


ttrial ttrial

Par. 8. 1 = 3ttrial = Par. 8. 2



4

4.6 Panel reference

The PI-control application has an extra reference (r2) for the PI-controller on the panel's refer-ence page. See table 4.6-1.

Reference Reference Range Step Functionnumber name

r 1 Frequency fmin—fmax 0.01 Hz Reference for panel control andreference I/O terminal Source B reference.

r 2 PI-controller 0—100% 0.1% Reference for PI-controllerreference

4.7 Monitoring data

The PI-control application has additional items for monitoring. See table 4.7-1

Number Data name Unit Description

n 1 Output frequency Hz Frequency to the motor

n 2 Motor speed rpm Calculated motor speed

n 3 Motor current A Measured motor current

n 4 Motor torque % Calculated actual torque/nominal torque of the unit

n 5 Motor power % Calculated actual power/nominal power of the unit

n 6 Motor voltage V Calculated motor voltage

n 7 DC-link voltage V Measured DC-link voltage

n 8 Temperature °C Temperature of the heat sink

n 9 Operating day counter DD.dd Operating days 1, not resettable

n 10 Operating hours, HH.hh Operating hours 2, can be reset with program-"trip counter" mable button #3

n 11 MW-hours MWh Total MW-hours, not resettable

n 12 MW-hours, MWh MW-hours, can be reset with programmable"trip counter" button #4

n 13 Voltage/analog input V Voltage at the terminal Vin+ (term. #2)

n 14 Current/analog input mA Current at terminals Iin+ and Iin- (term. #4, #5)

n 15 Digital input status, gr. A

n 16 Digital input status, gr. B

n 17 Digital and relay outputstatus

n 18 Control program Version number of the control software

n 19 Unit nominal power Hp Shows the horsepower size of the unit

n 20 PI-controller reference % Percent of the maximum reference

n 21 PI-controller actual value % Percent of the maximum actual value

n 22 PI-controller error value % Percent of the maximum error value

n 23 PI-controller output Hz

n 24 Motor temperature rise % 100%= temperature of motor has risen to nominal

1 DD = full days, dd = decimal part of a dayTable 4.7-1 Monitored items. 2 HH = full hours, hh = decimal part of an hour


4

Notes:


4

This page intentionally left blank

Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-1

5

MULTI-PURPOSE CONTROL APPLICATION(par. 0.1 = 6)

CONTENTS

5 Multi-purpose Control Application ...... 5-1

5.1 General ............................................. 5-25.2 Control I/O ........................................ 5-25.3 Control signal logic ........................... 5-35.4 Parameters Group 1 ........................ 5-4

5.4.1 Parameter table ...................... 5-45.4.2 Description of Group1 par. ...... 5-5

5.5 Special parameters, Groups 2-8 ...... 5-95.5.1 Parameter tables ..................... 5-95.5.2 Description of Group 2 par. ... 5-16

Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-2 HV9000

5


5.2 Control I/O

READY

RUN

220VACMax.

FAULT

these functions.

Digital inputs DIA1 and DIA2 are reserved forStart/stop logic. Digital inputs DIA3—DIB6 areprogrammable for multi-step speed select, jogspeed select, motorized (digital potentiometer,external fault, ramp time select, ramp prohibit,fault reset and DC-brake command function.All outputs are freely programmable.

5 Multi-purpose Control Application

5.1 GeneralIn the Multi-purpose control application thefrequency reference can be selected from theanalog inputs, the joystick control, themotorized (digital) potentiometer and amathematical function of the analog inputs.Multi-step speeds and jog speed can also beselected if digital inputs are programmed for



2 Vin+ Analog input, Frequency referencevoltage (programmable) range 0—10 V DC


4 Iin+ Analog input, Default setting: not used




8 DIA1 Start forward Contact closed = start forward(programmable)






14 DIB4 Jog speed select Contact open = no action(programmable) Contact closed = jog speed

15 DIB5 External fault Contact open = no fault(programmable) Contact closed = fault

16 DIB6 Accel./deceler. time select Contact open = par. 1.3, 1.4 in use(programmable) Contact closed = par. 4.3, 4.4 in use



19 Iout- Analog output Range 0—20 mA/RL max. 500 Ω20 DO1 Digital output Programmable (par. 3. 6)



22 RO1 RUN

23 RO1


25 RO2 FAULT

26 RO2

Figure 5.2-1 Default I/O configuration and connection example of theMulti-purpose Control Application.


5



Figure 5.3-1 Control signal logic of the Multipurpose Control Application.Switch positions shown are based on the factory settings.

!" #$! #

%&'

!()

*)

+(#& &(, +(),- (,

&-.%&' /(*)),- (&-,#

0112 (

1,)')'/)3!( $(&!4(, ')('&-/!&(5,)! #,& 6

7&$),#8#& &

7&$),#8#& &

1&&,9/'& ,&! #

7&-()'/()#,&

3'&-:6

1((((! #()#,& (((7&-()'/(!.

'

&;

3'&-:6<()

= (!3'&-:6

##.%/#.(,()#3'&-:6

(>.

(<

>, ?

, @

>, (?((, >, ((((, ( , (((>, >, (=(( ,


5

5.4 Basic parameters, Group 15.4.1 Parameter table


1. 1 Minimum frequency 0— fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz 5-5

1. 2 Maximum frequency fmin-120/500Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz * 5-5



1. 5 Reference selection 0—9 1 0 0 = Vin 3 = Vin - Iin 5-51 = Iin 4 = Iin - Vin2 = Vin + Iin 5 = Vin * Iin6 = Vin joystick control7 = Iin joystick control8 = Signal from internal motor pot.9 = Signal from internal motor pot. reset if HV9000 is stopped

1. 6 Jog speed fmin —fmax 0.1 Hz 5.0 Hz 5-6reference (1. 1) (1. 2)















Note! = Parameter value can be changedonly when the drive is stopped.


* If 1. 2 >motor synchr. speed, check suitability for motor and drive system. Selecting 120/500 Hz range see page 5-5.

** Default value for a four pole motor anda nominal size drive.

*** Up to M10. Bigger classes case bycase.

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


5



Defines frequency limits of the drive.The default maximum value for parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 is 120 Hz. By setting 1. 2 =120 Hz when the drive is stopped (RUN indicator not lit) parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 arechanged to 500 Hz. At the same time the panel reference resolution is changed from0.01 Hz to 0.1 Hz.Changing the max. value from 500 Hz to 120 Hz is done by setting parameter1. 2 = 119 Hz when the drive is stopped.


These limits correspond to the time required for the output frequency toaccelerate from the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximumfrequency (par. 1. 2).

1. 5 Reference selection

0 Analog voltage reference from terminals 2—3, e.g. a potentiometer1 Analog current reference trom terminals 4—5, e.g. a transducer.2 Reference is formed by adding the values of the analog inputs3 Reference is formed by subtracting the voltage input (Vin) value from the

current input (Iin) value.4 Reference is formed by subtracting the current input (Iin ) value from the

voltage input (Vin) value.5 Reference is formed by multiplying the values of the analog inputs6 Joystick control from the voltage input (Vin).

Signal range Max reverse Direction change Max forwardspeed speed

0—10 V 0 V 5 V +10 VCustom Par. 2. 7 x 10V In the middle of Par. 2. 8 x 10 V

custom range-10 V—+10 V -10 V 0 V +10 V

Warning! Use only -10V—+10 V signal range. If a custom or 0—10 V signalrange is used, the drive will run at the max. reverse speed if thereference signal is lost.

7 Joystick control from the current input (Iin).

Signal range Max reverse Direction change Max forwardspeed speed

0—20 mA 0 mA 10 mA 20 mACustom Par. 2. 13 x 20 mA In the middle of Par. 2. 14 x 20 mA

custom range4—20 mA 4 mA 12 mA 20 mA

Warning! Use only 4—20 mA signal range. If a custom or 0—20 mA signal rangeis used, the drive will run at the max. reverse speed if the control signalis lost. Set the reference fault (par. 7. 2) active when the 4—20 mA rangeis used, then the drive will stop with a reference fault if the referencesignal is lost.

!

!


5

Note! When joystick control is used, the direction control is generated from thejoystick reference signal. See figure 5.4-1.

Analog input scaling, parameters 2. 16—2. 19 are not used when joystickcontrol is used.

Fout

Uin

hystereesi +/-2% (+/-0,2 V)

+10V

-10V

Fmax(par 1.2)

Fmin.(par 1.1)

Fmin.(par 1.1)

Fmax(par 1.2)

Fout

UinUin

+10V

-10V

Fmax(par 1.2)

Fmax(par 1.2)

If minimum frequency (par 1. 1) >0, If minimum frequency (par 1. 1) = 0,hysteresis is ± 2% at reversing point. there is no hysteresis at reversing point.

8 Reference value is changed with digital input signals DIA4 and DIA5.- switch in DIA3 closed = frequency reference increases- switch in DIA4 closed = frequency reference decreasesSpeed of the reference change can be set with the parameter 2. 20.

9 Same as setting 8 but the reference value is set to the minimum frequency(par. 1. 1) each time the HV9000 is stopped.When the value of parameter 1. 5 is set to 8 or 9, the value of parameters2. 4 and 2. 5 are automatically set to 11.


Parameter value defines the jog speed selected with the digital input

1. 7 Current limit

This parameter determines the maximum motor current that the HV9000 will provideshort term.


Linear: The voltage of the motor changes linearly with the frequency in the0 constant flux area from 0 Hz to the field weakening point (par. 6. 3)

where a constant voltage (nominal value) is also supplied to the motor.See figure 5.4.-2. A linear V/Hz ratio should be used in constant torqueapplications.


fout [Hz]fout [Hz]

VinVin

Fig. 5.4-1 Joystick control Vin signal -10 V—+10 V.


5

Squared: The voltage of the motor changes following a squared curve form 1 with the frequency in the area from 0 Hz to the field weakening

point (par. 6. 3) where the nominal voltage is also supplied tothe motor. See figure 5.4.-2.

The motor runs undermagnetized below the field weakening pointand produces less torque and electromechanical noise. A squaredV/Hz ratio can be used in applications where the torque demand ofthe load is proportional to the square of the speed, e.g. in centrifugalfans and pumps.

Programm. The V/Hz curve can be programmed with three different points.V/Hz curve The parameters for programming are explained in chapter 1.5.2.

2 A programmable V/Hz curve can be used if the standard settings donot satisfy the needs of the application. See figure 5.4.-3.


U[V]V

n

Parameter6.4



V [V]



Linear

Squared


f [Hz]

Figure 5.4.-2 Linear and squared V/Hz curves.




5


Automatic The voltage to the motor changes automatically which makes thetorque motor produce sufficient torque to start and run at low frequencies. Theboost voltage increase depends on the motor type and horsepower.


NOTE! In high torque - low speed applications - it is likely the motor willoverheat.If the motor has to run prolonged time under these conditions,special attention must be paid to cooling the motor. Use externalcooling for the motor if the temperature rise is too high.




Find the nominal frequency fn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the frequency of the field weakening point, parameter 6. 3, tothe same value.









0 = all parameter groups are visible1 = only group 1 is visible




To adjust more of the functions of the Multi-purpose application, see chapter 5.5 tomodify the parameters of Groups 2—8.

!


5

5.5 Special parameters, Groups 2—85.5.1 Parameter tables



DIA1 DIA2

2. 1 Start/Stop logic 0—3 1 0 0 = Start forward Start reverse 5-16selection 1= Start/Stop Reverse





2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acc./dec. time selection5 = Reverse6 = Jog speed7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command10 = Multi-Step speed select 1


2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acc./dec. time selection5 = Reverse6 = Jog speed7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command10 = Multi-Step speed select 211 = Motorized pot. speed up


2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acc./dec. time selection5 = Reverse6 = Jog speed7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command10 = Multi-Step speed select 311 = Motorized pot. speed down

2. 6 Vin signal range 0—2 1 0 0 = 0—10 V 5-191 = Custom setting range2 = -10—+10 V (can be used only with Joystick control)


STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


5





2. 10 Vin signal filter time 0.00 —10.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s 0 = No filtering 5-19





2. 15 Iin signal filter time 0.01 —10.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s 0 = No filtering 5-20

2. 16 Vin minimum scaling -320.00%— 0.01 0.00% 0% = no minimum scaling 5-20+320.00 %

2. 17 Vin maximum scaling -320.00%— 0.01 100.00% 100% = no maximum scaling 5-20+320.00 %

2. 18 Iin minimum scaling -320.00%— 0.01 0.00% 0% = no minimum scaling 5-20+320.00% .

2. 19 Iin maximum scaling -320.00%— 0.01 100.00% 100% = no maximum scaling 5-20+320.00 %

2. 20 Free analog input, 0—2 1 0 0 = Not use 5-21signal selection 1 = Vin (analog voltage input)


2. 21 Free analog input, 0—4 1 0 0 = No function 5-21function 1 = Reduces current limit (par. 1.7)

2 = Reduces DC-braking current3 = Reduces acc. and decel. times4 = Reduces torque supervis. limit

2. 22 Motorized digital 0.1—2000.0 0.1 10.0 5-22potentiometer ramp time Hz/s Hz/s Hz/s



3. 1 Analog output function 0—7 1 1 0 = Not used Scale 100% 5-231 = O/P frequency(0—fmax)2 = Motor speed (0—max. speed)3 = O/P current (0—2.0 x InHV9)4 = Motor torque (0—2 x TnMot)5 = Motor power (0—2 x PnMot)6 = Motor voltage (0—100% x VnMot)7 = DC-link volt. (0—1000 V)

3. 2 Analog output filter time 0.00-10.00s 0.01 s 1.00 s 5-23





STOPO


5







2 = High limit



2 = High limit



2 = High limit

3. 14 Torque limit -200.0—200.0% 0.1% 100.0% 5-25supervision value xTnHV9

3. 15 Reference limit 0—2 1 0 0 = No 5-25supervision function 1 = Low limit

2 = High limit

3. 16 Reference limit 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 5-25supervision value (par. 1. 2)

3. 17 Extern. brake Off-delay 0.0—100.0 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 5-25

3. 18 Extern. brake On-delay 0.0—100.0 s 0.1 s 1.5 s 5-25

3. 19 Drive 0—2 1 0 0 = No 5-25temperature limit 1 = Low limitsupervision function 2 = High limit

3. 20 Drive -10—+75°C 1°C +40°C 5-25temperature limit value


STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


5


3. 21 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—7 1 3 See parameter 3. 1 5-23analog output content

3. 22 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0.00—10.00 s 0.01 1.00 s See parameter 3. 2 5-23analog output filter time













4. 8 DC-braking current 0.15—1.5 0.1 A 0.5 x InHV9 5-27 x InHV9 (A)


4. 10 Execute frequency of DC- 0.1—10.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 1.5 Hz 5-29brake during ramp Stop

4. 11 DC-brake time at Start 0.00-25.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off at Start 5-29









STOPO


5












6. 2 Switching frequency 1.0—16.0 kHz 0.1 kHz 10/3.6 kHz Depends on Hp rating 5-30




6. 6 V/Hz curve mid 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 0.00 % Parameter maximum value = 5-30point voltage x Vnmot param. 6.4

6. 7 Output voltage at 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 0.00 % 5-30zero frequency x Vnmot

6. 8 Overvoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is not operating 5-311 = Controller is operating

6. 9 Undervoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is not operating 5-311 = Controller is operating


STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


5




2 = Fault, stop according to par 4.7



2 = Fault, stop according topar 4.7











7. 12 Stall time 2.0—120.0 s 1.0 s 15.0 s 5-35







5




8. 2 Automatic restart:multi 1—6000 s 1 s 30 s 5-37attempt maximum trial time


8. 4 Automatic restart of 0—1 1 0 0 = No 5-38undervoltage 1 = Yes

8. 5 Automatic restart of 0—1 1 0 0 = No 5-38overvoltage 1 = Yes

8. 6 Automatic restart of 0—1 1 0 0 = No 5-38overcurrent 1 = Yes

8. 7 Automatic restart of 0—1 1 0 0 = No 5-38reference fault 1 = Yes

8. 8 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 5-38over/undertemperature 1 = Yesfault



5




DIA1

DIA2

1 2 3

t

UD009K09

Output frequency


FWD

REV





DIA1

DIA2

t

UD012K10

Output frequency


FWD

REV


Figure 5.5-2 Start, Stop,reverse.


5




2. 2 DIA3 function






6: Jog speed. contact closed = Jog speed selected for freq. reference


8: Acc./Dec.operation contact closed = Stops acceleration or deceleration untilprohibited the contact is opened

9: DC-brakingcommand contact closed = In Stop mode, the DC-braking operates until

the contact is opened, see figure 5.5-4. DC-brake current is set with parameter 4. 8.

t

min 50 ms

UD009K11

FWD

REV

Output frequency



DIA1Start

DIA2Stop



5

2. 3 DIB4 function

Selections are same as in 2. 2 except :

10: Multi-Step contact closed = Selection 1 active speed select 1

2. 4 DIB5 function


10: Multi-Step contact closed = Selection 2 active speed select 2

11: Motor pot. contact closed= Reference decreases until the contact is UP opened

2. 5 DIB6 function


10: Multi-Step contact closed= Selection 3 active speed select 3

11: Motor pot. contact closed= Reference decreases until the contact is DOWN opened

t

UD012K32

Param. 4. 10

DIA3

t

UD012K32

DIA3

RUNSTOP

Output frequency

a) DIA3 as DC-brake command input and stop-mode = Ramp

b) DIA3 as DC-brake command input and stop-mode = Coasting

RUNSTOP

Figure 5.5-4 DIA3 as DC-brake command input: a) Stop-mode = Ramp,b) Stop-mode = Coasting.


5


0 = Signal range 0—+10 V1 = Custom setting range from custom minimum (par. 2. 7) to custommaximum (par. 2. 8)2 = Signal range -10—+10 V , can be used only with Joystick control

2. 7 Vin custom setting minimum/maximum

2. 8 With these parameters, Vin can be set for any input signal span within 0—10 V.

Minimum setting: Set the Vin signal to its minimum level, select parameter 2. 7, pressthe Enter button

Maximum setting:Set the Vin signal to its maximum level, select parameter 2. 8, pressthe Enter button

Note! These parameters can only be set with this procedure (not with arrow up/arrowdown buttons)


Parameter 2. 9 = 0, no inversionof analog Vin signal.

Parameter 2. 9 = 1, inversion ofanalog Vin signal.


Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Vin signal. A longfiltering time makes driveresponse slower. See figure 5.5-5.

%

100%

63%

Par. 2. 10

t [s]

UD009K37

Filtered signal

Unfiltered signal



5




With these parameters, the scaling of the input current signal (Iin) range can beset between 0—20 mA.

Minimum setting: Set the Iin signal to its minimum level, select parameter 2. 12, pressthe Enter button

Maximum setting:Set the Iin signal to its maximum level, select parameter 2. 13,press the Enter button

Note! These parameters can only be set with this procedure (not with arrow up/arrowdown buttons)

%

100%

63%

Par. 2. 15

t [s]

UD012K40

Filtered signal

Unfiltered signal


2. 16 Vin signal minimum scalingSets the minimum scaling point for Vin signal. See figure 5.5-7.

2. 17 Vin signal maximum scaling

Sets the maximum scaling point for Vin signal. See figure 5.5-7.

2. 18 Iin signal minimum scaling

Sets the minimum scaling point for Iin signal. See figure 5.5-7.

2. 19 Iin signal maximum scaling

Sets the maximum scaling point for Iin signal. See figure 5.5-7.


Parameter 2. 14 = 0, noinversion of Iin inputParameter 2. 14 = 1, inversionof Iin input.


Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Iin signal. A longfiltering time makes driveresponse slower. See figure 5.5-6.


5


Selection of input signal of free analog input (an input not used for referencesignal):


2. 21 Free analog input signalfunction

This parameter sets the functionof the free analog input:

0 = Function is not used

1 = Reducing motor current limit(par. 1. 7)

This signal will adjust themaximum motor currentbetween 0 and parameter1. 7 set max. limit.See figure 5.5-8.

2 = Reducing DC brake current.

The DC braking current can bereduced, with the free analoginput signal, between 0.15xInHV9and current set by parameter4. 8.See figure 5.5-9.

100%Par. 1. 7

Ch012K61

Torque limit

Analoginput



0

100%Par. 4. 8

Ch012K58

DC-brakingcurrent

Free analoginput

Signal range

0

Par. 2. 19 = -30%Par. 2. 20 = 140%

100

C h012 K 34

100 140-30

004

100

0

Par. 2. 19 = 30%Par. 2. 20 = 80%

1008030

10.0 V20.0 mA20.0 mA

76.5(15.3 mA)

17.7(3.5 mA)


Analoginput [%]


Analoginput [%]

004

10.0 V8.03.020.0 mA16.06.0

16.88.8 20.0 mA

Figure 5.5-7 Examples of the scaling of Vin and Iin inputs .

Figure 5.5-8 Reducing the max. motor current.

Figure 5.5-9 Reducing the DC brake current.


5

3 Reducing acceleration anddeceleration times.

The acceleration anddeceleration times can bereduced with the free analoginput signal, according to thefollowing formula:

Reduced time = set acc./deceltime (par. 1. 3, 1. 4; 4. 3, 4. 4)divided by the factor R fromfigure 5.5-10.

4 Reducing torque supervisionlimit.

The set torque supervision limitcan be reduced with the freeanalog input signal between 0and set supervision limit (par. 3.14), see figure 5.5-11.



10

1

Ch012K59

2

Factor R

Free analoginput

Signal range

0

100%Par. 3. 14

Ch012K60

Torque limit

Free analoginput

Signal range

Figure 5.5-10 Reducing acceleration anddeceleration times.

Figure 5.5-11 Reducing torque supervisionlimit.


5












Output fre- Max. frequency (p. 1. 2)quencyMotor speed Max. speed (nnxfmax/fn)Output 2 x InHV9currentMotor torque 2 x TnMotMotor power 2 x PnMotMotor voltage 100% x VnMotDC-link volt. 1000 V

%

100%

63%

Par. 3. 2

t [s]

UD009K16

Filtered signal

Unfiltered signal

1.00

20 mA

4 mA

10 mA

0.50 mA

Param. 3. 5= 200%

Param. 3. 5= 100%

Param. 3. 5= 50%

12 mA

Ch012K17

Analogoutputcurrent


1.00

20 mA

4 mA

10 mA

0.50 mA

Param. 3. 5= 200%

Param. 3. 5= 100%

Param. 3. 5= 50%

Par. 3. 4 = 1

Par. 3. 4 = 0

Ch012K18

12 mA

Analogoutputcurrent






5






- if analog reference is 4—20 mA and signal is <4mA8 = Warning If a warning exists. See Table 7.10-1 in the Users'

Manual9 = Reversed The reverse command has been selected10= Jog speed Jog speed has been selected with digital input11 = At speed The output frequency has reached the set reference12= Motor regulator activated Overvoltage or overcurrent regulator was activated13= Output frequency supervision 1 The output frequency goes outside of the set supervision



Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 13 and 3. 14)16= Reference limit supervision Reference goes outside of the set supervision

Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 15 and 3. 16)17= External brake control External brake ON/OFF control with programmable delay

(par 3. 17 and 3. 18)18= Control from I/O terminals External control mode selected with prog. pushbutton #219= Drive Temperature on drive goes outside the set temperature

supervision limits (par. 3. 19 and 3. 20)20= Unrequested rotation direction Rotation direction of the motor shaft is different from the

requested one21 = External brake control inverted External brake ON/OFF control (par. 3.17 and 3.18),









5



If the calculated torque value goesunder/over the set limit (3. 14) thisfunction generates a warningmessage via the digital outputDO1, via a relay output RO1 orRO2 depending on the settings ofparameters 3. 6—3. 8.


The calculated torque value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 13.



If the reference value goes under/over the set limit (3. 16) this function generates awarning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1 or RO2depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8. The supervised reference isthe current active reference. It can be source A or B reference depending on DIB6input or the panel reference if panel is the active control source.





The brake control signal can be programmed via the digital output DO1 or via one ofrelay outputs RO1 and RO2, see parameters 3. 6—3. 8.

3. 19 Drive temperature limit supervision function


If the temperature of the drive goes under/over the set limit (3. 20) this functiongenerates a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1or RO2 depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8.


The temperature value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 19.

Par 3. 10

f[Hz]

t

21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1

21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1

21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1

UD009K19

Example:

Par. 3.9 = 2



5


The acceleration and deceleration ramp shape can be programmed with these

parameters.

Setting the value = 0 gives you alinear ramp shape. The outputfrequency immediately follows theinput with a ramp time set byparameters 1. 3, 1. 4 (4. 3, 4. 4 forAcc/Dec time 2).

Setting 0.1—10 seconds for 4. 1(4. 2) causes an S-shaped ramp.The speed changes are smooth.Parameter 1. 3/ 1. 4 (4. 3/ 4. 4)determines the ramp time of theacceleration/deceleration in themiddle of the curve.

See figure 5.5-17.

[Hz]

[t]

4. 1 (4. 2)

4. 1 (4. 2)

UD009K20

1. 3, 1. 4(4. 3, 4. 4)


Figure 5.5-17 S-shaped acceleration/ deceleration.

tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18

tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18

t

a)

t

b)

UD012K45

DIA1: RUN FWD

STOP

External

BRAKE: OFF


DIA2: RUN REV

STOP

DIA1: START

PULSE

External

BRAKE: OFF


DIA2: STOP

PULSE


5


These values correspond to the time required for the output frequency to acceleratefrom the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency (par. 1.2). With this parameter it is possibile to set two different acceleration/decelerationtimes for one application. The active set can be selected with the programmable signalDIA3 of this application, see parameter 2. 2. Acceleration /deceleration times can bereduced with a external free analog input signal, see parameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.

4. 5 Brake chopper



4. 6 Start function

Ramp:


Flying start:



4. 7 Stop function

Coasting:


Ramp:

1 After the Stop command, the speed of the motor is decelerated according tothe deceleration ramp time parameter. If the regenerated energy is high it maybe necessary to use an external braking resistor for faster deceleration.


Defines the current injected into the motor during DC braking.


5


Defines if braking is ON or OFF and braking time of the DC-brake when the motor isstopping. The function of the DC-brake depends on the stop function, parameter 4.7. See figure 5.5-18.

0 DC-brake is not used>0 DC-brake is in use and its function depends on the Stop function,

(param. 4. 7), and the time depends on the value of parameter 4. 9:




The braking time is scaled according to the frequency when the DC-braking starts. If the frequency is > nominal frequency of the motor (par. 1.11),setting value of parameter 4.9 determines the braking time. When the frequencyis < 10% of the nominal, the braking time is 10% of the set value of parameter4.9.

t = param. 4. 9

t

Param. 4. 10

fout

UD009K23

Motor speed

Output frequency

DC-braking

RUNSTOP


After the Stop command, the speed of the motor is reduced based on thedeceleration parameter ramp parameter, if no regeneration occurs due to loadinertia, to a speed defined with parameter 4. 10, where the DC-braking starts.

0,1x fn

The braking time is definedwith parameter 4. 9.

If high inertia exists, it isrecommended to use anexternal braking resistor forfaster deceleration. Seefigure 5.5-19.

fout fout

fn fn

t t

t = 1 x par. 4. 9 t = 0.1 x par. 4. 9

UD009K21RUNSTOP

RUNSTOP

Output frequency

Motor speed

Output frequency

Motor speed

DC-braking ON

DC-braking ON

[Hz]

[Hz][Hz]


Figure 5.5-19 DC-braking time when stopfunction = ramp


5


See figure 5.5-19.


0 DC-brake is not used>0 DC-brake is active when

the start command is given.This parameter defines thetime before the brake isreleased. After the brake isreleased the output freq-uency increases accordingto the set start functionparameter 4. 6 and theacceleration parameters (1.3, 4. 1 or 4. 2, 4. 3). Seefigure 5.5-20.

4. 12 - 4. 18 Multi-Step speeds 1-7

These parameter values define the Multi-step speeds selected with the DIA4, DIB5and DIB6 digital inputs. The selection of Multi-step speeds will occur similarly asdescribed in the table 3.4-2 page 3-8.


In some systems it may be nec-essary to avoid certainfrequencies because ofmechanical resonanceproblems.

With these parameters it ispossible to set limits for three"skip frequency" regions. Theaccuracy of the setting is 0.1 Hz.

5. 1 5. 25. 3 5. 45. 5 5. 6

[Hz]

[Hz]

UD009K33


0 = Frequency control: The I/O terminal and panel references are frequencyreferences and the drive controls the outputfrequency (output frequency resolution = 0.01 Hz)

1 = Speed control: The I/O terminal and panel references are speedreferences and the drive controls the motor speed(regulation accuracy ± 0.5%).

fout

frequencyreference

t

UD009K22

Par 4. 11

RUNSTOP

Output frequency

fout [Hz]

(V/Hz)

(sensorless vector)

Figure 5.5-21 Example of prohibit frequencyarea setting

Figure 5.5-20 DC-braking at start.


5


Motor noise can be minimized using a high switching frequency. Increasing theswitching frequency reduces the capacity of the HV9000.

Before changing the frequency from the factory default 10 kHz (3.6 kHz > 40 Hp),check the drive derating from the curves in figures 5.2-2 and 5.2-3 in the User'sManual.


The field weakening point is the output frequency at which the output voltage reachesthe set maximum value (par. 6. 4). Above this frequency the output voltage remainsat the set maximum value.Below that frequency the output voltage depends on the setting of the V/Hz curveparameters 1. 8, 1. 9, 6. 5, 6. 6 and 6. 7. See figure 5.5-22.

When the parameters 1. 10 and 1. 11, nominal voltage and nominal frequency ofthe motor are set, parameters 6. 3 and 6. 4 are also set automatically to thecorresponding values. If you need different values for the field weakening point andthe maximum output voltage, change these parameters after setting parameters 1.10 and 1. 11.


If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, this parameterdefines the middle point frequency of the curve. See figure 5.5-22.


If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8 this parameterdefines the middle point voltage of the curve. See figure 5.5-22.


If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8 this parameterdefines the zero frequency voltage of the curve. See figure 5.5-22.


U[V]Vn

Parameter6.4




Default: Nominalvoltage of the motor


5



Over/undervoltage trips may occur when controllers are not used



A warning or a fault action and message is generated if 4—20 mA reference signalis used and the signal falls below 4 mA. The information can also be programmedvia digital output DO1 and via relay outputs RO1 and RO2.









Ground fault protection ensures that the sum of the motor phase currents is zero.The standard overcurrent protection is always working and protects the frequencyconverter from ground faults with high current levels.


General

Motor thermal protection is to protect the motor from overheating. The HV9000 driveis capable of supplying higher than nominal current to the motor. If the load requiresthis high current there is a risk that motor will be thermally overloaded. This is trueespecially at low frequencies. With low frequencies the cooling effect of the motorfan is reduced and the capacity of the motor is reduced. If the motor is equippedwith an external fan the load reduction on low speed is small.


5

Motor thermal protection is based on a calculated model and it uses the outputcurrent of the drive to determine the load on the motor. When the power is turnedon to the drive, the calculated model uses the heatsink temperature to determinethe initial thermal state for the motor. The calculated model assumes that theambient temperature of the motor is 40°C.

Motor thermal protection can be adjusted by setting several parameters. Thethermal current IT specifies the load current above which the motor is overloaded.This current limit is a function of the output frequency. The curve for IT is set withparameters 7. 6, 7. 7 and 7. 9, refer to the figure 5.5-23. The default values ofthese parameters are set from the motor nameplate data.

With the output current at IT the thermal state will reach the nominal value (100%).The thermal state changes with the square of the current. With output current at75% of IT the thermal stage will reach 56% and with output current at 120% of ITthe thermal stage would reach 144%. The function will trip the device (refer par. 7.5) if the thermal model reaches a value of 105%. The response time of the thermalmodel is determined by the time constant parameter 7. 8. The larger the motor thelonger it takes to reach the final temperature.


CAUTION! The calculated model does not protect the motor if the cooling ofthe motor is reduced either by blocking the airflow or due to dust ordirt.


Operation:


Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is selected the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.




The value is set in percentage of the motor nameplate data of the motor, parameter1. 13, not the drive's nominal output current.




!


5

Par. 7. 6

Par. 7. 7

IT

f

par. 1. 7

I

UMCH7_91Par. 7. 9

Overload area

Currentlimit


The current can be set between 10.0—150.0% x InMotor. This parameter sets thevalue for thermal current at zero frequency. Refer to the figure 5.5-23.


The value is set as a percentage of the motor's nameplate nominal current,parameter 1. 13, not the drive's nominal output current. The motor's nominalcurrent is the current which the motor can stand in direct on-line use without beingoverheated.

If you change the parameter 1. 13 this parameter is automatically restored to thedefault value.



This time can be set between 0.5—300 minutes.This is the thermal time constant of the motor. The larger the motor the greaterthe time constant. The time constant is defined as the time that it takes thecalculated thermal stage to reach 63% of its final value.

The motor thermal time is specific to a motor design and it varies betweendifferent motor manufacturers.

The default value for the time constant is calculated based on the motornameplate data from parameters 1. 12 and 1. 13. If either of these parameters is reset,then this parameter is set to its default value.

If the motor's t6 -time is known (given by the motor manufacturer) the timeconstant parameter could be set based on t6 -time. As a rule of thumb, the motorthermal time constant in minutes equals to 2xt6 (t6 in seconds is the time a motorcan safely operate at six times the rated current). If the drive is in the stop stagethe time constant is internally increased to three times the set parameter value.The cooling in the stop stage is based on convection with an increased timeconstant.

Figure 5.5-23 Motor thermal current IT

curve.


5


This frequency can be set between 10—500 Hz.This is the frequency break point of thermal current curve. With frequenciesabove this point the thermal capacity of the motor is assumed to be constant. Seefigure 5.5-23.

The default value is based on motor's nameplate data, parameter 1. 11. It is 35 Hzfor a 50 Hz motor and 42 Hz for a 60 Hz motor. More generally it is 70% of the frequencyat the field weakening point (parameter 6. 3). Changing either parameter 1. 11 or 6.3 will restore this parameter to its default value.

105%

par. 7. 5

Θ = (I/IT)2 x (1-e-t/T)

I/IT

UMCH7_92

Trip area

Motor temperature


Time constant T*)




Motor stall protection protects the motor from short time overload situations like astalled shaft. The reaction time of stall protection can be set shorter than with motorthermal protection. The stall state is defined with two parameters, 7.11. Stall Currentand 7.13. Stall Frequency. If the current is higher than the set limit and outputfrequency is lower than the set limit the stall state is true. There is no true detectionof shaft rotation. Stall protection is a type of overcurrent protection.


Operation:


Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is set on, the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.

Setting this parameter to 0 will deactivate the protection and will reset the stall timecounter to zero.



5

f

I

Par. 7. 11

Par. 7. 13 UMCH7_11

Stall area

7. 12 Stall time

The time can be set between 2.0—120 s.This is the maximum allowed time for a stall. There is an internal up/down counterto count the stall time. See figure 5.5-26. If the stall time counter value goes abovethis limit the protection will cause a trip (refer to the parameter 7. 10).

Par. 7. 12

UMCH7_12

Trip area

Time

Stall time counter

StallNo stall



The purpose of motor underload protection is to ensure that there is load on themotor while the drive is running. If the motor load is reduced, there might be aproblem in the process, e.g. broken belt or dry pump.




In a stall the current has to beabove this limit. See figure 5.5-25. The value is set as apercentage of the motor's name-plate nominal current, parameter1. 13, motor's nominal current. Ifparameter 1.13 is adjusted, thisparameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value.


The frequency can be set between1—fmax (par. 1. 2).In the stall state, the ouputfrequency has to be smaller thanthis limit. See figure 5.5-25.

[Hz]




5

The torque values for setting the underload curve are set with percentage valueswhich refer to the nominal torque of the motor. The motor's nameplate data,parameter 1. 13, the motor's nominal current and the drive's nominal current ICT

are used to find the scaling ratio for the internal torque value. If other than astandard motor is used with the drive, the accuracy of the torque calculation isdecreased.


Operation:




7. 15 Underload protection, fieldweakening area load


This parameter is the value for theminimum allowed torque when theoutput frequency is above the fieldweakening point. See figure 4.5-22. If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted,this parameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value

Par. 7. 15

UMCH7_15

Par. 7. 16

f5 Hz

Underload area

Torque

Fieldweakening point par. 6. 3






This is the maximum allowed time for an underload state. There is an internal up/down counter to accumulate the underload time. See figure 5.5-28. If the underloadcounter value goes above this limit, the protection will cause a trip (refer to theparameter 7. 14). If the drive is stopped the underload counter is reset to zero.

f [Hz]



5

Par. 7. 17

UMCH7_17

Trip area

Time


Underl.No underl.



The Automatic restart function restarts the drive after the faults selected withparameters 8. 4—8. 8. The Start function for Automatic restart is selected withparameter 8. 3.

4

3

2

1

t

UD012K25


RUNSTOP


ttrial ttrial

Par. 8. 1 = 3ttrial = Par. 8. 2



The time counting starts from the first autorestart. If the number of restarts does notexceed the value of the parameter 8. 1 during the trial time, the counting is clearedafter the trial time has elapsed. The next fault starts the counting again.

Figure 5.5-29 Automatic restart


5





0 = No automatic restart after undervoltage fault trip1 = Automatic restart after undervoltage fault condition returns to the normal

condition (DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)


0 = No automatic restart after overvoltage fault trip1 = Automatic restart after overvoltage fault condition returns to the normal condition (DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)


0 = No automatic restart after overcurrent fault trip1 = Automatic restart after overcurrent faults


0 = No automatic restart after reference fault trip1 = Automatic restart after analog current reference signal (4—20 mA)

returns to the normal level (>4 mA)


0 = No automatic restart after temperature fault trip1 = Automatic restart after heatsink temperature has returned to its normal level between -10°C—+75°C.


5

Notes:


5

This page intentionally left blank

HV9000 Page 6-1Pump and fan control Application

6

PUMP AND FAN CONTROL APPLICATION(par. 0.1 = 7)

CONTENTS

6 Pump and fan control Application ................. 6-1

6.1 General ..................................................... 6-26.2 Control I/O ................................................ 6-26.3 Control signal logic .................................... 6-36.4 Basic parameters, Group 1 ....................... 6-4

6.4.1 Parameter table, Group 1 ................. 6-46.4.2 Description of Group1 parameters .... 6-5

6.5 Special parameters, Groups 2—9 ............. 6-86.5.1 Parameter tables, Groups 2—9 ........... 6-86.5.2 Description of Groups 2—9 param. 6-16

6.6 Monitoring data ....................................... 6-406.7 Panel reference ...................................... 6-41

2 HV9000Pump and fan control Application

6

6.1 General

The pump and fan control appliation can beselected by setting the value of parameter 0.1to 7.

The application can be used to control onevariable speed drive and 0-3 auxiliary drives.The PI-controller of the HV9000 controls thedrive speed and provides control signals toStart and Stop one to three auxiliary drives to



2 Vin+ Analog input, PI-controller reference valuevoltage (programmable) range 0—10 V DC


4 Iin+ Analog input, PI-controller actual value




8 DIA1 Start/Stop Contact open = stopSource A (PI-controller) Contact closed = start

9 DIA2 External fault Contact open = no fault(programmable) Contact closed = fault





14 DIB4 Start/Stop Contact open = stopSource B (Direct freq. ref.) Contact closed = start

15 DIB5 Jog speed select Contact open = no action(programmable) Contact closed = jog speed







22 RO1 Auxil. motor 1

23 RO1 control


25 RO2 FAULT

26 RO2

Figure 6.2-1 Default I/O configuration and connection example of thePump and Fan Control Application with 2-wire transmitter.

220VACMax.

READY

control the total flow.

The application has two control sources onthe I/O terminals. Source A is Pump and fancontrol and source B is direct frequencyreference. The control source is selected withDIB6 input.

* NOTE! Remember to connect the CMAand CMB inputs.

220VAC

FAULT

PI-controllerreference value

6.2 Control I/O

Actualvalue

I(0)4..20mA

2-wiretransmitter

-+


6



Figure 6.3-1 Control signal logic of the Pump and Fan control Application.Switch positions shown are based on the factory settings.

!

"#

$%

&#%&

&$&% $%%

'()*')

$+$,-

'./

0.),,.0./1.

,2

3445&!$!%%#.

4,,67-,, ')

8,1./-7./),9,1 :;

4&%&$..$,)..'<./)<..$,)..'<./)<..8,1./-7.'<

$,).+./),

),,

')=$,).

>(<.'<=$,).

)?!-

).?/),@.................................A.......

$+$,-=./,).

$+$,-=./,).

&A.'9,1 :;

&A<.'./9,1 :;

),.,''(<.'<.7),,.,1).,'A*.7?/

A<.7?.=./

A<.7?.=./

A<.7?. =./


6


6.4.1 Parameter table, Group 1






1. 5 PI-controllergain 1—1000% 1 % 100% 6-5

1. 6 PI-controller I-time 0.00—320.00 s 0.01s 10.00s 0= No Integral timein use 6-5

1. 7 Current limit 0.1—2.5 x InHV9 0.1 A 1.5 x In HV9 ***Output curr. limit [A] of the unit 6-5


1. 9 V/hz optimization 0—1 1 0 0 = None 6-61 = Automatic torque boost



1. 11 Nominal frequency 30—500 Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz fn from the rating plate of 6-7of the motor the motor

1. 12 Nominal speed 300—20000 rpm 1 rpm 1720 rpm nn from the rating plate of 6-7of the motor ** the motor

1. 13 Nominal current 2.5 x In HV9 0.1 A InHV9 In from the rating plate of 6-7of the motor( In Mot) the motor





1. 15 Parameter conceal 0—1 1 0 Visibility of the parameters: 6-70 = All parametergroups visible1 = Only group 1 is visible




only when the drive is stopped.

* If 1. 2 > motor synchr. speed, check suitability for motor and drive system Selecting 120 Hz/500 Hz range see page 6-5.

** Default value for a four pole motor and a nominal size HV9000.*** Up to M10. Bigger classes case by case.

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


6



Defines frequency limits of the HV9000.

The default maximum value for parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 is 120 Hz. By setting 1. 2 =120 Hz when the drive is stopped (RUN indicator not lit) parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 arechanged to 500 Hz. At the same time the resolution of the panel reference is changedfrom 0.01 Hz to 0.1 Hz.Changing the max. value from 500 Hz to 120 Hz is done by setting parameter 1. 2 =119 Hz when the drive is stopped.


These limits correspond to the time required for the output frequency to acceleratefrom the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency(par. 1. 2).

1. 5 PI-controller gain

This parameter defines the gain of the PI-controller.

If this parameter is set to 100%, a 10% change in error value causes the controlleroutput to change by 1.0 Hz.

If the parameter value is set to 0 the PI-controller operates as I-controller.

1. 6 PI-controller I-time

Defines the integration time of the PI-controller.

1. 7 Current limit

This parameter determines the maximum motor current what the HV9000 will supplyshort term.



0 (par. 6. 3) where a constant voltage (nominal value) is supplied to themotor. See figure 6.4-1.Linear V/Hz ratio should be used in constant torque applications.



1 point (par. 6. 3) where the nominal voltage is also supplied to the motor.See figure 6.4-1.

The motor runs undermagnetized below the field weakening pointand produces less torque and electromechanical noise. A squaredV/Hz ratio can be used in applications where the torque demand of theload is proportional to the square of the speed, e.g. in centrifugal fansand pumps.


6

Programm. The V/Hz curve can be programmed with three different points.V/Hz curve The parameters for programming are explained in chapter 6.5.2.

2 A programmable V/Hz curve can be used if the standard settings donot satisfy the needs of the application. See figure 6.4-2.


Automatic The voltage to the motor changes automatically which makes thetorque motor to produce torque enough to start and run at low frequencies.boost The voltage increase depends on the motor type and horsepower.


NOTE! In high torque - low speed applications - it is likely the motor willoverheat.If the motor has to run for a prolonged time under these conditions,special attention must be paid to cooling the motor. Use externalcooling for the motor if the temperature tends to rise too high.

!


U[V]V

n

Parameter6.4



V [V]



Linear

Squared


f [Hz]




6




Find the nominal frequency fn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the frequency at the field weakening point, parameter 6. 3, tothe same value.









0 = All parameter groups are visible1 = Only group 1 is visible



0 = Parameter value changes enabled1 = Parameter value changes disabled


6






2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acceler./deceler. time selection5 = Reverse6 = Jog frequency7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command10 = Motor (digital) potent. UP


2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acceler./deceler. time selection5 = Reverse6 = Jog frequency7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command10 = Motor (digital) potent. DOWN





2. 7 Vin signal filter time 0.00—10.00 s 0.01s 1.00s 0 = No filtering 6-17





2. 12 Iin signal filter time 0.01—10.00s 0.01s 1.00 s 0 = No filtering 6-18




STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


6


2. 14 Motor(digital) 0.1—2000.0 0.1 10.0 6-19potentiometer ramp time Hz/s Hz/s Hz/s

2. 15 PI-controller reference 0—4 1 0 0 = Analog voltage input (term. 2) 619signal (source A) 1 = Analog current input (term. 4)

2 = Set reference from the panel (reference r2)3 = Signal from internal motor pot.4 = Signal from internal motor pot. reset if HV9000 unit is stopped

2. 16 PI-controller actual 0—3 1 0 0 = Actual value1 6-19value selection 1 = Actual 1 + Actual 2

2 = Actual 1 - Actual 23 = Actual 1 * Actual 2



2. 19 Actual value 1 -320.00%— 0.01% 0.00% 0% = no minimum scaling 6-19min scale +320.00%

2. 20 Actual value 1 -320.00%— 0.01% 100.00% 100% = no maximum scaling 6-19max scale +320.00%

2. 21 Actual value 2 -320.00%— 0.01% 0.00% 0% = no minimum scaling 6-19min scale +320.00%

2. 22 Actual value 2 -320.00%— 0.01% 100.00% 100% = no maximum scaling 6-19max scale +320.00%

2. 23 Error value inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = No 6-201 = Yes

2. 24 PI-controller reference 0.0—100.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s Time for reference value change 6-20value rise time from 0 % to 100 %

2. 25 PI-controller reference 0.0—100.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s Time for reference value change 6-20value fall time from 100 % to 0 %

2. 26 Direct frequency 0—4 1 0 0 = Analog voltage input (term. 2) 6-20reference, source B 1 = Analog current input (term. 4)

2 = Set reference from the panel (reference r1)3 = Signal from internal motor pot.4 = Signal from internal motor pot. reset if HV9000 unit is stopped

2. 27 Source B reference 0—par.2. 28 1 Hz 0 Hz Selects the frequency that corres- 6-20scaling minimum value ponds to the min. reference signal

2. 28 Source B reference 0—fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz Selects the frequency that 6-20scaling maximum value corresponds to the max.

reference signal0 = Scaling off>0 = Scaled maximum value


STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


6



3. 1 Analog output function 0—15 1 1 0 = Not used Scale 100% 6-211 = O/P frequency(0—fmax)2 = Motor speed (0—max. speed)3 = O/P current (0—2.0 x InHV9)4 = Motor torque (0—2 x TnMot)5 = Motor power (0—2 x PnMot)6 = Motor voltage (0—100% xVnMot)7 = DC-link volt. (0—1000 V)8—10 = Not in use11 = PI-controller reference value12 = PI-controller actual value 113 = PI-controller actual value 214 = PI-controller error value15 = PI-controller output

3. 2 Analog output filter time 0.00—10.00 s 0.01s 1.00s 6-21





supervision20 = Unrequested rotation direction21 = External brake control inverted22—27 = Not in use28 = Auxiliary drive 1 start29 = Auxiliary drive 2 start30 = Auxiliary drive 3 start




2 = High limit



STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


6



2 = High limit



2 = High limit

3. 14 Torque limit 0.0—200.0% 0.1% 100.0% 6-23supervision value xTnHV9

3. 15 Active reference limit 0—2 1 0 0 = No 6-23supervision function 1 = Low limit

2 = High limit


3. 17 External brake off-delay 0.0—100.0 s 1 0.5 s 6-23

3. 18 External brake on-delay 0.0—100.0 s 1 1.5 s 6-23

3. 19 Drive 0—2 1 0 0 = No 6-23temperature limit 1 = Low limitsupervision function 2 = High limit

3. 20 Drive -10—+75°C 1 +40°C 6-23temperature limit

3. 21 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—7 1 3 See parameter 3. 1 6-21analog output content

3. 22 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0.00—10.00 s 0.01 1.00 s See parameter 3. 2 6-21analog output filter time






4. 1 Acc./dec. ramp 1 shape 0.0—10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s 0 = Linear 6-24>0 = S-curve acc./dec. time

4. 2 Acc./dec. ramp 2 shape 0.0—10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s 0 = Linear 6-24>0 = S-curve acc./dec. time







STOPO


6


4. 8 DC-braking current 0.15—1.5 x 0.1 A 0.5 x 6-25InHV9 (A) InHV9

4. 9 DC-braking time at Stop 0.00-250.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off at Stop 6-25

4. 10 Turn on frequency of DC- 0.1-10.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 1.5 Hz 6-27brake during ramp Stop

4. 11 DC-brake time at Start 0.00-25.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off at Start 6-27

4. 12 Jog speed reference fmin —fmax 0.1 Hz 10.0 Hz 6-27(1. 1) (1. 2)




5. 2 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = No prohibit frequency range 6-27range 2 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)








6. 2 Switching frequency 1.0—16.0 kHz 0.1 kHz 10/3.6kHz Depends on Hp rating 6-28

6. 3 Field weakening point 30—500 Hz 1 Hz Param. 6-28 1. 11



6. 6 V/Hz curve mid 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 0.00% Parameter maximum value = 6-28point voltage x Vnmot param. 6.4


6. 8 Overvoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is not operating 6-291 = Controller is in operation

6. 9 Undervoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is not operating 6-291 = Controller is in operation


STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO

STOPO


6










7. 4 Ground protection 0—2 2 2 0 = No action 6-292 = Fault








7. 12 Stall time 2.0—120.0 s 1.0 s 15.0 s 6-33





7. 17 Underload time 2.0—600.0 s 1.0 s 20.0 s 6-34


6



8. 1 Automatic restart: 0—10 1 0 0 = Not in use 6-35number of tries

8. 2 Automatic restart:multi 1—6000 s 1 s 30 s 6-35attempt maximum trial time








6

Group 9, Pump and fan control special parameters

Code Parameter Range Stepl Default Custom Description Page

9. 1 Number of aux. drives 0—3 1 1 6-37

9. 2 Start frequency of Imin—Imax 0.1 Hz 51.0 Hz 6-37auxiliary drive 1

9. 3 Stop frequency of Imin—Imax 0.1 Hz 25.0 Hz 6-37auxiliary drive 1





9. 8

9. 9

9. 10 Start delay of the 0.0—300.0 s 0.1 s 4.0 s 6-37auxiliary drives

9. 11 Stop delay of the 0.0—300.0 s 0.1 s 2.0 s 6-37auxiliary drives

9. 12 Reference step after 0.0—100.0 % 0.1 % 0.0 % In % of actual value 6-38start of the 1 aux. drive



9. 15 (Reserved)

9. 16 Sleep level 0.0—120/500 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz Frequency below which the freq. 6-38Hz of the speed controlled motor has

go before starting the sleep delaycounting ( 0.0 = not in use)

9. 17 Sleep delay 0.0—3000.0 s 0.1 s 30.0 s Time that freq. has to be below par. 6-389.16 before stopping the HV9000

9. 18 Wake up level 0.0—100.0 % 0.1 % 0.0 % Level of the actual value for 6-38restarting the HV9000

9. 19 Wake up function 0—1 1 0 0 =Wake up when falling below 6-38 the wake up level1 = Wake up when exeeding the wake up level

9. 20 PI-regulator bypass 0—1 1 0 1 = PI-regulator bypassed 6-39



6


2. 1 DIA2 function





5: Reverse contact open = Forward If two or more inputs arecontact closed = Reverse programmed to reverse only

one of them is required forreverse






10: Motor (digital) contact closed = Reference increases until the contact is pot. UP opened

t

UD009K32

Param. 4. 10

DIA3

t

UD009K32

DIA3

RUNSTOP

Output frequency



Figure 6.5-1 DIA3 as DC-brake command input:a) Stop-mode = ramp,b) Stop-mode = coasting


6

2. 2 DIA3 function


10: Motor (digital) contact closed = Reference decreases until the contact ispot. DOWN opened


0 = Signal range 0—10 V1 = Custom setting range from custom minimum (par. 2. 4) to custom

maximum (par. 2. 5)

2. 4-2. 5 Vin custom setting minimum/maximum

These parameters set Vin for any input signal span within 0—10 V.


Maximum setting: Set the Vin signal to its maximum level, select parameter 2. 5,press the Enter button

Note! The parameter values can only be set with this procedure (not with arrow up/arrowdown buttons)


0 = no inversion of analog Vin signal

1 = inversion of analog Vin signal.


Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Vin signal. Along filtering time makes thedrive response slower. Seefigure 6.5-2.

%

100%

63%

Par. 2. 7

t [s]

UD009K15

Filtered signal

Unfiltered signal

Figure 6.5-2 Vin signal filtering


6

2. 13 DIA5 function





5: Reverse contact open = Forward If two or more inputs arecontact closed = Reverse programmed to reverse only

one of them is required forreverse








2. 9 Analog input Iin custom setting2. 10 minimum/maximum

With these parameters you can scale the input current signal (Iin) signal range between0—20 mA.

Minimum setting: Set the Iin signal to its minimum level, select parameter 2. 9, pressthe Enter button

Maximum setting: Set the Iin signal to its maximum level, select parameter 2. 10, pressthe Enter button

Note! The parameter values can only beset with this procedure (not with thearrow up/arrow down buttons)


0 = no inversion of Iin input.1 = inversion of Iin input.


Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Iin signal. A longfiltering time makes the driveresponse slower. See figure 6.5-3.

%

100%

63%

Par. 2. 12

t [s]

UD009K30

Filtered signal

Unfiltered signal

Figure 6.5-3 Analog input Iin filter time


6



2. 15 PI-controller reference signal

0 Analog voltage reference from terminals 2—3, e.g. a potentiometer1 Analog current reference trom terminals 4—5, e.g. a transducer.2 Panel reference is the reference set from the Reference Page (REF).

Reference r2 is the PI-controller reference, see chapter 6.3 Reference value is changed with digital input signals DIA2 and DIA3.


4 Same as setting 3 but the reference value is set to the minimumfrequency (par. 1. 1) each time the drive is stopped. When the value ofparameter 1. 5 is set to 3 or 4, the value of parameter 2.1 is automaticallyset to 4 and the value of parameter 2. 2 is automatically set to 10.

2. 16 PI-controller actual value selection2. 17 Actual value 12. 18 Actual value 2

These parameters select the PI-controller actual value.






Sets the minimum scaling point for Actual value 2.


Sets the maximum scaling point for Actual value 2.

2. 23 Error value inversion

This parameter allows you to invert the error value of the PI-controller (and thus thethe operation of the PI-controller).

0

Par. 2. 19 = -30%Par. 2. 20 = 140%

100

C h012 K 34

100 140-30

004

100

0

Par. 2. 19 = 30%Par. 2. 20 = 80%

1008030

10.0 V20.0 mA20.0 mA

76.5(15.3 mA)

17.7(3.5 mA)


Analoginput [%]


Analoginput [%]

004

10.0 V8.03.020.0 mA16.06.0

16.88.8 20.0 mA

Figure 6.5-4 Examples about the scaling of actual value signal.


6

2. 24 PI-controller minimum limit2. 25 PI-controller maximum limit

These parameters set the minmum and maximum values of the PI-controller output.

Parameter value limits: par 1.1 <par. 2. 24 <par. 2. 25.

2. 26 Direct frequency reference, Place B

0 Analog voltage reference from terminals 2—3, e.g. a potentiometer1 Analog current reference from terminals 4—5, e.g. a transducer.2 Panel reference is the reference set from the Reference Page (REF),

Reference r1 is the Place B reference, see chapter 6.3 Reference value is changed with digital input signals DIA2 and DIA3.


4 Same as setting 3 but the reference value is set to the minimumfrequency (par. 1. 1) each time the drive is stopped.When the value of parameter 1. 5 is set to 3 or 4, the value of parameter 2.1is automatically set to 4 and the value of parameter 2. 2 isautomatically set to 10.

2. 27 2. 28 Place B reference scaling, minimum value/maximum value

Setting limits: 0 < par. 2. 27 < par. 2. 28 < par. 1. 2. If par. 2. 28 = 0 scaling is setoff. See figures 6.5-5 and 6.5-6.

(In the figures below the voltage input Vin with signal range 0—10 V is selected for source Breference)

100

Par. 2. 28

Par. 2. 27

Ch012K35

100

Outputfrequency

Analoginput [V]

M ax freq. par 1. 2

Min freq. par 1. 1

Outputfrequency

Analoginput [V]

Max freq. par 1. 2

Min freq. par 1. 1

[Hz][Hz]

Figure 6.5-5 Reference scaling. Figure 6.5-6 Reference scaling, par. 2. 15 = 0


6

%

100%

63%

Par. 3. 2

t [s]

UD009K16

Filtered signal

Unfiltered signal





1.00

20 mA

4 mA

10 mA

0.50 mA

Param. 3. 5= 200%

Param. 3. 5= 100%

Param. 3. 5= 50%

12 mA

Ch012K17

Analogoutputcurrent


1.00

20 mA

4 mA

10 mA

0.50 mA

Param. 3. 5= 200%

Param. 3. 5= 100%

Param. 3. 5= 50%

Par. 3. 4 = 1

Par. 3. 4 = 0

Ch012K18

12 mA

Analogoutputcurrent



Figure 6.5-8 Analog output invert









Output freq. Max. frequency (p. 1. 2)Motor speed Max. speed (nnxfmax/fn)Output 2 x InHV9currentMotor torque 2 x TnMotMotor power 2 x PnMotMotor voltage 100% x VnMotDC-link volt. 1000 VPI-ref. value 100% x ref. value max.PI-act. value1 100% x act. value max.PI-act. value2 100% x act. value max.PI-error value 100%x error value max.PI-output 100% x output max.


6






- if analog reference is 4—20 mA and signal is <4mA8 = Warning If a warning exists. See Table 7.10-1 in User's Manual9 = Reversed The reverse command has been selected10= Multi-step or jog speed Multi-step or jog speed has been selected by digital inp.11 = At speed The output frequency has reached the set reference12= Motor regulator activated Overvoltage or overcurrent regulator was activated13= Output frequency supervision 1 The output frequency goes outside of the set supervision

Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 9 and par. 3. 10)14= Output frequency supervision 2 The output frequency goes outside of the set supervision

Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 11 and par. 3. 12)15= Torque limit supervision The motor torque goes outside of the set supervision

Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 13 and par. 3. 14)16= Active reference Active reference goes outside of the set supervision

limit supervision Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 15 and par. 3. 16)17= External brake control External brake ON/OFF control with programmable

delay (par 3. 17 and 3. 18)18= Control from I/O terminals External control mode selected with progr. pushbutton#219= Drive temperature limit Temperature on drive goes outside the

supervision set supervision limits (par. 3. 19 and 3. 20)20= Unrequested rotation direction Rotation direction of the motor shaft is different from the

requested one21 = External brake control inverted External brake ON/OFF control (par. 3.17 and 3.18).

Output active when brake control is ON22—27 = Not in use28 = Auxiliary drive 1 start Starts and stops auxiliary drive 129 = Auxiliary drive 2start Starts and stops auxiliary drive 230 = Auxiliary drive 3 start Starts and stops auxilary drive 3








6



If the calculated torque value goesunder/over the set limit (3. 14) thisfunction generates a warningmessage via the digital output DO1or via a relay output RO1 or RO2depending on the settings ofparameters 3. 6—3. 8.


The calculated torque value to be supervised by parameter 3. 13.

3. 15 Active reference limit, supervision function


If the reference value goes under/over the set limit (3. 16) this function generates awarning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1 orRO2 depending on the settings of parameters 3. 6—3. 8. The supervised referenceis the current active reference. It can be source A or B reference depending on DIB6input or panel reference if the panel is the active control source.

3. 16 Active reference limit , supervision value




The brake control signal can be programmed via the digital output DO1 or via one ofrelay outputs RO1 and RO2, see parameters 3. 6—3. 8.

3. 19 Drive temperature limit supervision function


If the temperature of the drive goes under/over the set limit (3. 20) this functiongenerates a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1or RO2 depending on the settings of parameters 3. 6—3. 8.


The temperature value to be supervised by parameter 3. 19.

Par 3. 10

f[Hz]

t

21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1

21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1

21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1

UD009K19

Example:

Par. 3.9 = 2



6

tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18

tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18

t

a)

t

b)

UD012K45

DIA1: RUN FWD

STOP

External

BRAKE: OFF


DIA2: RUN REV

STOP

DIA1: START

PULSE

External

BRAKE: OFF


DIA2: STOP

PULSE




[Hz]

[t]

4. 1 (4. 2)

4. 1 (4. 2)

UD009K20

1. 3, 1. 4(4. 3, 4. 4)

Setting 0.1—10 seconds for 4. 1 (4.2) causes an S-shaped ramp. Thespeed changes are smooth.Parameter 1. 3/ 1. 4 (4. 3/ 4. 4)determines the ramp time of theacceleration/deceleration in themiddle of the curve. See figure 6.5-12.




6


These values correspond to the time required for the output frequency to acceleratefrom the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency (par. 1.2). With this parameter it is possibile to set two different acceleration/decelerationtimes for one application. The active set can be selected with programmable signalDIA3 of this application. See parameter 2. 2. Acceleration/deceleration times can bereduced with a external free analog input signal. See parameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.

4. 5 Brake chopper



4. 6 Start function

Ramp:


Flying start:



4. 7 Stop function

Coasting:


Ramp:

1 After the Stop command, the speed of the motor is decelerated according tothe deceleration ramp time parameter. If the regenerated energy is high it maybe necessary to use an external braking resistor for faster deceleration.


Defines the current injected into the motor during the DC braking.





6


>0 DC-brake is in use depending on the setup of the stop function (param. 4.7). The time is set by the value of parameter 4. 9:



With DC-injection, the motor can be electrically stopped in the shortestpossible time, without using an optional external braking resistor.

The braking time is scaled according to the frequency when the DC- brakingstarts. If the frequency is > nominal frequency of the motor (par. 1.11), thevalue of parameter 4.9 determines the braking time. When the frequency is< 10% of the nominal, the braking time is 10% of the set value of parameter4.9.

0,1x fn

t = param. 4. 9

t

Param. 4. 10

fout

UD009K23

Motor speed

Output frequency

DC-braking

RUNSTOP


After the Stop command, the speed of the motor is reduced baed on thedeceleration ramp parameter, if no regeneration occurs due to load inertia, to aspeed defined with by parameter 4. 10, where the DC-braking starts.

The braking time is defined with parameter 4. 9.

If high inertia exists, it is recommended to use an external braking resistor forfaster deceleration. See figure 6.5-14.

fout fout

fn fn

t t

t = 1 x par. 4. 9 t = 0.1 x par. 4. 9

UD009K21RUNSTOP

RUNSTOP

Output frequency

Motor speed

Output frequency

Motor speed

DC-braking ON

DC-braking ON



See figure 6.5-14.

[Hz] [Hz]

[Hz]



6

frequencyreference

>0 DC-brake is active when the startcommand is given. Thisparameter defines the time beforethe brake is released. After thebrake is released the outputfrequency increases according tothe set start function parameter 4.6 and acceleration parameters (1.3, 4. 1 or 4. 2, 4. 3), see figure 6.5-15.


Parameter value defines the jogspeed selected with the digitalinput.

5. 1-5.6 Prohibit frequency area,Low limit/High limit

In some systems it may be nec-essary to avoid certainfrequencies because of mechani-cal resonance problems.

With these parameters it ispossible to set limits for three "skipfrequency" regions. The accuracyof the setting is 0.1 Hz.



t

UD009K22

Par 4. 11

RUNSTOP

Output frequency

5. 1 5. 25. 3 5. 45. 5 5. 6

[Hz]

[Hz]

UD009K33

fout


0 = Frequency control: The I/O terminal and panel references are frequencyreferences and the drive controls the output frequency (outputfreq. resolution 0.01 Hz)

1 = Speed control: The I/O terminal and panel references are speed referencesand the drive controls the motor speed (control accuracy ±0.5%).


Motor noise can be minimized by using a high switching frequency. Increasing thefrequency reduces the capacity of the HV9000. Before changing the frequency fromthe factory default 10 kHz (3.6 kHz>40Hp), check the drive derating from the curvesin figure 5.2-2 and 5.2-3 of the User's Manual.

fout [Hz]

(V/Hz)

(sensorless vector)




6


The field weakening point is the output frequency where the output voltage reachesthe set maximum value (par. 6. 4). Above that frequency the output voltage remainsat the set maximum value. Below that frequency output voltage depends on the settingof the V/Hz curve parameters 1. 8, 1. 9, 6. 5, 6. 6 and 6. 7. See figure 6.5-17.

When parameters 1. 10 and 1. 11, nominal voltage and nominal frequency of themotor are set, parameters 6. 3 and 6. 4 are also set automatically to thecorresponding values. If different values for the field weakening point and themaximum output voltage are required, change these parameters after setting theparameters 1. 10 and 1. 11.


If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with 2. 28parameter 1. 8 thisparameter defines the middle point frequency of the curve. See figure 6.5-17.


If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8 this parameterdefines the middle point voltage (% of motor nominal voltage) of the curve. See figure6.5-17.


If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8 this parameterdefines the zero frequency voltage of the curve. See figure 6.5-17.


These parameters allow the over/undervoltage controllers to be switched ON orOFF. This may be useful in cases where the utility supply voltage varies more than-15%—+10% and the application requires a constant speed. If the controllers areON, they will change the motor speed in over/undervoltage cases. Overvoltage =faster, undervoltage = slower.



U[V]V

n

Parameter6.4



Figure 6.5-17 Programmable V/Hz curve

Default: Nominalvoltage of the motor


6



A warning or a fault action and message is generated if 4—20 mA referencesignal is used and the signal falls below 4 mA. The information can also beprogrammed via digital output DO1 and via relay outputs RO1 and RO2.



A warning or a fault action and message is generated from the external faultsignal in the digital input DIA3. The information can also be programmed intodigital output DO1 and into relay outputs RO1 and RO2.



Phase supervision of the motor ensures that the motor phases have approxi-mately equal current.


0 = No action2 = Fault message

Ground fault protection ensures that the sum of the motor phase currents is zero.The overcurrent protection is always working and protects the drive from groundfaults with high current levels.


General

Motor thermal protection is to protect the motor from overheating. The HV9000drive is capable of supplying higher than nominal current to the motor. If the loadrequires this high current, there is a risk that motor will be thermally overloaded.This is true especially at low frequencies. With low frequencies the cooling effectof the motor fan is reduced and the capacity of the motor is reduced. If the motoris equipped with an external fan, the load reduction on low speed is small.

Motor thermal protection is based on a calculated model and it uses the outputcurrent of the drive to determine the load on the motor. When the power is turnedon to the drive, the calculated model uses the heatsink temperature to determinethe initial thermal state of the motor. The calculated model assumes that the am-bient temperature of the motor is 40°C.

Motor thermal protection can be adjusted by setting several parameters. Thethermal current IT specifies the load current above which the motor is overloaded.This current limit is a function of the output frequency. The curve for IT is set withparameters 7. 6, 7. 7 and 7. 9. See figure 6.5-18. The default values of theseparameters are set from the motor nameplate data.


6

With the output current at IT the thermal state will reach the nominal value (100%).The thermal state changes with the square of the current. With output current at75% of IT the thermal state will reach 56% and with output current at 120% of IT

the thermal state would reach 144%. The function will trip the drive (refer par. 7. 5)if the thermal model reaches a value of 105%. The response time of the thermalmodel is determined by the time constant, parameter 7. 8. The larger the motorthe longer it takes to reach the final temperature.



Operation:


Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is selected, the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.

Deactivating the protectionby setting this parameter to 0, will reset the thermal stageof the motor to 0%.



The value is set as a percentage of the motor nameplate nominal current, parameter1. 13, nominal current of the motor, not the drive's nominal output current.


If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted, this parameter is automatically restored to its defaultvalue.

Setting this parameter (or parameter 1. 13) does not affect the maximum outputcurrent of the drive. Parameter 1. 7 alone determines the maximum outputcurrent of the drive.


The current can be set between 10.0—150.0% x InMotor. This parameter sets thevalue for thermal current at zero frequency. See figure 6.5-18.

The default value is set assuming that there is no external fan cooling the motor. If anexternal fan is used this parameter can be set to 90% (or higher).

The value is set as a percentage of the motor's nameplate nominal current,parameter 1. 13, not the drive's nominal output current. The motor's nominal

!CAUTION! The calculated model does not protect the motor if the cooling of

the motor is reduced either by blocking the airflow or due to dust ordirt.


6

Par. 7. 6

Par. 7. 7

IT

f

par. 1. 7

I

UMCH7_91Par. 7. 9

Overload area

Currentlimit

current is the current which the motor can stand in direct on-line use without be-ing overheated.

If you change parameter 1. 13, this parameter is automatically restored to thedefault value.

Setting this parameter (or parameter 1. 13) does not affect to the maximum out-put current of the drive. Parameter 1. 7 alone determines the maximum outputcurrent of the drive.


The time can be set between 0.5—300 minutes.This is the thermal time constant ofthe motor. The larger the motor the greater the time constant. The time constant isdefined as the time it takes the calculated thermal stage to reach 63% of its finalvalue.


The default value for the time constant is calculated based on the motor nameplatedata from parameters 1. 12 and 1. 13. If either of these parameters is reset, thenthis parameter is set to its default value.

If the motor's t6 -time is known (given by the motor manufacturer) the time constantparameter could be set based on t6 -time. As a rule of thumb, the motor thermaltime constant in minutes equals to 2xt6 (t6 in seconds is the time a motor can safelyoperate at six times the rated current). If the drive is in stopped, the time constant isinternally increased to three times the set parameter value. The cooling in the stopstage is based on convection with an increased time constant.


[Hz]


6

105%

par. 7. 5

Θ = (I/IT)2 x (1-e-t/T)

I/IT

UMCH7_92

Trip area

Motor temperature


Time constant T*)




The frequency can be set between 10—500 Hz.This is the frequency break point ofthermal current curve. With frequencies above this point the thermal capacity of themotor is assumed to be constant. See figure 6.5-18.

The default value is based on motor's nameplate data, parameter 1. 11. It is 35 Hzfor a 50 Hz motor and 42 Hz for a 60 Hz motor. More generally it is 70% of the frequencyat the field weakening point (parameter 6. 3). Changing either parameter 1. 11 or 6.3 will restore this parameter to its default value.


Motor stall protection protects the motor from short time overload situations like astalled shaft. The reaction time of stall protection can be set shorter than with motorthermal protection. The stall state is defined with two parameters, 7.11. Stall Currentand 7.13. Stall Frequency. If the current is higher than the set limit and outputfrequency is lower than the set limit, the stall state is true. There is actually no realindication of the shaft rotation. Stall protection is a type of overcurrent protection.


Operation:


Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is set on, the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.

Setting this parameter to 0 will deactivate the protection and will reset the stall timecounter to zero.

Figure 6.5-19 Calculating motor temperature


6

f

I

Par. 7. 11

Par. 7. 13 UMCH7_11

Stall area

7. 12 Stall time

The time can be set between 2.0—120 s.This is the maximum allowed time for a stall. There is an internal up/down counterto count the stall time. See figure 6.5-21. If the stall time counter value goes abovethis limit the protection will cause a trip (refer to the parameter 7. 10).

Par. 7. 12

UMCH7_12

Trip area

Time

Stall time counter

StallNo stall




In a stall the current has to beabove this limit. See figure6.5-20. The value is set as apercentage of the motor's name-plate nominal current, parameter1.13. If parameter 1.13 isadjusted, this parameter isautomatically restored to itsdefault value.


The frequency can be set between1—fmax (par. 1. 2).In the stall state, the outputfrequency has to be smaller thanthis limit. See figure 6.5-20.


The purpose of motor underload protection is to ensure that there is load on the motorwhile the drive is running. If the motor load is reduced, there might be a problem inthe process, e.g. broken belt or dry pump.


[Hz]




6

The torque values for setting the underload curve are set with percentage valueswhich refer to the nominal torque of the motor. The motor's nameplate data,parameter 1. 13, the motor's nominal current and the drive's nominal current ICTare used to find the scaling ratio for the internal torque value. If other thanstandard motor is used with the drive, the accuracy of the torque calculation isdecreased.


Operation:




7. 15 Underload protection, fieldweakening area load


This parameter is the value forthe minimum allowed torquewhen the output frequency isabove the field weakening point.See the figure 6.5-22. Ifparameter 1. 13 is adjusted, thisparameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value.






This is the maximum allowed time for an underload state. There is an internal up/down counter to accumulate the underload time. See figure 6.5-23. If the underloadcounter value goes above this limit, the protection will cause a trip (refer to theparameter 7. 14). If the drive is stopped the underload counter is reset to zero.

Par. 7. 15

ChCH7_15

Par. 7. 16

f5 Hz

Underload area

Torque


f [Hz]



6


The Automatic restart function restarts the drive after the faults selected withparameters 8. 4—8. 8. The Start function for Automatic restart is selected withparameter 8. 3.


The time counting starts from the first autorestart. If the number of restarts doesnot exceed the value of parameter 8.1 during the trial time, the counting is clearedafter the trial time has elapsed. The next fault starts the counting again. See figure6.5-2.

Par. 7. 17

UMCH7_17

Trip area

Time


Underl.No underl.


4

3

2

1

t

UD012K25


RUNSTOP


ttrial ttrial

Par. 8. 1 = 3ttrial = Par. 8. 2




6





0 = No automatic restart after undervoltage trip1 = Automatic restart after undervoltage fault condition returns to the normal condition (DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)


0 = No automatic restart after overvoltage trip1 = Automatic restart after overvoltage fault condition returns to the normal condition (DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)


0 = No automatic restart after overcurrent trip1 = Automatic restart after overcurrent faults


0 = No automatic restart after reference fault trip1 = Automatic restart after analog current reference signal (4—20 mA) returns to the normal level (>4 mA)

8. 8 Automatic restart after over/undertemperature fault trip

0 = No automatic restart after temperature fault trip1 = Automatic restart after heatsink temperature has returned to its normal level between -10°C—+75°C.


6

Flow

Output frequency

Start freq. of aux. drive 1 (par. 9.2 + 1 Hz)

Frequency after starting the aux. drive1 is par. 9.3 + 1 Hz

Stop freq. of aux. drive 1(par. 9.3 - 1 Hz)

Frequency after starting the aux. drive1is par. 9.3 - 1 Hz

Fminpar. 1.1

Start freq. of aux. drive 1 (par. 9.2 + 1 Hz)

Start delay of the aux. drives (par 9.10)

Frequency increase during the start delay

Stop freq. of aux. drive 1 (par. 9.3 - 1 Hz)

Frequency decrease during the stop delay

Output frequency

Flow

Stop delay of the aux. drives (par 9.11) Fmin

par. 1.1

Output frequency

9. 1 Number of auxiliary drives

With this parameter the number of auxiliary drives in use is defined. The signals tocontrol the auxiliary drives on and off can be programmed to the relay outputs or tothe digital output with parameters 3. 6 - 3. 8. The default setting is one auxiliary drivein use, pre-programmed to relay output RO1.

9. 2 Start frequency of auxiliary drive 19. 4 Start frequency of auxiliary drive 29. 6 Start frequency of auxiliary drive 3

The frequency of the HV9000 must exceed by 1 Hz the limit defined with theseparameters before the auxiliary drive is started. The 1 Hz provides hysteresis to avoidunnecessary starts and stops. See figure 6.5-25.

9. 3 Stop frequency of auxiliary drive 19. 5 Stop frequency of auxiliary drive 29. 7 Stop frequency of auxiliary drive 3

The frequency of the HV9000 must fall 1Hz below the limit defined with theseparameters before the auxiliary drive is stopped. The stop frequency limit also definesthe frequency the drive drops to after starting the auxiliary drive. See figure 6.5-25.

9. 10 Start delay of auxiliary drives

Starting of the auxiliary drives is delayed based on the time setting of parameter 9.10. This prevents unnecessary starts which could be caused by a flow referencerequest which is momentarily above the previous reference level. See figure 6.5-25.

9. 11 Stop delay of auxiliary drives

Stopping of the auxiliary drives is delayed based on the time setting of parameter 9.10. This prevents unnecessary stops which could be caused by a flow referencerequest which is momentarily below the previous reference level. See figure 6.5-25.

Figure 6.5-25 Example of the effect of parameters in variable speed and one auxiliarydrive system.

[Hz][Hz]


6

Time

Reference for PI-controller

Reference(analoginput)

Reference step 1par. 9.12



Aux. drive 1

start

stop start

stopAux. drive 2

Aux. drive 3 start

stop

9. 12 Reference step after start of the auxiliary drive 19. 13 Reference step after start of the auxiliary drive 29. 14 Reference step after start of the auxiliary drive 3

A reference step will automatically be added to the reference value when thecorresponding auxiliary drive is started. This allows compensation for the pressureloss in the piping caused by the increased flow. See figure 6.5-26.

9. 16 Sleep level9. 17 Sleep delay

Changing this parameter from a value of 0.0 Hz activates the sleep function wherethe drive is stopped automatically when the frequency is below the sleep level (par.9.16) continuously over the sleep delay (9. 17) time. During the stop state the Pumpand fan control logic is operating and will switch the drive to the Run state when thewake up level defined with parameters 9. 18 and 9. 19 is reached. See figure 6.5-27.

9. 18 Wake up level

The wake up level defines the percentage level below which the actual frequencymust fall or which has to be exceeded before starting the drive from the sleep function.See figure 6.5-27.

9. 19 Wake up function

This parameter defines if the wake up occurs when the frequency either falls belowor exceeds the wake up level (par. 9. 18).

Figure 6.5-26 Reference steps after starting and stopping the auxiliary drives.

Reference(analog input)


6

t < tsleep (param. 9.17)tsleep

Wake up level (param. 9.18 )

Actual value

Output frequency

Sleep levelparam. 9.16

Time

Time

Start/Stop status of the var. speed drive

running

stop

9. 20 PI-regulator bypass

With this parameter the PI-requlator can be programmed to be bypassed. Then thefrequency of the drive is controlled by the frequency reference and the starting pointsof the auxiliary drives are also defined by this reference.

Minimum freq.(par. 1.1)

Minimum of the actual value

Output freq.

Actual value

Maximum of the actual value

Start freq. of the aux. drive 1 (par.9.2)

Max. freq.(par. 1.2)

Stop freq. of the aux. drive 1 (par.9.3)

Stop freq. of the aux. drive 2 (par.9.5)

Start/stop control of the freq. converter

Auxiliary drive 1

stop

start

stop

start

stop

start

Start freq. of the aux. drive 2 (par.9.4)

Auxiliary drive 2

Figure 6.5-28 Example of the function of variable speed drive and two auxiliarydrives when PI-requlator is bypassed with parameter 9. 20.

Figure 6.5-27 Example of the sleep function.


6

6.6 MONITORING DATA

The PI-control application has additional items for monitoring (n20 - n25). See table 6.6-1

Data Data Unit Descriptionnumber name

n 1 Output frequency Hz Frequency to the motor

n 2 Motor speed rpm Calculated motor speed

n 3 Motor current A Measured motor current

n 4 Motor torque % Calculated actual torque/nominal torque of the unit

n 5 Motor power % Calculated actual power/nominal power of the unit

n 6 Motor voltage V Calculated motor voltage

n 7 DC-link voltage V Measured DC-link voltage

n 8 Temperature °C Temperature of the heat sink

n 9 Operating day counter DD.dd Operating days 1, not resettable

n 10 Operating hours, HH.hh Operating hours 2, can be reset with"trip counter" programmable button #3

n 11 MW-hours MWh Total MW-hours, not resettable

n 12 MW-hours, MWh MW-hours, can be reset with programmable"trip counter" button #4

n 13 Voltage/analog input V Voltage of the terminal Vin+ (term. #2)

n 14 Current/analog input mA Current of terminals Iin+ and Iin- (term. #4, #5)

n 15 Digital input status, gr. A

n 16 Digital input status, gr. B

n 17 Digital and relay outputstatus

n 18 Control program Version number of the control software

n 19 Unit nominal power Hp Shows the horsepower size of the unit

n 20 PI-controller reference % Percent of the maximum reference

n 21 PI-controller actual value % Percent of the maximum actual value

n 22 PI-controller error value % Percent of the maximum error value

n 23 PI-controller output Hz

n 24 Number of runningauxiliary drives

n 25 Motor temperature rise % 100%= temperature of motor has risen to nominal

1 DD = full days, dd = decimal part of a day2 HH = full hours, hh = decimal part of an hour

Table 6.6-1 Monitored items.


6

6.7 Panel reference

The Pump and fan control application has an extra reference (r2) for PI-controller on the panel'sreference page. See table 6.7-1.

Refrence Reference Range Step Function number name

r1 Frequency fmin—fmax 0.01 Hz Reference for panel control and reference I/O terminal Source B reference.

r2 PI-controller 0—100% 0.1% Reference for PI-controller reference

Table 6.7-1 Panel reference.


6

Remarks:

Cutler-Hammer, a part of Eaton Corporation, is a worldwide leader providing customer-driven solutions. From power distribution and electrical control products to industrial automation, Cutler-Hammer utilizes advanced product development, world-class manufacturing, and offers global engineering services and support.

For more information on Cutler-Hammer products and services,call 1-800-525-2000 or 1-616-982-1059, or visit our web site atwww.cutlerhammer.eaton.com

For Cutler-Hammer Adjustable Frequency Drives technicalinformation and support, please call 1-800-322-4986.

Publication No. TD.08H.18.T.EMarch 2000Printed in U.S.A. / GSP 1632

Copyright Cutler-Hammer Inc., 2000All Rights Reserved

Cutler-HammerMilwaukee, Wisconsin U.S.A.

TD

.08H

.18.

T.E

1652 HV9000 Cover 4/18/00 11:17 AM Page 2

Download - User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity

Top Related